Skip to main content

Full text of "Occasional papers of the California Academy of Sciences"

See other formats


'^^5- 


OCCASIONAL  PAPERS 

OF  THE 

California  Academy  of  Sciences 


No.  44,  154  pages,  50  figures,  frontispiece     November  8,  1963 


GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS 

A  Unique  Area  for  Scientific  Livestigations 


A  Symposium 

presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the 

Pacific   Science  Association,   held   at  the  University  of  Hawaii, 

Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.S.A.,  21  August  to  6  September  1961. 

Sponsored  by  the 

National  Academy  of  Sciences, 

Bernice  Pauahi  Bishop  Museum, 

and  the 

University  of  Hawaii     5  f/iarine  Bir  '  ■  ical  U 

L.  I  B  R  A  R  V 

■^'*^N0V2  51963 
WOODS  ftOlE,  IV!'^^^ 


San  Francisco 

Published  by  the  Academy 

1963 


Academy  Bay,  Isla  Santa  Cruz  (Indefatigable). 


Sulivan  Bay,  Isla  San  Salvador  (James).  View  from  Isla  Bartolome  (Bartholomew). 


OCCASIONAL  PAPERS 

OF  THE 

CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 

No.  44,  154  pages,   50  figures,  frontispiece  November  8,   1963 


GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS: 
A  Unique  Area  for  Scientific  Investigations 


A  Symposium  presented  at  the 

TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS 

ofthe   Pacific  Science  Association,  held   at 

the   University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,   Hawaii, 

U.S.A.,    21   August  to  6  September  1961. 

Sponsored    by   the 

National  Academy  of  Sciences, 
Bernice  Pauahi  bishop  Museum, 

and  the 

University  of  Hawaii 


Table  of  Contents 


PAGE 

Introduction.    VICTOR  Van  Straelen     5 

Bathymetry  in  the  Galapagos  Region.      George  Shumway 

AND  Thomas  E.  Chase H 

The  Climate  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.    Leo  Alpert 21 

Archaeology  in  the  Galapagos  Islands.    Thor  Heyerdahl    .  .       45 

Opportunities  for  Botanical  Study  on  the  Galapagos 

Islands.    Henry  K.  Svenson 53 

Biosystematic  Studies  on  Galapagos  Tomatoes. 

C.  M.  Rick 59 

Composition  and  Relationship  of  the  Terrestrial  Faunas 
of  Easter,  Juan  Fernandez,  Desventuradas,  and 
Galapagos  Islands.    Guillermo  Kuschel 79 

The  Marine  Shore-Fishes  of  the  Galapagos  Islands. 

Richard  H.  Rosenblatt  and  Boyd  W.  Walker 97 

Evolutionary  Patterns  in  Danvin's  Finches. 

Robert  I.  Bowman 107 

Protection  and  Conservation  Problems  on  the  Galapagos 

Islands.    Misael  AcosTA-SOLi's       141 

Future  Scientific  Studies  in  the  Galapagos  Islands. 

Jean  Dorst 147 


-3 


INTRODUCTION* 

Victor  Van  Straelen 

President 

Charles  Darwin  Foundation  for  the  Galapagos  Islands 

Brussels,   Belgium 


The  Galapagos  Archipelago  has  been  termed  a  "living laboratory  of  evo- 
lution." Today  no  other  oceanic  island  harbors  a  greater  number  of  endemic 
species  of  plants  and  animals  than  the  Galapagos.  Once  the  Hawaiian  Islands 
had  many  more.  Now  most  of  them  are  gone— gone  with  the  wind!  Such  a  di- 
saster could  have  been  prevented  with  proper  management  and  without  inter- 
fering with  local  economic  interests. 

To  those  of  us  who  are  concerned  with  the  historical  development  of 
knowledge,  and  more  particularly  of  the  biological  sciences,  it  is  striking  that 
the  most  momentous  turn  in  man's  outlook  on  life  and  its  forms  was  based  on 
observations  made  in  the  tropics.  From  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific  area  and 
some  of  the  islands  nearby,  Charles  Darwin  drew  his  most  significant  conclu- 
sions; from  the  western  Pacific  area,  in  the  Malayan  Archipelago,  Alfred  Rus- 
sel  Wallace  came  to  nearly  the  same  conclusions.  The  luxuriant  plant  and  an- 
imal life  of  islands  located  in  the  oldest  of  all  oceanic  areas  now  existing, 
were  incentives  to  answers  on  what  appeared  as  insoluble  enigmas. 

Wallace  and  Darwin  became  friends  and  in  1858  published  simultaneous- 
ly, at  a  meeting  of  the  Linnean  Society  of  London,  their  views  on  what  from 
thereon  was  to  be  known  as  the  theory  of  descent  and  the  theory  of  natural 
selection.  These  two  great  men  followed  their  research  in  the  same  directions 
although  on  divergent  subjects.  Wallace's  contribution  culminated  in  a  momen- 
tous book  entitled    Island  Life. 

But  in  1859  Darwin  published  his  book  "on  the  origin  of  species  by 
means  of  natural  selection,  or  the  preservation  of  favoured  races  in  the  strug- 
gle for  life."  Itisthe  result  ofhis  observations  made  during  a  voyage  of  near- 
ly five  years  on  board  the  Beagle,  from  the  2nd  of  December,  1831,  until  the 
29th  of  October,  1836.  Darwin  meditated  on  his  observations  for  more  than  20 
years  before  he  expressed  openly  his  conclusions  about  them.  He  had  visited 
many  islands,  among  which  I  shall  mention  now  only  the  Galapagos. 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.S.A.,  21  August 
to  6  September   1961,    and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,   and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

-5- 


6  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

At  a  time  when  nearly  all  biologists  accepted  the  constancy  of  species, 
Darwin  convinced  them  of  the  contrary,  not  by  a  mere  successful  compilation 
of  ideas,  but  by  the  presentation  of  new  ideas  and  a  wealth  of  new  facts. 
Stirred  by  his  observations  on  the  Galapagos,  Darwin  collected  a  vast  quan- 
tity of  evidence  and  used  it  for  the  demonstration  of  organic  evolution  brought 
about  by  natural  selection.  Before  that  the  idea  of  selection  was  only  known 
to  breeders  who  unconsciously  practiced  what  we  call  today  "artificial  selec- 
tion." 

This  year  (1961)  marks  the  131st  anniversary  of  the  start  of  this  mo- 
mentous adventure,  and  in  September,  precisely  the  127th  anniversary  of  Dar- 
win's contact  with  the  Galapagos.  He  arrived  there  on  the  15th  of  September, 
1835,  landing  on  Chatham  Island  (San  Cristobal).  Then  on  the  23rd  on  Charles 
Island  (Floreana),  on  Albemarle  (Isabela)  on  the  29th,  on  James  (Santiago) 
the  8th  of  October,  leaving  the  Galapagos  forever  on  the  20th  of  October.  His 
contact  with  the  fauna  of  these  islands  was  decisive  for  the  perception  of 
what  would  become  the  theory  of  descent  or  evolution.  Darwin  had  an  uncon- 
tested gift  for  new  observation  and  for  observing  new  facts  by  chance.  This 
was  the  case  with  the  species  of  birds  he  discovered  on  the  Galapagos. 

For  obvious  reasons,  Darwin's  attention  was  drawn  by  the  most  conspic- 
uous elements  of  the  Galapagos  fauna:  birds  and  reptiles.  It  is  nearly  always 
the  case,  vertebrates  and  phanerogams  easily  attract  attention.  But  Darwin, 
a  birdwatcher  from  his  early  boyhood,  picked  less  conspicuous,  but  most  in- 
teresting birds  from  the  point  of  view  of  evolution,  the  finches  (now  known  as 
Darwin's  Finches),  recently  so  masterly  studied  from  an  anatomical  and  ec- 
ological point  of  view  by  my  friend  Robert  Bowman,  Secretary  for  the  Americas 
of  the  Charles  Darwin  Foundation.  I  shall  dwell  no  longer  on  the  spectacu- 
lar biota  of  Galapagos. 

Surely,  by  the  irresponsible  action  of  man,  the  flora  and  the  fauna  of  the 
Galapagos  are,  in  many  respects,  no  more  what  they  once  were.  What  remains 
of  the  glorious  pieces  of  architecture  and  art  of  ancient  Greece  and  Rome? 
Were  they  not  until  recent  times  used  as  quarries  providing  building  stone  for 
the  housing  of  barbarian  invaders? 

But  man  can  destroy  beauty  which  can  also  be  replaced  by  man,  provided 
that  he  has  the  necessary  genius.  Never  is  he  able  to  coin  a  new  form  of  liv- 
ing being.    He  who  takes  that  responsibility  of  destruction,  even  if  he  has  no 
sense  of  doing  so,  cuts  forever  a  link  with  a  very  remote  past  and  an  infinite 
chain  of  processes  leading  to  an  unforeseeable  future. 

In  Galapagos  the  native  life  forms  and  their  associations  are  in  mortal 
danger.  Surely,  we  may  already  be  grateful  to  the  Ecuadorian  Government  for 
having  responded  favorably  to  the  many  calls  for  protection  that  scientific 
bodies  have  addressed  to  it  for  more  than  thirty  years,  such  as  the  National 
Academy  of  Sciences  of  the  United  States,  the  Royal  Society  of  London,  the 
Academiedes  Sciences  de  Paris,  die  Preussische  Akademie  des  Wissenschaf- 


No.  44)  VAN  STRAELEN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  7 

ten,  Academie  royale  de  Belgique,  and  so  on.  UNESCO  took  on  the  problem 
from  the  very  beginning  of  its  inception  as  an  international  organization  in  the 
days  when  Sir  Julian  Huxley  was  its  Director-General. 

In  1961  the  General  Assembly  of  the  International  Union  for  Biological 
Sciences  met  at  Amsterdam,  in  the  seat  of  the  Dutch  Royal  Academy  of  Scien- 
ces, and  on  July  15  voted  unanimously  a  resolution  imploring  the  Ecuadorian 
Government  to  take  steps  for  the  rescue  of  the  Galapagos  biological  treasures. 

On  the  29th  of  September,  1961,  the  Xth  Pacific  Science  Congress  as- 
sembled at  Honolulu  voted  unanimously  a  similar  motion.  Over  2750  scientists, 
coming  from  all  areas  surrounding  the  Pacific  Ocean  and  from  western  Europe, 
participated  in  this  action. 

But  protection  and  conservation  laws  as  enacted  on  two  occasions  for 
Galapagos  by  the  Government  of  Ecuador  are  very  difficult  to  enforce  and  they 
need  understanding.  Nature  conservation  is  a  technique  that  comes  under  ap- 
plied biology. 

This  is  the  reason,  among  many  others,  why,  under  the  sponsorship  of 
UNESCO,  the  Charles  Darwin  Foundation  for  the  Galapagos  Isles  was  created 
in  1959,  on  the  occasion  of  the  centennary  of  the  publication  of  "The  Origin 
of  Species."  No  more  fitting  memorial  could  be  erected  to  Charles  Darwin 
whose  name  stands  alongside  that  of  Isaac  Newton. 

By  mentioning  Isaac  Newton,  I  think  of  the  rapid  advances  of  the  physi- 
cal sciences  during  the  past  100  years,  progress  in  understanding  that  far  sur- 
passes the  rate  of  increase  of  knowledge  in  the  field  of  biology.  A  simple  cen- 
sus of  present  living  forms  is  still  in  its  very  beginnings.  Perhaps  no  more 
than  tv^enty-five  per  cent  of  lower  plants  and  animals  are  known.  Organisms, 
representing  high  ranking  systematic  divisions,  are  still  discovered  nowadays. 
Many  organisms  living  in  fresh  or  marine  waters  or  between  the  grains  of  soil 
remain  to  be  discovered.  The  behavior  and  life  conditions,  what  incur  present- 
day  jargon  we  call  ethology  and  ecology  respectively,  are  known  only  approx- 
imately for  a  few  vertebrates  and  insects. 

Why  is  this  so?  Because  many  branches  of  biology  did  not  have  the  ben- 
efit of  the  strong  cooperating  organizations  that  made  possible  the  incredible 
developments  of  physics  in  its  broadest  sense.  Biologists  are  still  the  poor- 
est among  the  members  ofthe  scientist  family.  The  future  generations  will  be 
amazed  by  the  neglect  from  which  we  are  suffering.  Does  man  not  belong  to 
that  largest  category  among  those  that  can  be  distinguished  on  earth  and  that 
are  the  living  beings?. 

It  is  one  ofthe  aims  of  the  Darwin  Foundation  to  go  into  a  close  inves- 
tigation of  the  life  communities  existing  on  the  Galapagos,  provided  this  or- 
ganization obtains  the  resources  needed.  A  very  ambitious  plan  has  been 
drawn  up  which  includes  many  problems  in  the  physical  and  geophysical  sci- 
ences. Many  years,  and  still  more  qualified  people  drawn  from  all  nations,  are 


8  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

needed  for  its  realization.  Surely,  as  discoveries  are  made,  the  plan  will  be 
broadened.  Everything  points  to  the  fact  that  speciation  in  the  Galapagos  is 
not  restricted  to  vertebrates,  but  includes  all  groups  of  living  beings  present 
on  the  isles  and  in  the  adjoining  seas. 

Until  recently,  investigations  on  the  origin  of  diversification  in  marine 
organisms  have  been  made  on  a  very  restricted  number  ofmollusks  and  fishes. 
There  is  much  evidence  that  the  seas  bathing  the  shores  of  Galapagos  will 
provide  a  most  favorable  opportunity  for  tackling  these  problems.  The  diver- 
sity of  the  physics  of  waters  due  to  the  confluence  of  cold  and  warm  currents 
is  surely  at  the  origin  of  great  differentiations  in  the  environments.  Variations 
in  ecological  factors  are,  evidently,  responsible  in  the  long  run  for  morpho- 
logical variations,  and  as  we  all  know,  living  beings  until  now,  have  been  de- 
fined mainly  by  their  shapes. 

Another  aspect  of  investigations  on  sea-waters  has  recently  been  re- 
vealed. Up  to  now  sea-water  appeared  to  be  a  solution  of  mineral  salts.  There 
is  much  evidence  that  besides  these  salts  a  fair  amount  of  organic  matter  is 
dissolved  in  the  seas.  Saturated  and  non-saturated  hydrocarbons  exist.  In 
most  of  the  waters  of  the  old  world  this  problem  cannot  safely  be  investigated 
on  account  of  the  numerous  streams  carrying  enormous  amounts  of  polluted 
waters  into  the  oceans.  This  complication  does  not  exist  around  Galapagos 
and  therefore  this  region  provides  an  ideal  site  for  future  investigations  along 
this  line. 

All  over  the  world  the  bulk  of  life  communities  remain  unexplored.  Be- 
low the  northern  tropics,  especially  on  the  American  continent,  the  wealth  and 
variety  of  these  communities  is  far  greater  than  in  any  other  part  of  the  world 
at  the  same  latitude. 

No  continent  possesses  a  greater  wealth  of  plant  and  animal  life  than 
Central  and  South  America.  We  know  that  until  about  a  century  ago,  it  was  the 
same  for  the  Caribbean  islands,  now  covered  with  a  cosmopolitan  world  of  life 
that  came  in  and  destroyed  biological  communities  as  endemic  as  those  of  the 
Galapagos. 

On  the  South  American  continent  life  is  far  richer  than  in  Africa.  The 
Congo  and  Cameroon  forests,  the  only  green  spots  of  importance  still  exist- 
ing in  Africa,  maybe  mentioned  as  poor  when  they  are  compared  with  the  Am- 
azonian forest  in  its  broadest  sense.  The  potentialities  of  these  renewable 
resources  are  as  yet  unexplored. 

The  Galapagos  international  undertaking  cannot  bear  full  fruit  unless, 
first  of  all,  it  is  considered  by  the  Ecuadorian  nation  as  its  own  enterprise. 
Without  its  understanding  and  its  cooperation  in  earnest,  nothing,  in  the  long 
run,  can  be  achieved.  Besides  the  endless  investigations  we  ought  to  con- 
sider the  conservation  techniques  that  are  now  well  worked  out  in  many  coun- 
tries. 

The  release  of  exotic  species  must  be  stopped  all  over  the  archipelago 


No.  44)         VAN  STRAELEN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM         9 

and  especially  in  those  areas  of  Galapagos  designated  as  wildlife  reserves. 
In  the  latter,  the  exotics  that  turned  feral  must  be  controlled  through  exterm- 
ination or  by  removal.    Also,  the  transplantation  of  native  species  from  one 
island  to  another  should  be  prohibited  until  the  results  of  studies  still  to  be 
done  are  known. 

Any  defacement  of  the  protected  areas,  due  to  irresponsible  yachtsmen 
coming  from  abroad,  must  be  stopped. 

I  hope  that  the  day  will  soon  come  when  all  our  South  American  states 
will  establish  large  natural  reserves  on  their  territories  following  the  example 
of  the  Republic  of  Ecuador. 

A  heavy  responsibility  rests  on  the  shoulders  of  the  South  American  re- 
publics with  regard  to  the  proper  use  and  maintenance  of  the  wealth  of  their 
territories.  They  are  now  confronted  with  the  conservation  problems  and  all 
that  this  means.  Let  them  not  follow  the  distressing  examples  of  so  many  ter- 
ritories of  the  Old  World. 

From  my  early  childhood  I  had  contacts  with  Latin  America.  It  is  only 
during  the  last  ten  years  that  I  have  been  called  upon  to  participate  in  certain 
scientific  undertakings  sponsored  there  by  UNESCO.  The  philosophy  of  all 
the  states  of  this  continent  is  not  unfamiliar  to  me.  Expression  of  high  ideals 
are  easily  discovered,  even  when  they  are  hidden  by  a  passing  dark  cloud, 
whose  silver  lining  reveals  the  persistence  of  the  source  of  enlightenment. 

Educational  systems  are  an  expression  of  the  ideas  of  nations.  Let  the 
Latin  American  systems  offer  some  chances  for  the  understanding  of  nature 
and  its  conservation  so  as  to  make  the  gift  of  life  more  valuable  and  the  men 
more  worthy  of  the  gift. 


BATHYMETRY  IN  THE  GALAPAGOS  REGION 


George  Shumway 

U.  S.  Navy  Electronics  Laboratory 
San  Diego,   California 

and 
Thomas  E.  Chase 

U.  S.  Bureau  of  Commercial  Fisheries 
Biological  Laboratory 
San  Diego,   California 


Most  of  the  bathymetric  data  presented  here  are  from  expeditions  of 
Scripps  Institution  of  Oceanography,  based  on  sounding  lines  obtained  while 
crossing  the  region  during  the  course  of  other  work  (fig.  1).  Especially  use- 
ful sounding  lines  were  obtained  by  Scripps  expeditions  SHELLBACK,  DOL- 
PHIN, STEP-I,  RISEPAC,  and  SWAN-SONG.  Additional  sounding  lines  have 
come  from  U.S.  Navy  ships  participating  inHIJUMP  expedition.  U.S.  Navy  Hy- 
drographic  Office  chart  1798  contains  a  number  of  isolated  soundings  in  the 
vicinity  of  the  islands  which  also  were  included.  Because  available  data  are 
not  abundant  and  sounding  information  is  randomly  located,  the  charts  pre- 
sented here  must  be  considered  only  a  preliminary  synthesis. 

On  all  expeditions  of  Scripps  Institution  of  Oceanography,  echo  sound- 
ings were  obtained  with  AN/UQ-1  echo  sounders  and  were  recorded  on  Preci- 
sion Depth  Recorders  (except  SHELLBACK,  made  before  PDR's  were  used). 
The  acoustic  soundings  were  made  with  the  assumption  of  an  average  sound 
speed  in  sea  water  of  4800  ft/sec.  Corrections  for  true  water  sound  speed  have 
not  been  made. 

The  remoteness  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  from  the  important  world  trade 
routes  and  the  incomplete  status  of  the  mapping  of  the  ocean  floors  have  left 
the  bathymetry  of  the  Galapagos  region  relatively  unknown  up  to  the  present 
time.  In  the  past  decade  sufficient  data  have  accumulated  to  construct  the 
charts  presented  here  (figs.  2,  3,  5,  6,  7).  A  series  of  charts  of  the  eastern 
tropical  Pacific  including  the  Galapagos  region  is  being  prepared  by  the  U.S. 
Bureau  of  Commercial  Fisheries  and  the  Institute  of  Marine  Resources,  Uni- 
versity of  California. 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.  S.  A.,  21  August 
to   6  September  1961,    and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,     BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,    and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 


- 11 


12 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


io*> 


I00< 


95< 


90« 


85= 


80< 


75° 


Figure    1.     Sounding  lines  in  the  east  equatorial  Pacific  Ocean,  from  Scripps  Institution 
of  Oceanography  and  U.  S.  Navy  cruises. 


Regional   Setting 

The  Galapagos  Islands  are  a  group  of  typical  Pacific  Basin  basaltic 
volcanoes  (MacDonald,  1949)  about  which  there  is  little  petrographic  informa- 
tion. The  volcanoes  do  not  rise  directly  from  the  deep  sea  floor,  but  are  perched 
on  a  platform  elevated  a  thousand  fathoms  or  more  above  the  surrounding  deep 
sea  floor.  This  platform  connects  through  a  saddle  on  the  east  with  the  Car- 
negie Ridge  (Shumway,  1957),  and  on  the  north  it  joins  Cocos  Ridge  (Shumway, 
1954).  Typical  fracture  zone  topography  (Menard,  1955a,  1955b,  1960;  Menard 
and  Fisher,  1958)  extends  westward  from  the  vicinity  of  Darwin  Island  for 
more  than  a  thousand  miles. 

In  the  past  decade,  largely  through  the  efforts  of  H.  W.  Menard  and  R.  L. 
Fisher  of  Scripps  Institution  of  Oceanography,  an  overall  picture  of  the  bath- 
ymetry in  the  eastern  Pacific  Ocean  has  come  to  light.  It  reveals  that  the  dom- 
inant topographic  features,    beyond  the  trenches   at  the  continental  margins. 


No.  44) 


SHUMWAY  &  CHASE:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


13 


CREST   OF    EAST    PACIFIC    RISE 
(\\\\\1    FRACTURE    ZONES 
RIDGES 


40« 


20« 


20° 


40« 


160° 


140° 


120 


Figure   2.     Crest  of  East  Pacific  Rise  and  location  of  East  Pacific    fracture  zones  (after 
Menard,  1960,  modified), 

are  the  East  Pacific  Rise,  which  is  an  elongated  bulge  of  the  sea  floor  ex- 
tending from  the  vicinity  of  Antarctica  to  the  Gulf  of  Alaska,  and  a  series  of 
fracture  zones  running  westward  from  the  continents  for  distances  up  to  3000 


14 


CALIFORNIA  ACADENiY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


miles  (fig.  2)  (Menard,  1960).  The  Galapagos  Islands  are  located  on  the  east- 
ern flank  of  the  East  Pacific  Rise,  and  the  Galapagos  fracture  zone  cuts  across 
the  East  Pacific  Rise  and  apparently  dies  out  on  the  western  flank.  The  fact 
that  Cocos  Ridge  meets  the  trend  of  the  Galapagos  fracture  at  an  oblique  an- 
gle does  not  seem  to  be  unique,  for  the  Clipperton  fracture  to  the  north  has 
the  Tehuantepec  Ridge  joining  it  obliquely,  and  the  Easter  fracture  zone  to 
the  south  has  the  Nasca  Ridge  joining  it  obliquely;  all  three  ridges,  Cocos, 
Tehuantepec,  and  Nasca  have  similar  northeast-southwest  trends.  Thus  the 
fracture  zone  and  ridges  associated  with  the  Galapagos  Islands  are  part  of  a 
regular  system  of  topography  in  the  eastern  Pacific. 


Figure    3.      Eastern  portion   of  Galapagos   Fracture    Zone,    showing  location   of  transverse 
profiles. 


Galapagos  Fracture  Zone 

The  existence  of  fracture  zone  topography  west  of  Darwin  Island  was 
shown  by  Shumway  (1954)  on  the  basis  of  two  echo  sounding  lines  run  across 
it  by  the  SHELLBACK  expedition;  but  when  his  manuscript  was  written  in  1953, 
fracture  zones  had  net  assumed  the  importance  geologically  they  now  have. 
The  matter  was  not  pursued  further  at  that  time.  Menard  (1955)  mentioned  that 
on  the  basis  of  the  limited  information  then  available,  a  fracture  zone  running 
west  from  the  region  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  probably  existed.  By  1960  with 
more  data  available,  Menard  (1960)  included  a  fracture  zone  in  the  vicinity  of 
the  Galapagos  Islands  on  his  bathymetric  chart  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

The  following  description  of  the  Galapagos  fracture  zone  is  preliminary 
and  is  based  upon  soundings  obtained  through  1961.    These  data  consist  pri- 


No.  44) 


SHUMWAY  &  CHASE:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


15 


J    STEP 


_U- 


J^J^, 


^IkJIk 


SWAN    SONG 


96°  W 


95°  W 


N 

1 

s 

4 

•M 

VN 

!■« 

,-. 

oooru- 

SHELLBACK 

1 

IBOO- 

1 

y.A-^Vv— ^-— ^^  ^/.       \ 

\ 

. 

— 1- 

'l/V/" 

~-^-\^vyi 

lil^     ^ 

-        " 

5-H 

2-N 

I'N 

OOFM- 

EASTROPIC 

I90O- 

— 

,-A 

/\— • — ^ 

^ 

Z( 

^'^ 

■ 

lorw 


4'N 

3'N 

2*N 

(• 

SHELLBACK 

A 

rtfl 

1500- 

J 

J 

V 

iOOO- 

lV 

^ — -^— 

^ 

— '       '[lillll!l!lllllllil 

lililliillllllllillllllllllllllliilllllllllll 

IllHliliHillilliilii 

liliil liJll,!l,lll!llllllllllllllllli 

llllllillllll; 

■iiiiUll 

lorw 


GALAPAGOS   FRACTURE   ZONE 


VERT    EXAG     <  20 


Figure  4.    Transverse  profiles  across  eastern  portion  of  Galapagos  Fracture  Zone. 

marily  of  transverse  crossings  of  the  zone.  Large  areas  remain  to  be  surveyed 
to  ascertain  the  continuity  of  east-west  trending  ridges,  troughs,  and  other 
structures   (figs.   3,  4). 

For  the  sake  of  explicitness  we  refer  to  the  zone  of  irregular  topography 
running  west  from  Darwin  Island  as  the  Galapagos  fracture  zone,  and  retain 
the  established  names  Cocos  Ridge  and  Carnegie  Ridge  for  the  related  struc- 
tures to  the  east.  This  does  not  imply  that  the  variously  named  features  are 
structurally  separate  entities.  Rather,  it  is  probable  that  these  features  are 
structurally  related  and  that  they  are  part  of  the  fracture  zone. 

Galapagos  Platform 

The  volcanic  islands  of  the  Galapagos  are  perched  on  top  of  a  platform 
whose  top  lies  a  thousand  fathoms  or  more  above  the  deep  sea  floor  to  the 
south  (fig.  5).  It  does  not  seem  appropriate  to  call  this  feature  a  ridge,  for 
at  the  700  fathom  isobath  it  has  a  length  of  270  sea-miles  and  a  width  of  about 
100  sea-miles,  and  isobathic  contours  along  its  southwestern  slope  have  a 
marked  convexity. 

To  the  east,  the  platform  connects  through  a  saddle  with  the  western 
end  of  the  Carnegie  Ridge  (figure  6  (Shumway,  1957).  The  low  point  of  the 
saddle  lies  between  1200  fathoms  and  1300  fathoms. 


16 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


GALAPAGOS     ISLANDS    REGION 


Figure  5.    Bathymetry  in  the  vicinity  of  Galapagos  Islands. 


On  the  south,  southwest,  and  west  sides,  the  Galapagos  platform  drops 
steeply  to  the  deep-sea  floor  at  more  than  1800  fathoms  depth.  On  the  south- 
west side  there  is  an  elongate  depression  about  200  fathoms  deeper  than  the 
sea  floor  farther  to  the  southwest  (fig.  5).  Similar  marginal  depressions  often 
are  present  around  large  seamounts,  and  a  notable  depression  is  found  along 
the  eastern  and  northeastern  sides  of  the  Hawaiian  Ridge  (Hamilton,  1957). 
The  steep  side  of  the  platform  lies  close  to  the  west  and  southwest  sides  of 
Fernandina  Island  and  Isabella  Island,  with  depths  of  1700  fathoms  being 
found  within  6  or  8  sea-miles  of  the  islands. 

On  the  northeast  side  of  the  platform  the  bottom  drops  off  gradually  to- 
ward the  Panama  Basin  without  complications.  On  the  north  and  northwest 
sides,  however,  the  topography  is  complex;  it  is  in  this  region  that  the  frac- 
ture zone,  Galapagos  platform,  and  Cocos  Ridge  meet  (figs.  3,  5,  7).  Unfor- 
tunately, not  enough  sounding  data  are  available  to  allow  the  complex  topo- 
graphy to  be  resolved  in  the  detail  desirable, 

A  tongue  of  relatively  deep  water,  i.e.  greater  than  1400  fathoms,  lies 
between  the  north  end  of  Isabella  Island,  Pinta  Island,  and  Marchena  Island. 
Darwin  Island  and  Wolf  Island  are  isolated  from  the  Galapagos  platform  by 
about  60  sea-miles  of  water  deeper  than  1200  fathoms;  in  this  respect  they 
are  not  part  of  the  Galapagos  group. 

The  upper  surface  of  the  Galapagos  platform  contains  numerous  irregu- 
larities that  cannot  be  contoured  adequately  on  the  basis  of  available  sound- 
ing data.   No  attempt  has  been  made  to  depict  contours  shoaler  than  700  fath- 


No.  44) 


SHUMWAY  &  CHASE:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


17 


Figure  6.     Bathymetry  for  Carnegie   Ridge   and  the  eastern  end  of  the  Galapagos  Platform. 

oms  (fig.  5).     A  very  detailed  survey  would  be  necessary  to  determine  the  in- 
ter-island bathymetry. 


Cocos   Ridge 

Cocos  Ridge,  running  from  the  vicinity  of  Costa  Rica  to  the  region  im- 
mediately north  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  via  Cocos  Island  was  discussed  by 
Shumway  (1954).  Since  then  additional  sounding  data  which  improve  knowl- 
edge of  the  ridge  have  been  obtained  (fig.  7).  Fisher's  (1961)  chart  of  the 
Middle  America  Trench  shows  that  the  northern  end  of  Cocos  Ridge  is  termin- 
ated by  relatively  deeper  water  at  the  eastern  end  of  the  Middle  America  Trench. 
The  trench,  however,  does  not  extend  east  of  the  ridge.  These  facts  suggest 
that  the  two  structures  have  exerted  some  influence  upon  each  other  at  their 
place  of  junction. 

A  favorably  directed  sounding  line,  running  in  an  east-west  direction  at 
about  5°  N.  latitude,  was  obtained  by  Scripps  Institution  of  Oceanography  ex- 
pedition DOLDRUMS.  A  bathymetric  profile  drawn  from  data  obtained  on  this 
sounding  line  (fig.  8)  reveals  a  domed  central  portion  about  100  sea-miles  in 
width  flanked  on  the  west  by  a  steep  escarpment  about  500  fathoms  high.  To 
the  east  of  the  escarpment  there  is  a  steep-sided  elevation,  but  apparently  this 
is  a  local  feature. 

The  data  suggest  that  the  northwest  flank  of  Cocos  Ridge  may  be  a  zone 
of  particular  crustal  instability  where  repeated  volcanic  activity  has  created 


18 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


W>    •W*    COhw(IKJA<.    rijMfA.tS    4     WSkt 


COCOS    RIDGE 


Figure  7.     Bathymetry  for  (^oros  Ridge. 

a  narrow  ridge,  portions  of  which  rise  higher  than  the  main,  central  part  of 
cos  Island,  is  located  along  this  northwestern  flanking  ridge. 


Co- 


SUMMARY 

The  Galapagos  Islands  rise  from  an  elongated  platform  ofeastwest  trend 
which  at  the  700  fathom  isobath  is  270  sea-miles  long  and  100  sea-miles  wide. 
South  and  west  of  this  platform  the  sea  floor  drops  steeply  to  depths  greater 
than  1800  fathoms.  The  eastern  end  of  the  platform  connects  through  a  saddle 
with  the  Carnegie  Ridge.     On  the  northeast  side  of  the  platform  the  sea  floor 


No.  44) 


SHUMWAY  &  CHASE:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


19 


VERT    EXAG      X20 


Figure  8.     Bathymetric  profile  across  Cocos  Ridge   along  an  east-west  line  at  5°N. 

drops  off  gradually  toward  the  Panama  Basin.  To  the  north,  the  platform  unites 
with  the  end  of  Cocos  Ridge  and  with  a  fracture  zone  that  extends  westward 
from  the  vicinity  of  Darwin  Island. 

The  fracture  zone  that  extends  almost  due  west  from  Darwin  Island  con- 
tains topographic  features  typical  of  the  other  fracture  zones  which  parallel 
it  to  the  north.  This  distinctive  topography,  with  high  narrow  ridges  adjacent 
to  deep  troughs,  extends  at  least  600  sea-miles  west  of  Darwin  Island;  the 
zone  is  less  well  defined  farther  west,  but  there  is  evidence  of  it  as  far  as 
1600  miles  west  of  Darwin  Island. 


Literature    Cited 


Fisher,  R.  L. 

1961.  Middle  America  Trench:  topography  and  structure.  Geological  Society 
of  America    Bulletin,  vol.   72,    pp.   703-720. 

Hamilton,  E.  L. 

1957.  Marine    geology  of  the    southern   Hawaiian   Ridge.     Geological   Society  of 

America   Bulletin,  vol.  68,    pp.   1011-1026. 

MACDONALD,    G.    A. 

1949.  Hawaiian  petrographic  province.  Geological  Society  of  America  Bulle- 
tin, vol.  60,  pp.   1541-1596. 

Menard,  H.  W. 

1955a.  Deformation  of  the  northeastern  Pacific  Basin  and  the  west  coast  of 
North  America.  Geological  Society  of  America  Bullet  in,  vol.  66,  pp. 
1149-1198. 

Menard,  H.  W.,  and  R.  L.  Fisher 

1958.  Clipperton    Fracture    Zone   in   the   northeastern   equatorial  Pacific.     Jour- 

nal of  Geology,  vol.   66,  pp.   239-253. 

SHUMWAY,  Geo. 

1954.         Carnegie    Ridge    and   Cocos    Ridge    in   the    east   equatorial   Pacific.      Jour- 
nal of  Geology,  vol.  62,  pp.   573-586. 
1957.         Carnegie   Ridge   bathymetry.    Deep-Sea   Research,   vol.4,  pp. 250-253. 


THE  CLIMATE  OF  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS* 


Leo  Alpert 

Tropical  and  Desert  Branch 

Earth  Sciences  Division 

Army  Research  Office,  OCRD 

Washington,    D.   C 


Introduction 

Little  information  is  available  about  the  climate  of  the  Galapagos  Is- 
lands -  and  for  that  matter,  about  the  entire  Eastern  Tropical  Pacific  Ocean 
Area  -  because  of  the  scarcity  of  surface  and  upper  air  weather  observations. 
Prior  to  World  War  II,  the  only  weather  data  available  were  contained  in  the 
records  of  a  few  scientific  expeditions  that  had  visited  the  islands  from  time 
to  time,  and  some  sporadic  observations  of  local  inhabitants.  Since  the  ex- 
peditions spent  only  a  few  weeks  in  any  one  locality  and  were  primarily  inter- 
ested in  the  fauna,  flora,  and  geology  of  the  islands  rather  than  in  the  climate, 
no  complete  series  of  weather  observations  was  obtained.  In  addition,  no  ser- 
ies of  winds  aloft  or  radiosonde  observations  had  been  made. 

The  observations  made  by  Wolf  (1879,  1892,  and  1895)  during  August  to 
November,  1875,  and  May  to  July,  1878,  have  been  the  basis  of  all  previous 
analyses  of  the  weather  and  climate  of  the  islands. 

The  Galapagos  expedition  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  spent 
one  year,  September  24,  1905,  to  September  25,  1906,  in  the  archipelago,  vis- 
iting each  island  at  least  once  and  some  of  the  larger  islands  two  or  more  times 
at  different  seasons  of  the  year.  Observations  and  notes  concerning  meteor- 
ological conditions  during  this  period,  and  also  the. botanical  regions  from 
which  much  valuable  information  can  be  inferred  (Stewart,  1911),  have  gone 
almost  unnoticed,  not  being  utilized  by  either  Knoch  (1930)  or  Schott  (1931, 
1935,  and  1938). 

During  World  War  II,  an  airbase  and  weather  station  (0°27'S.,  90°6'W., 
10  feet  msl)  were  established  on  Seymour  Island  (fig.  1).      Seymour  Island  is 
small  and  "pear  shaped,"  located  just  north  of  Santa  Cruz  Island,  and  sep- 
arated from  it  by  a  narrow  channel  less  than  one-half  mile  wide.     Seymour  is 
five  miles  long  and  three  and  one-half  miles  wide  in  its  widest  southern  half. 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.  S.  A.,  21  August 
to   6  September   1961,   and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL   ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,    and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

-21- 


22 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


9  0'30' 
STATIONS- 


SEYMOUR 


MILES 


Figure  1.     Topographic  map  of  Seymour  Island  and  Santa  Cruz  Island, 


The  volcanic  rock  surface  slopes  gradually  upward  from  a  sandy  beach  in  the 
west  to  a  200-foot  cliff  on  the  windward  southeast. 

The  highest  peak  on  Santa  Cruz  Island  (2,835  ft.)  lies  12  miles  SSW.  of 
the  former  weatherstation  on  Seymour  Island,  and  is  the  principal  topographic 
feature  in  the  immediate  station  vicinity.  This  mountain  influences  consider- 
ably the  weather  and  climate  of  the  whole  of  Santa  Cruz  Island. 

Half-hourly  surface  observations  for  aircraft  operations  were  made  from 
August,  1942,  to  August,  1945.  They  included  only  such  elements  as  pres- 
sure, temperature,  wind  direction  and  speed,  relative  humidity,  precipitation, 
sky  condition,  cloud  type  (amount  and  direction),  and  weather.  No  data  were 
obtained  on  solar  radiation,  evaporation,  transpiration,  soil  temperature  and 
moisture,  and  dew.  In  addition  to  these  surface  observatioits,  some  aircraft 
observations  were  made  during  this  period;  two  to  four  winds  aloft  observa- 
tions were  made  daily  (Alpert,  1946),  and,  between  February,  1943,  and  July, 
1944,  one  radiosonde  observation  was  made  daily.  When,  in  late  1945,  the  air- 
base  on  Seymour  Island  was  turned  over  to  Ecuador,  the  weather  station  was 
closed. 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


23 


The  only  other  series  of  weather  observations  of  any  consequence  are 
those  for  the  weather  station  (0°  54' S.,  89°  30' W.,  20  feet  msl)  on  San  Cristo- 
bal Island  (figure  2).  The  observations  cover  the  nine-year  period,  1950  through 
1958,  and  include  only  pressure,  temperature,  weather,  precipitation,  wind 
direction  and  speed,  humidity,  cloud  type  and  amount,  and  storms. 

Plans  are  underway  to  establish  observation  stations  on  Seymour,  Isa- 
bella, Florena,  and  Santa  Cruz  islands.  A  weather  station  is  being  planned  for 
the  Charles  Darwin  Research  Station  at  Academy  Bay  on  the  south  coast  of 
Santa  Cruz  Island  (figure  2).  All  of  these  weather  stations  are  located  near 
sea  level  and  close  to  shore.  No  significant  series  of  weather  observations 
are  available  for  the  mountainous  interior  of  any  of  the  islands,  where  clima- 
tic conditions  are  known  to  differ  considerably  from  those  in  the  arid  lowlands. 


Figure  2.     Location  of  weather  stations  in  the  Galapagos  Islands. 


The  Dry  Season 
Along  the  coast  the  year  is  divided  climatologically  into  two  distinct 


24 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Figure  3.  Patrol  aircraft  weather  reports  over  the  tropical  eastern  Pacific  Ocean,  No- 
vember 16,  1942.  The  intertropical  convergence  zone  is  shown  by  the  dashed  double  line.  The 
station  model  is  outlined  in  Appendix  A.   (See  Page  42) 


seasons,  the  rainy  season  lasting  from  January  through  April,  and  the  dry 
season  lasting  the  remainder  of  the  year. 

During   the  dry  season,   the   intertropical  convergence   zone  is   located 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


25 


far  north  of  the  islands  as  shown  in  the  example  in  figure  3,  and  exerts  no 
direct  influence  on  the  climate.  Divergency  in  the  South  Equatorial  Current 
south  of  the  islands  causes  upwelling  of  cold  water  which  is  carried  past  the 
southern  islands.  Figure  4  shows  the  August  ocean  surface  temperature  for 
the  Eastern  Pacific  Ocean.  A  narrow  belt  of  relatively  cold  water  extends  in 
an  east-west  direction  between  5°S.  and  the  Equator.  Ocean  surface  tempera- 
tures increase  rapidly  north  of  the  Equator.  The  southerly  surface  winds  (see 
figure  3)  are  cooled  in  the  lower  layers  by  this  cold  water.  Consequently, 
abnormally  low  air  temperatures  for  an  island  station  at  sea  level  in  the  trop- 
ics, are  recorded  during  the  months  of  June  through  December.  Table  1  shows 
the  climatological  data  at  Seymour  Island.  The  mean  daily  maximum  tempera- 
ture is  66°  F. 


Figure  4.     August  ocean-surface  isotherms  for  the  eastern  Pacific  Ocean. 


The  cooling  of  the  lower  atmosphere  and  subsidence  in  the  South  Paci- 
fic high  pressure  cell,  shown  in  figure  5,  contribute  to  the  formation  of  a  tem- 
perature inversion.  In  August,  1952,  (Neiburger,  1958),  radiosonde  observa- 
tions from  ships  indicated  that  the  height  of  the  base  of  the  inversion  was  at 
600  meters  among  the  southern  islands  at  1°  South  latitude,  and  increased  to 
a  height  of  800  meters  among  the  northern  islands  at  the  Equator  (figure  6). 
Figure?  shows  two  soundings;  one  on  31  March  1943,  made  during  an  extend- 
ed humid  spell  (lasting  from  29  March  to  2  April  1943,  table  2)  of  the  rainy 
season,  and  the  other  on  20  October  1943,  during  an  extreme  development  of 
a  temperature  inversion  in  the  dry  season.  Table  3  gives  additional  informa- 


26 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


tion  (relative  humidity  and  mixing  ratio)  for  these  two  soundings;  and  table  4 
shows  the  winds  aloft  observations  on  these  two  days.  This  inversion  is  read- 
ily apparent  in  the  dry  season  sounding  of  20   October  1943,    shown  by  the 
dashed  line  in  figure  6.  On  the  average,  the  inversion  base  is  at  3,000  to  4,000 
feet,  and  the  top  is  at  5,000  to  6,000  feet. 

Compared  to  the  rainy  season,  there  is  a  marked  "drying"  of  the  entire 
air  mass  (lower  specific  humidity)  especially  immediately  about  the  base  of 
the  inversion,  which  prevents  moisture  from  diffusing  aloft  from  the  surface 
layers  (table  3).  The  lifting  and  convective  condensation  levels  increase  in 
height  and  the  air  mass  is  stable  for  ordinary  lifting  and  surface  heating  pro- 
cesses. Thus,  convection  and  the  formation  of  cumulus  clouds,  typical  of  the 
tropics,  are  dampened. 

Table   1.     Clhnatological  data  at  Seymour  Island  weather  station. 


J 

V 

M 

A 

M 

J 

J 

A 

s 

O 

N 

D 

An. 

Average  pressure 

1000  mb+  (T 

11.8 

11.0 

10.8 

10.9 

11.1 

12.4 

12.6 

13.0 

13.0 

13.0 

12.6 

12.5 

12.1 

Mean  Maximum 

temperature  (2^ 

86 

86 

88 

87 

86 

83 

81 

81 

80 

81 

81 

83 

Mean  maximum 

temperature  (2^ 

72 

75 

75 

75 

73 

71 

69 

67 

66 

67 

68 

70 

Prevailing  wind 

direction  (2^ 

SE 

V. 

t; 

!•: 

SSE 

SSE 

SSE 

SSE 

SSE 

SSE 

SSE 

SSE 

Average  wind 

speed  (2^ 

8 

i 

6 

8 

10 

10 

10 

11 

11 

11 

10 

10 

Average  relative 

humidity  (3_ 

74 

78 

76 

80 

76 

74 

76 

75 

74 

70 

71 

71 

Total  rainfall  {X_ 

0.81 

1.39 

1.06 

0.67 

T 

0.01 

0.01 

0.01 

T 

0.01 

T 

T 

3.97 

Prevailing  charac- 

ter of  rain- 

fall (4 

RW 

RW 

RW 

RW 

RW 

RW-I. 

L 

L 

\. 

L 

L 

L 

Total  numberdays 

with  rainfall  (J 

8 

9 

6 

6 

4 

4 

9 

8 

^ 

2 

4 

6 

73 

Number  of  days 

with  thunder- 

storms (5^ 

0 

<1 

1 

<1 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

0 

Percent  of  time 

sky  was 

overcast  \1_ 

23 

9 

12 

13 

9 

26 

29 

28 

30 

23 

29 

24 

(I-  August  1942  -  April  1944 

(J-  August   1942  - 

August    194J 

) 

(2  -  August   1942  -  February  1945 

(5^-  January   1943  - 

August   194 

5 

(3^-  January  1943-  February  1945 

No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


27 


Table  2.     Daily  rciinfctll  at  Seymour  Island  weather  station  in 

March  and  April,    1^4  ^. 


Date 

Inches 

DATE 

Inches 

March   13, 

1943 

0.01 

Aiiri 

1, 

1943 

0.14 

18 

0.01 

2 

0.38 

29, 

0.41 

13, 

0.12 

30, 

0.33 

23, 

0.03 

31, 

0.11 

24, 

0.19 

0.87 

0.86 

Stratiform  clouds  form  below  the  base  of  the  inversion  in  May  (table  1), 
and  are  the  typical  cloud  form  from  May  through  December.  Low  stratiform 
clouds  are  present  throughout  the  day  over  the  ocean,  but  over  the  islands, 
surface  heating  causes  the  clouds  to  break  and  dissipate  during  the  afternoon. 
Generally,  it  remains  clear  over  land  until  sunrise.  The  stratocumulus  clouds 
form  after  sunrise,  are  most  dense  in  the  morning,  and  break  in  the  afternoon. 
Occasionally,  they  may  last  throughout  the  day.  The  breaking  of  the  strati- 
form deck  over  Seymour  Island  usually  coincides  with  the  shift  in  surface 
wind  direction  from  the  SSE.  land  breeze  through  W.  to  the  WNW.  sea  breeze 
at  the  Seymour  Island  weather  station.  The  sea  breeze  is  especially  well  de- 
veloped   because    of   the  relatively  large  temperature  difference  between  the 


Table  3-     Radiosonde  observations  at  Seymour  Island  weather  station. 


31  March 

1943 

20  Ociober 

194  3 

Pres. 

Elev. 

Temp. 

Re 

ative 

Mixing 

Pres. 

Elev. 

Temp. 

Re 

iative 

Mixing 

(Mb) 

(Feet) 

(°C) 

Humidity 

Ratio 

(Mb) 

(Feet) 

(°C) 

Humidity 

Ratio 

Code 

Percent 

(Grams/ 
Kg) 

Code 

Percent 

(Grams/ 
Kg) 

400 

-17 

4 

(40-49) 

1.0 

400 

-12 

1 

(0-19) 

0.8 

439 

-12 

O 

(20-29) 

0.8 

434 

-11 

1 

(0-19) 

0.6 

488 

20,000 

-   7 

4 

(40-49) 

2.5 

490 

20,000 

-    4 

1 

(0-19) 

1.0 

521 

-  3 

6 

(60-69) 

3.3 

532 

1 

1 

(0-19) 

1.1 

608 

5 

6 

(60-69) 

6.0 

552 

1 

3 

(30-39) 

2.6 

692 

9 

7 

(70-79) 

7.3 

635 

8 

1 

(0-19) 

1.7 

710 

10,000 

10 

6 

(60-69 

7.8 

710 

10,000 

13 

O 

(20-29) 

3.0 

701 

14 

7 

(70-79) 

9.2 

795 

20 

1 

(0-19) 

2.6 

852 

5,000 

18 

7 

(70-79) 

10.9 

852 

5,000 

21 

3 

(30-39) 

5.4 

862 

19 

7 

(70-79) 

11.2 

890 

16 

7 

(70-79) 

10.4 

934 

22 

7 

(70-79) 

17.2 

928 

20 

7 

(70-79) 

10.3 

1011 

surface 

27 

74 

17.2 

1011 

surface 

21 

72 

11.3 

28 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  4.     Winds  aloft  observations  at  Seymour  Island  weather  station. 


Elevation 

31  MARCH   1943 

20  October  1943 

(FEET) 

DIRECTION 

(360°) 

SPEED 
(MPH) 

DIRECTION 

(360°) 

SPEED 
(MPH) 

30,000 
25,000 

120 
140 

12 
8 

20,000 
15,000 
14,000 
12,000 

250 
70 
60 
20 

1 
7 
8 
8 

10,000 
9,000 
8,000 
7,000 
6,000 

40 
60 
70 
50 
80 

13 

12 

9 

4 

7 

170 
200 

9 

4 

5,000 
4,000 
3,000 
2,000 
1,000 
Surface 

100 
90 
80 
80 
70 

170 

7 
7 
9 
5 
8 
8 

250 
270 
200 
180 
180 
140 

2 

3 

6 

13 

16 

10 

cold  ocean  surface  and  the  heated  land  surface. 

Table  1  shows  that  because  of  the  stable  conditions,  drizzle  (identi- 
fied by  the  "L"  in  table  1)  rather  than  the  rain  shower  (identified  by  the  "RW") 
is  the  prevailing  rainfall  type.  Over  land,  the  drizzle  generally  falls  between 
daybreak  and  noon  on  four  to  nine  days  each  month,  but  rarely  reduces  visi- 
bility below  3  miles.  The  drizzle  yields  only  traces  to  a  hundredth  of  an  inch 
of  rainfall  per  month  on  the  lowlands  during  the  dry  season.  Thus,  the  low- 
lands are  dry  during  these  months. 

The  base  of  the  stratiform  clouds  is  generally  between  2,000  to  2,500 
feet,  and  the  top  3,000  to  4,000  feet.  The  mountain  slopes,  particularly  on  the 
windward  southern  side  from  a  height  of  about  800  feet  upwards,  receive  pre- 
cipitation in  the  form  of  drizzle,  fog,  mist,  and  heavy  dew.  This  form  of  pre- 
cipitation, known  locally  as  the  "garua,  "frequently  continues  for  periods  of 
several  days  without  a  break,  and  the  higher  mountain  slopes  are  more  or  less 
continuously  enveloped  in  clouds  and  fog. 

The  meteorological  elements  for  two  typical  dry  season  days  are  shown 
in  table  5.  Features  to  note  are  the  cool  range  of  temperatures;  stratocumulus 
overcast  and  drizzle  forming  in  the   morning  and  breaking  before  noon;     the 
south-southeast   land  breeze  changing  to  a  west-northwest  sea  breeze;  the 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


29 


relatively  high  wind  speeds  throughout  the  day;  the  typical  stratocumulus  and 
altocumulus.clouds;  the  southerly  direction  from  which  the  stratocumulus  clouds 
are  moving;  and  the  relatively  high  ceiling  and  good  visibility. 

The  Rainy  Season 

The  rainy  season  lasts  four  months,  January  through  April.  By  January, 
as  shown  by  the  surface  pressure  map  of  April  (figure  5),  a  major  shift  in  the 
general    circulation   has  taken   place   as  the   intertropical  convergence  zone 


APRIL 


OCTOBER 


Figure  5.     Mean  sea  level  pressure  pattern  in  April  and  October. 


30 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  5-     Two  typical  dry  scasoti  days  at  Seymour  Ishnid  iveather  station. 


Airway  Vikathkr  Report 


Seymour  Island 


16  October  1942 


CO 

Celling  (T 
(Hundred  Ft.) 

Sky  Condition  (2 
(Hundred  Ft.) 

o 

C 

a 
t- 
1 

CO 

c 
o 

tn 

c 
c 

p 

u~ 

m 
J2 

O 

Temperature   and 
Dew  Point  CF) 

c 

c 

o 
<b 

Q 

-o 
a 

c 

-a 
t 

a. 
m 

-a 
c 

Remarks  (4 

Clouds  (4 

0035 

25S 

67/59 

SSE 

9 

2-sc-s 

0135 

23S 

66/58 

S 

8 

3-sc-s 

0235 

S/23S 

66/59 

SSE 

6 

COPS   150S 

2-ac-u             3-sc-s 

0335 

S/20S 

66/60 

SSE 

4 

COPS  1505 

2-ac-u             3-sc-s 

0435 

S/20S 

66/60 

SSE 

10 

COPS  120S 

2-ac-u             3-sc-s 

0535 

ElOO 

B/20S 

66/60 

SSE 

9 

COPS 

3-ac-u              3-sc-s 

0635 

E   25 

B 

68/60 

SSE 

I) 

COPS 

8-sc-s 

0735 

E   25 

0 

70/61 

SSE 

11 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0835 

E   25 

0 

71/61 

W 

6 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0935 

E   28 

O 

72/61 

NW 

4 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

1035 

E   28 

n 

76/61 

WNW 

4 

COPS  BINOVC 

10-sc-s 

1135 

27S 

78/61 

W 

12 

CTPS 

3-sc-s 

1235 

27S 

78/62 

WNW 

11 

CTPS 

2-sc-s 

1335 

27S 

79/62 

w 

13 

1-sc-s 

1435 

27S 

76/62 

WNW 

13 

CTPS 

1-sc-s 

1535 

C 

76/62 

WNW 

CTPS 

F-sc-u 

1635 

c 

76/62 

W 

6 

COPS 

F-sc-u 

1735 

20S 

75/62 

v> 

10 

COPS 

1-sc-s 

1835 

20S 

71/62 

SE 

8 

COPS 

1-sc-s 

1935 

E   22 

0 

70/61 

SSE' 

14 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

2035 

E   22 

B 

69/62 

SSE 

11 

COPS 

7-sc-s 

2135 

228 

69/62 

SE 

9 

COPS 

2-sc-s 

2235 

22S 

68/62 

SSE 

9 

COPS 

F-ac-u             2-sc-s 

2335 

E   25' 

B 

68/59 

SE 

7 

COPS 

F-ac-u              7-sc-s 

(1,  (2  ,  (3  ,  (^    -  See  Table  8. 


moves  southward  to  a  position  a  few  degrees  north  of  the  islands.  In  figure  8 
the  intertropical  convergence  zone  is  located  just  north  of  the  islands.  The 
movement  and  characteristics  of  the  intertropical  convergence  zone  in  the 
Eastern  Tropical  Pacific  Ocean  Area  are  little  known.  Weather  observations 
from  the  islands  can  provide  data  for  the  study  of  this  important  climatic  con- 
trol of  the  Eastern  Tropical  Pacific  Ocean  Area. 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


31 


Table  5-       Continued 


Airway  Weather  Report 


Seymour  Island 


17  October  1942 


c 

o 

^ 

> 

c   _ 

--; 

o 

o    2 

c 

J 

H 

£ 

.■^      tL, 

C       o 

3      •" 

u 

en 

W^ 

■?      -^ 

n   .;; 

4^      C 

v 

OJ 

t~-i 

bc     1J 

5    1^ 

^     " 

c:   o 

•-" 

a 

.5    "^ 

^    2 

Q 

c/) 

a,' 

. — '      c 

c 

*j   4-t 

£    ^ 

T) 

-a 

E 

3 

>■      D 

nJ      V) 

c 

c 

H 

^  5 

a,'      a; 
H   Q 

cs 

is 

Remarks  (4^ 

Clouds  (4 

0035 

i:  25 

B 

68/60 

SSE 

6 

COPS 

8-sc-s 

0135 

E   22 

f") 

68/60 

SE 

" 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0235 

E   22 

0 

68/59 

SSE 

9 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0335 

E   20 

0 

68/60 

SSE 

7 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0435 

E   20 

0 

68/60 

S 

g 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0535 

E   20 

o 

L- 

66/61 

S 

0 

COPS  VSBY  4  S  L- 

10-sc-s 

0635 

E   22 

0 

68/61 

SSE 

8 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0735 

E   22 

o 

69/61 

SSE 

10 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0835 

E   25 

o 

70/61 

S 

10 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

0935 

E   27 

0 

L- 

70/61 

S 

9 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

1035 

E   28 

o 

73/61 

SSE 

10 

COPS 

10-sc-s 

1135 

E   26 

H 

74/62 

WNW 

9 

COPS 

9-sc-s 

1235 

E   27 

B 

76/62 

NW 

15 

COPS 

7-sc-s 

1335 

26S 

77/63 

WNW 

10 

CTPS 

5-sc-s 

1435 

26S 

76/63 

NNW 

14 

CTPS 

3-sc-s 

1535 

27S 

79/61 

SSE 

14 

COPS 

2-sc-s 

1635 

22S 

75/61 

WNW 

12 

COPS 

5-sc-s 

1735 

E   25 

B20S 

73/61 

NW 

5 

COPS 

9-sc-s 

1835 

E   22 

O20S 

71/63 

SSE 

9 

COPS  RINOVC 

10-sc-s 

1935 

E   22 

B 

70/62 

SSE 

12 

COPS 

9-sc-s 

2035 

E   22 

0 

69/63 

SSE 

12 

COPS  BINOVC 

10-sc-s 

2135 

E   22 

0 

69/64 

SSE 

10 

COPS  BINOVC 

10-sc-s 

2235 

E   22 

n 

69/64 

s 

13 

COPS  BINOVC 

10-sc-s 

2335 

E   22 

f) 

70/61 

SSE 

12 

COPS  BINOVC 

10-sc-s 

With  the  southward  movement  of  the  intertropical  convergence  zone  to  a 
mean  position  of  T"  to  2°N.  latitude  in  February  and  March,  the  mean  monthly 
pressure  (table  1)  decreases,  reaching  a  minimum  in  March.  The  prevailing 
surface  wind  direction  shifts  from  SSE.  to  E.  The  average  wind  speed  decreas- 
es to  less  than  8  mph.,  and  calms  become  relatively  frequent.  Aloft  the  wind 
direction  is  easterly  at  all  levels  and  the  wind  speed  is  the  lowest  of  the  year, 
averaging  about  10  mph.  (table  4).  The  islands  are  in  the  "Doldrums." 


32 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


With  the  shift  in  surface  wind  direction,  the  upwelling  of  cold  water  to 
the  south  of  the  islands  ceases,  and  truly  tropical  temperature  conditions  pre- 
vail. In  March,  the  warmest  month,  the  mean  daily  maximum  temperature  at 
Seymour  Island  is  88°  F.,  and  the  mean  daily  minimum  is  75°  F.,  quite  a  change 
from  the  September  temperatures.  During  these  months,  the  dry  and  almost 
barren  volcanic  rock  surface  of  Seymour  Island  is  strongly  heated  causing  lo- 
cal convective  currents  (figure  9).  Dust  devils  are  observed  in  the  afternoon, 
some  extending  to  200-300  feet  above  the  island. 

There  is  a  noteworthy  difference  in  the  typical  sounding  for  the  rainy 
season,  shown  by  the  solid  line,  compared  to  the  dry  season,  shown  by  the 
dashed  line  in  figure  7.  Temperature  increases  in  the  lower  layer.  Because 
of  the  heating  of  the  lower  layers  and  the  decrease  in  subsidence  from  the 
outflow  of  the  South  Pacific  high  pressure  cell,  which  has  been  displaced 
southward  (figure  5),  the  inversion  present  during  the  previous  dry  season 
months  is  dissipated  (table  3). 


Figure   6.     The  topography  (hundreds  of  meters)  of  the  base  of  the   inversion  during  the 
cruise  of  the  Horizon,   June  and  July,  1952,  (Shellback  Expedition). 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


33 


Convection  now  carries  moisture  aloft  above  the  former  (dry-season)  in- 
version level,  and  a  considerable  increase  in  moisture  is  recorded  at  all  lev- 
els as  shown  in  table  3.  The  air  mass  is  generally  conditionally  stable,  and 
is  readily  made  unstable  by  a  moderate  amount  of  either  heating  or  mechani- 
cal lifting  (such  as  is  induced  by  the  flow  of  air  against  the  mountains). 


Table  6.    Wean  monthly  rainfall  at  Seymour  Island  weather  station. 


YEAR 

JAN. 

FEB. 

MAR. 

APR. 

MAY 

JUNE 

JULY 

AUG. 

SEP. 

OCT. 

NOV. 

DEC. 

ANNUAL 

1942 

T(l) 

T 

T 

T 

T 

1943 

0.03 

1.40 

0.07 

0.07 

T 

T 

0.03 

0.04 

T 

0.02 

T 

T 

3.26 

1944 

0.29 

0.68 

2.31 

1.13 

T 

0.03 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

4.44 

1945 

2.10 

2.10 

T 

na 

T 

T 

T 

T 

T 

(1)  T    =Trace 


Cumulus  clouds  first  appear  over  the  mountains  in  January,  and  almost 
daily  during  the  afternoon  in  the  rainy  season,   convectionally  induced  rain 
showers  and,  at  times,  thunderstorms  form  over  the  mountains.  Figure  10  shows 
a   cumulo-nimbus   cloud  over  the  mountains   on  Santa   Cruz   Island.     Table   1 
shows  an  average  of  one  thunderstorm  at  Seymour  Island  in  February.     Heavy 
local  showers  may  be  recorded  on  the  mountain  slopes,  which,  in  the  opinion 
of  the  author,  may  receive  more  than  50  inches  of  rainfall  annually.     As  the 
showers  are  carried  away  from  the  mountains  and  their  sustaining  upslope  cur- 
rents, they  dissipate,  frequently  before  reachingthe  leeward  coast.  Figure  11 
shows  a  rain  shower  on  Santa  Cruz  Island.     When  a  shower  is  carried  across 


Table  7.    Mean  annual  rainfall  at  San  Cristobal  weather  station, 
San  Cristobal  Island  (00°  54'  S.  89°  5'^'  U',   6  meters). 


YEAR 

JAN. 

FEB. 

MAR. 

APR. 

MAY 

JUNE 

JULY 

AUG. 

SEP. 

OCT. 

NOV. 

DEC 

ANNUAL 

1950 

0.0 

0.06 

0.50 

0.0 

0.02 

0.0 

0.0 

0.04 

0.33 

0.05 

0.19 

0.25 

1.46 

1951 

3.94 

5.04 

1.34 

3.24 

0.60 

0.67 

2.97 

0.29 

0.43 

0.27 

0.09 

0.29 

19.23 

1952 

0.87 

0.75 

0.06 

0.0 

1.24 

0.05 

0.09 

0.32 

0.12 

0.47 

0.04 

0.55 

4.54 

1953 

7.05 

19.17 

3.39 

18.03 

6.67 

0.09 

0.10 

0.50 

0.29 

0.23 

0.24 

0.22 

56.08 

1954 

0.37 

1.75 

3.58 

0.0 

0.02 

0.02 

0.24 

0.21 

0.85 

0.18 

0.20 

0.26 

6.98 

1955 

0.33 

7.69 

3.43 

0.47 

0.08 

0.11 

0.26 

0.29 

0.27 

0.18 

0.27 

0.18 

13.58 

1956 

0.17 

4.57 

11.46 

9.21 

0.05 

0.25 

0.32 

0.32 

0.26 

0.17 

0.34 

0.03 

27.22 

1957 

0.14 

10.16 

13.62 

7.01 

1.61 

0.25 

0.21 

0.37 

0.18 

0.43 

0.58 

2.95 

37.57 

1958 

1.65 

4.41 

3.60 

0.56 

0.05 

0.06 

0.07 

0.05 

0.09 

0.17 

0.14 

0.28 

11.20 

A\'G 

1.62 

5.96 

4.54 

4.29 

1.16 

0.17 

0.48 

0.26 

0.23 

0.24 

0.23 

0.55 

19.81 

34 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Seymour  Island,  rainfall  may  be  recorded  at  the  weather  station.  These  show- 
ers on  Seymour  Island  are  shortlived,  local,  and  cover  a  small  area.  At  times, 
squalls  form  over  the  water  during  the  night  and  produce  a  short,  light  shower 
when  they  move  across  the  islands  during  the  early  morning. 

Thus,  even  in  the  so-called  rainy  season,  the  coastal  lowlands  are  light- 
ly watered,  and  are  arid.  The  total  rainfall  (tables  2  and  4)  forthe  four  months 
of  the  rainy  season  at  Seymour  Island  (according  to  the  short  three-year  rec- 
ord) averages  only  3.93  inches. 

The  heaviest  monthly  rainfall  recorded  at  the  station  was  2.31  inches 
in  March,  1944.  In  contrast,  0.07  inches  was  recorded  in  March,  1943,  and 
only  a  trace  was  recorded  in  March,  1945.  It  is  surprising  that  the  heavier 
rainfall  recorded  among  the  islands  in  the  "EI  Niiio"  year  1943  (see  below). 


0 


10 


20 


30 


JOCTOBER 


ARCH 


600 


700 


800 


900 


1000 


TEMPERATURE  CO 


Figure   7.     Rainy  (31   March    1943)  and   dry  (20  October   1943)  season   sounding  at  Seymour 
Island  weather  station. 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


35 


Figure  8,  Patrol  aircraft  weather  reports  over  the  tropical  eastern  Pacific  Ocean,  March 
8,  1943.  The  intertropical  convergence  zone  is  shown  by  the  solid  double  line.  The  station 
model  is  outlined  in  Appendix  A.    (see  Page  42)- 


36 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  8. 

Tu'o  typical 

rainy  season 

days 

at  Seymour  Island 

weather 

station. 

Airway  weather  Report 

Seymour  Island                        14 

February 

1943 

in 
c 

Ceiling  (T 
(Hundred  Ft.) 

Sky  Condition  (2 
(Hundred  Ft.) 

1^ 
o 

n 

C8 

u 

I.- 

[en) 

a 
o 

[0 

> 

o 

c 
_o 

o 

3 
t^ 

w 
O 

Temperature  and 
Dew  Point  (°F) 

n 
_o 

tj 

t- 

s 

c 

a: 
a 
_E 

-o 

OJ 
0) 
D. 

m 

-a 
c 

Remarks  (4,  5 

Clouds  (4 

0035 

E150 

B/ 

80/73 

ENE 

1 

7-ac-e 

0135 

E150 

B/ 

79/74 

NNE 

1 

7-ac-u 

0235 

E150 

B/ 

79/73 

W 

1 

8-ac-u 

0335 

s/ 

79/73 

sw 

2 

150S 

5-ac-u 

0435 

808 

78/72 

wsw 

3 

2-as-u 

0535 

SOS 

78/72 

s 

1 

3-as-u 

0635 

E   80 

B 

78/72 

s 

3 

8-ac-u 

0735 

E120 

B/30S 

78/74 

ssw 

1 

8-ac-se 

1-cu-n 

0835 

E120 

B/30S 

81/74 

sw 

2 

CTPS 

6-ac-u 

3-  cu-n 

0935 

E120 

B/30S 

82/74 

WNW 

4 

CTPS 

3-ac-u 

3-  cu-n 

1035 

E120 

B/30S 

84/74 

w 

6 

CTPS    (1)  (4 

2-ac-u 

4-  cu-e 

1135 

E120 

B/30S 

83/73 

NW 

7 

CTPS  RW-S 

2-ac-u 

4-cu-e 

1235 

E120 

B/30S 

85/74 

NNE 

7 

CTPS  RW-SE  (1) 

2-ac-u 

4-  cu-e 

1335 

S/30S 

86/73 

ENE 

11 

CTPS  RW-S  (2)  1-ci- 

u     1-ac-u 

2-  cu-n 

1435 

E120 

B/30S 

86/72 

E 

8 

CTPS  RW-S  (2) 

6-ac-e 

1-  cu-e 

1535 

EllO 

O/30S 

87/73 

E 

8 

BINOVC  (1) 
VSBY  6  S  RW 

8-ac-e 

2-cu-e 

1635 

E120 

O/30S 

86/74 

E 

8 

BINOVC  (1)  RW-S 

8-ac-e 

2-  cu-e 

1735 

E130 

B/30S 

85/73 

E 

7 

(1)  RW-S 

6-ac-u 

2-cu-e 

1835 

E130 

O/30S 

84/72 

E 

6 

BINOVC  (3) 

9-ac-e 

1-cu-e 

1935 

E130 

B/30S 

83/70 

SSE 

12 

COPS 

6-ac-u 

1-  cu-s 

2035 

S/30S 

82/71 

SSE 

12 

COPS  150S 

4-ac-e 

1-cu-u 

2135 

S/30S 

81/71 

SSE 

11 

COPS  150S 

1-ac-e 

1-  cu-u 

2235 

s/ 

80/71 

SE 

12 

COPS  160S 

4-ac-se 

F-cu-u 

2335 

s/ 

_ 

79/73 

SSE 

12 

160S 

5-as-u 

(T    E=estimated.  "^ 

(2    0=overcast,     B=broken,     S=scattered,     C=clear.    (1)    Towering  cumulus  all   quadrants. 

(3    Visibility  unlimited  entire  period. 

(J    BINOVC  breaks  in  overcast 

COPS  clouds  over  peaks  to  south, 
CTPS  clouds  topping  peaks  to  south: 
Clouds;  number  of  tenths  of  the  layer,  kind, 
direction  from  which  the  cloud  is  moving, 
(ac  ^altocumulus,     as  =altostratus, 
ci=cirus,  cu=cumulus, 

sc  =  stratocumulus) 


(2)  Towering  cumulus  southwest  quadrant. 

(3)  Towering  cumulus  north  quadrant. 

(4)  Towering  cumulus  north  semi-circle. 

(5)  Towering  cumulus  northwest  quadrant. 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


37 


Table  8.      Continued. 


Airway  weather  Report 


Seymour  Island 


15  February  1943 


c 

1-1 

) 

E 

Ceiling  (T 
(Hundred  Ft.) 

Sky  Condition  (2 
(Hundred  Ft.) 

Weather  and  or 
Obstruction  to  Visi( 

Temperature  and 
Dew  Point  (°F) 

c 
o 

o 
u 

Q 

-□ 
c 

E 

D. 

m 

-a 
c 

Remarks  ^,  5 

Clouds  (4^ 

0035 

ElOO 

0/ 

80/73 

s 

4 

10-as-u 

0135 

-s/ 

79/72 

sw 

4 

5-as-u 

0235 

ElOO 

B/ 

79/73 

C 

9-as-u 

0335 

ElOO 

B/ 

79/73 

NE 

1 

7-as-u 

0435 

ElOO 

B/ 

78/73 

E 

2 

7-as-u 

0535 

ElOO 

B/ 

78-73 

E 

1 

7-as-u 

0635 

8/ 

78/74 

SSE 

2 

lOOS 

5-as-u 

0735 

E150 

B/30S 

78/74 

ESE 

5 

COPS  (1)(4 

3-ac-u 

3-cu-e 

0835 

E150 

O/30S 

79/73 

SSE 

7 

COPS  BINOVC  (2)  2-ci-u 

5-ac-s 

3-cu-e 

0935 

E150 

O/30S 

81/73 

SE 

6 

COPS  BINOVC  (4)  1-ci-u 

6-ac-e 

3-cu-s 

1035 

E150 

O/30S 

84/71 

E 

6 

CTPS  (4) 

6-ac-ne 

4-cu-e 

1135 

E150 

O/30S 

84/72 

ESE 

12 

CTPS  (4) 

6-ac-ne 

4-cu-e 

1235 

E150 

O/30S 

87/76 

E 

lOE 

COPS  RW-S 

6-ac-n 

4-cu-e 

1335 

E150 

O/20S 

84/75 

E 

18E 

COPS  (3)  RW-S 

6-ac-n 

4-cu-e 

1435 

E   25 

0/B 

82/72 

ESE 

11 

COPS  \^)  rt«-3 

4-as-n 

6-cu-e 

1535 

E   25 

0/B 

R- 

81/74 

ESE 

11 

COPS  (3) 

4-as-n 

6-sc-e 

1635 

E120 

0/25S 

80/73 

E 

10 

COPS 

6-ac-u 

4-sc-e 

1735 

E120 

0/25S 

80/73 

E 

10 

COPS 

6-ac-u 

4-sc-e 

1835 

EllO 

O/30S 

80/72 

E 

12 

BINOVC 

9-ac-u 

1-sc-e 

1935 

EllO 

0/ 

79/73 

E 

6 

BINOVC 

10-ac-e 

2035 

EllO 

0/ 

79/72 

E 

6 

10-ac-e 

2135 

EllO 

B/ 

79/72 

ESE 

5 

9-ac-u 

2235 

E180 

B/ 

79/72 

SE 

4 

6-ac-e 

2335 

E180 

B/ 

78/74 

ESE 

1 

6-ac-e 

is  not  reflected  in  the  rainfall  record  at  the  Seymour  Island  weather  station. 

A  similar  pattern  of  low  rainfall,  less  than  20  inches,  is  evident  in  the 
raintall  records  at  San  Cristobal,  shown  in  table  7. 

The  rainfall  and  rainy  season  are  very  irregular.  Virtually  rainless  years 
are  not  unknown  on  the  lowlands.  The  years  1906  (Svenson,  1946),  1930  (Sven- 
son,    1946),  and  1950  (table  7),  were  almost  rainless.     During  the  nine-year 
period,   1950-1958,  San  Crist6bal  (table  7)  recorded  only  1.46  inches  of  rain- 
fall in  1950.  During  the  four  rainy  season  months  of  that  year,  no  rainfall  was 


38 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Figure  9.    Scattered  cumulus  clouds  over  Santa  Cruz  Island  (background)  on  7  March  1943. 
Arid  surface  of  Seymour  Island  in  foreground,     Seymour  Island  airfield  and  former  weather  sta- 
tion are  located  south  of  the  bay  in  center  of  photograph. 


recorded  in  January,  0.06  inches  in  February,  0,50  inches  in  March,  and  only 
a  trace  of  rainfall  in  April, 

In  contrast  to  the  virtually  rainless  years  that  occur  from  time  to  time, 
such  as  1950  at  San  Cristobal,  unusually  heavy  rains  may  fall  when  the  "El 
Nino"  phenomenon  is  well  developed.  This  was  the  case  only  three  years 
later  at  San  Cristobal,  which  recorded  56,8  inches  of  rainfall  in  1954,  Of 
this  rainfall,  19.17  inches  fell  in  February,  and  18.3  inches  in  April.  Even 
May,  usually  a  dry  month,  recorded  6.67  inches  of  rainfall  that  year.  Rainfall 
was  also  heavy  at  San  Cristobal  in  1957,  amounting  to  37.57  inches. 

The  "El  Nino"  rainfall  is  known  to  have  affected  the  island  at  least  in 
1891  (Agassiz,  1892),  1925  (Beebe,  1926),  1929  (Svenson,  1946),  1953  (table 
7),  and  1957  (table  7).  It  may  have  occurred  there  in  other  years.  For  example, 
the  "El  Nino"  rainfall  has  been  recorded  on  the  west  coast  of  South  America 
in  1828,  1845,  1864,  1871,  1877-78,  1891,  1904,  1918,  1925-26,  1929,  1932, 
1939,  1941,  1943,  1953,  and  1957,  The  "El  Nino"  appears  to  be  associated 
with  a  southward  displacement  of  the  intertropical  convergence  zone  from  its 
normal  position  so  that  the  islands  are  fully  under  its  influence.  The  pheno- 


No.  44) 


ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


39 


men  on  is  little  understood,  and  is  worthy  of  further  research,  which  would  be 
aided  considerably  by  surface  and  upper  air  observations  from  the  islands. 
The  meteorological  elements  of  two  typical  rainy  season  days  are  shown 
on  table  8.  Noteworthy  features  of  table  8  are  the  tropical  range  of  tempera- 
tures; the  rain  showers  forming  at  noon  to  the  south  over  Santa  Cruz  mountains 
figure  11);  the  relatively  low  wind  speeds;  the  typical  cloudscape  of  low 
cumulus  and  altocumulus;  the  easterly  direction  from  which  the  cumulus  clouds 
are  moving;  the  relatively  high  ceiling  and  good  visibility. 

Rainfall  and  Vegetation 

Since  there  are  no  other  places  on  the  islands  at  which  rainfall  obser- 
vations have  been  made,  the  areal  distribution  of  rainfall  cannot  be  mapped 
reliably.  However,  the  character  of  the  vegetation  on  the  islands  is  largely 
controlled  by  the  rainfall.  Thus,  the  areal  distribution  of  the  vegetation  re- 
flects the  areal  rainfall  distribution,  which  in  turn  is  dependent  to  a  great  de- 
gree upon  exposure  and  elevation.  However,  there  are  great  differences  in  the 
elevation  at  which  different  vegetation  regions  begin  and  end  on  the  different 
islands,  and  on  the  sides  of  a  given  island  (Stewart,  1911).  It  seems  likely 
that  the  size  of  the  island  and  the  degree  of  the  slope  are  involved. 


Figure   10.     Cumulonimbus  cloud  over  the  Santa  Cruz  mountains  on  4  March   1943.  No  rain- 
fall was  recorded  at  the  Seymour  Island  weather  station  on  this  day. 


40 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Four  botanical  regions,  the  dry  transition,  moist,  and  grassy,  can  be 
recognized  above  the  strand  vegetation,  which  forms  a  narrow  belt  along  the 
shores  of  the  islands  in  certain  places.    These  botanical  regions  identify  two 
rainfall  zones,  the  dry  zone  and  the  moist  zone. 


i 


Figure   11.      Rainshower  over  Santa  Cruz  Island   during  the  latter  part  of  February,   1943. 
Runway  of  Seymour  Island  airfield  in  foreground.  No  rainfall  was  recorded  at  the  Seymour  Island 
weather  station  on  this  day. 

The  Dry  Zone 

From  the  dry  coast,  which  receives  from  five  to  twenty  inches  of  rain- 
fall a  year,  to  the  400-1,000  foot  level  (and  up  to  1,500  feet  on  the  north  side 
of  James  and  Santa  Cruz  islands),  the  growth  is  a  dull-grey,  sparse  and  scrub- 
by thorn-forest,  consisting  of  scattered  dwarf  deciduous  trees  between  which 
grow  coarse  grasses,  low  thorny  bushes,  and  cacti  which  sometimes  attain  a 
height  of  thirty  feet  (figure -9).  The  dry  zone  covers  the  major  portion  of  the 
surface  of  all  the  islands.  Since  Harrington,  Bindloe,  Culpepper,  Hood,  Tower, 
and  Wenman  islands,  as  well  as  Seymour  Island,  do  not  attain  an  elevation  of 
1,000  feet  above  sea  level,  they  are  arid,  and  support  xerophytic  plants  typi- 
cal of  the  dry  region  vegetation. 

During  the  rainy  season,  the  coastal  vegetation  has  a  deceptive  light- 
green  appearance  from  the  distance.  Closer  inspection  reveals  that  only  the 
terminal  twigs  and  end  branches  are  in  leaf;  underneath,  the  woody  stems  are 
as  bare  as  in  the  dry  season. 


No.  44)  ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  41 

The  vegetation  was  green  down  to  the  water's  edge  during  the  "El 
Nino"  period  of  1891  and  1925.  Agassiz  (1892),  who  visited  the  islands  dur- 
ing the  rainy  season  months  of  February  through  April,  1891,  wrote,  "This 
year  quite  heavy  rains  extended  to  the  very  level  of  the  sea,  a  somewhat  un- 
usual state  of  things.  I  could  not  help  contrast  the  green  appearance  of  the 
island,  covered  as  they  were  by  a  comparatively  thick  growth  of  bushes,  shrubs 
and  trees,  with  the  description  given  of  them  by  Darwin,  who  represented  them 
in  the  height  of  the  dry  season  in  September,  1835,  as  the  supreme  expression 
of  desolation  and  barrenness." 

The  Moist  Zone 

Between  about  1,000  and  3,000  feet  above  sea  level  on  the  mountain 
slopes,  the  flora  is  more  abundant  and  decidedly  mesophytic  in  character.  This 
is  a  result  of  the  heavier  rainfall  in  the  rainy  season,  and  the  availability  of 
moisture  from  drizzle,  fog,  mist  (garua),  and  dew  during  the  dry  season,  es- 
pecially in  the  southern  (windward)  slopes.  Here  the  moist  zone  is  100-200 
feet  lower  than  on  the  northern  (leeward)  slopes.  Between  the  dry-region  ve- 
getation and  the  moist-region  vegetation,  a  transition  region  is  present  being 
composed  of  a  mixture  of  xerophytic  plants  from  the  dry  region  vegetation  and 
the  more  hardy  of  the  mesophytic  plants  from  the.  moist  region. 

This  moist  region  vegetation  is  characterized  by  forests.  Some  trees 
are  two  feet  in  diameter.  The  undergrowth  is  often  dense  and  resembles  that 
of  the  moist  tropics,  the  rain-forest  type  being  closely  approached  in  places. 
During  March,  1943,  the  lower  boundary  of  the  moist  zone  could  be  clearly 
seen  by  the  author  on  the  slopes  of  Santa  Cruz  Island  because  of  the  darker 
green  color  of  the  rain  forest  than  of  the  thorn  forest. 

Above  1,500  feet  in  certain  places,  the  forests  give  way  to  meadows  of 
long  perennial  grasses  and  ferns.  Except  on  protected  places,  trees  are  al- 
most entirely  lacking.  The  greater  speed  of  the  wind  at  the  higher  elevations 
combined  with  a  somewhat  smaller  amount  of  precipitation  is  probably  the  rea- 
son for  the  absence  of  trees  (Stewart,  1911). 

The  drying  power  of  the  wind,  and  the  effect  of  the  wind  on  the  struc- 
tural form  of  the  plants  is  marked  in  the  upper  exposed  parts  of  the  islands. 
In  addition,  these  lie  near  the  tops  of  the  mountains.  These  are  often  clear, 
while  a  few  hundred  feet  below,  the  mountain  side  may  be  entirely  enveloped 
in  clouds  and  fog.  The  soil  at  the  top  of  the  mountains  has  been  observed  to 
be  dry  and  dusty,  whereas  at  the  same  time  a  little  below  the  top,  it  was  moist, 
or  even  muddy. 

Only  on  Albemarle,  San  Cristobal,  and  Santa  Cruz  islands  is  a  grassy 
region  well  developed. 


42 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Conclusions 

The  available  data  indicate  that  the  climate  of  the  Galapagos  Islands 
differs  from  that  of  most  islands  near  the  Equator.  These  differences  are  evi- 
dent in  the  surprisingly  low  air  temperatures,  the  inversion  and  associated 
stable  stratiform  cloud  and  precipitation  forms,  the  prevailing  sparse  rainfall 
of  the  lowlands,  and  the  side  extremes  of  rainless  years  and  years  of  abun- 
dant rainfall  when  the  "El  Nino"  phenomenon  appears. 

Weather  observations  from  the  islands  could  contribute  materially  to  the 
understanding  of  the  climate  of  the  tropical  Eastern  Pacific  Ocean  Area,  and 
particularly  of  the  intertropical  convergence  zone. 

Additional  series  of  weather  observations,  including  a  more  complete 
coverage  of  the  climatic  elements,  are  needed  in  order  to  present  a  better 
picture  of  the  climate  and  to  analyze  the  inter-relationship  of  the  climate  and 
the  poorly  known  biota.  Thus,  weather  observations  and  climatic  studies  should 
be  part  of  the  basic  research  program  of  the  Charles  Darwin  Research  Station. 


Appendix   A 

Station  Model  for  Synoptic  Chart 


(The  station  model  used  in  fig- 
ures 3  and  8  is  outlined  below) 


Hb 

(N)          Ch          Ht         (N) 

Hb 

(N)          Cm         Ht         (N) 

TT           B 

V           O DD— n 

WW         GG 

¥ 

Hb 

(N)          Cl         Ht          (N) 

Fp          W 

B  Flight    altitude    in    hundreds   of  feet. 

Cl        Low  cloud  type,  international  symbol. 

Qvi       Middle  cloud  type,  international  sym- 
bol. 

Ch        High  cloud  type,  international  symbol. 

DD       Wind  direction  at  flight  altitude. 

F  Wind  speed   at  flight  altitude,  a  half 

barb  equals  a  Beaufort  Force  of  one 

unit. 

Fp  Frontal  passage:  i  marked  wind 
shift;  >X  marked  incident  or  end  of 
turbulence;  O  marked  temperature 
change  (not  with  altitude);  begin- 
ning orend  of  precipitation;  change 
in  cloud  forms. 


GG      Greenwich  time  of  observation. 

Hb  Height  (in  hundreds  of  feet)  of  base 
of  low,  middle,  or  high  clouds  above 
sea  level. 

Hj  Height  (in  hundreds  of  feet)  of  top  of 
low,    miiidle,    or   high   clouds  above 

sea  level. 

N  Amount  (in  tenths)   of  low,  middle,  or 

high  clouds. 

TT      Temperature  in  °C.  at  flight  altitude. 

V  Visibility  at  flight  altitude,  the  min- 

imumvalues  ofthe  international  code. 

WW  State  of  current  weather,  international 
symbols. 

W  State  of  past  weather,  international 

symbols. 


Note  that  Hg  is  reported  when  the  plane 
is  flown  below  the  cloud  deck,  and  Hy  is 
reported  when  the  plane  is  flown  above 
cloud  deck.  When  Hg  is  reported  and  Ht 
is  not  reported,  N  is  entered  in  place  of 
Ht;  when  Ht  is  reported  and  Hb  is  not 
reported,    N     is    entered    in    place    of   Hb  . 


I 

I 


No.  44)  ALPERT:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  43 

Literature    Cited 
Agassiz,  a. 

1892.  General  sketch  ofthe  expedition  ofthe  Albatross  from  February  to  May, 
1891.  Bulletin  of  the  Museum  of  Comparative  Zoology,  vol.  23,  pp. 
1-89. 

Alpert,  L. 

1945.         The     intertropical    convergence    zone    of    the    eastern    Pacific    region    (I). 

Bulletin  of  the  Americ  an  Meteorological  Society,  vol.26,  pp. 426-432. 
1946a.      The    intertropical    convergence    zone    of    the    eastern    Pacific  region   (II). 

Bulletin  of  the  American  Meteorological  Society,  vol.  27,  pp.  15-29. 
1946b.      The    intertropical    convergence    zone    of   the    eastern   Pacific    region    (III). 

Bulletin  of  the  American  Meteorological  Society,  vol.  27,  pp.  62-66. 
1946c.      Weather    over   the    tropical    eastern    Pacific    Ocean,    7    and    8   March,    1943. 

Bulletin  of  the  American  Meteorological  Society,  Vol.27,  pp. 384-398. 
1946d.      Atmospheric    cross-sections    of  the    stratus    zone    of  the    tropical   eastern 

Pacific    Ocean.    Transactions    of    the    American    Geophysical    Union, 

vol.  27,  pp.   800-812. 

1948.         Notes    on   the    areal    distribution   of   annual    mean    rainfall    over   the    tropi- 
cal  eastern   Pacific  Oc  e  an.   Bulletin   of  the   American  Meteorological 
Society,   vol.  29,  pp.   38-41. 
Beebe,  W. 

1926.  The  Arcturus  adventure,  an  account  of  the  New  York  Zoological  Soci- 
ety's first  oce  anographic  expedition,  xix  +  439  pp.,  New  York:  G.P. 
Putnam's   Sons. 

Darwin,  C 

1897.  Journal  of  researches  into  the  natural  history  and  geology  of  the  coun- 
tries visited  during  the  voyage  of  H.M.S.  Beagle  round  the  world, 
under  the  command  of  Capt.  FitzRoy,  R.N.,x+  519  pp.,  New  York: 
D.  Appleton  and  Company. 

Ecuador,  Republica  del 

1945.         Boletin  Me  teorologico  ,   No.  2.   Quito:  Servicio  Meteorologico  del  Ecuador. 

1950.  Boletin  Meteorologico,    No.  3.   Quito:   Servicio  Meteorolo  gico  d  el  Ec  uador. 

1954.  Boletin  Meteorologico,  No.  4.  Quito:  Servicio  Meteorolo  gico  del  Ec  uador. 

1951.  Boletin  Meteorologico   dela  Armada  del  Ecuador,   No.    1.   Quito:   Servicio 

Meteorologic  a  de   la  Armada. 

1953.  Boletin  Meteorologico  dela  Armada  del  Ecuador,  No.  2.  Quito:  Servicio 
Meteorologic  a   de   la  Armada. 

1955.  Boletin  Meteorologico   dela   Armada   del   Ecuador,   No.  3.    Quito:   Servicio 

Meteorologic  a   de   la   Armada. 

1959.         Boletin  Meteorologica,    No.l.   Quito:   Direccion  General    de  Me teorologia. 

Knoch,  K. 

1930.  Klimakunde  von  Siidamerika.  In  Handbuch  der  Klimatologie,  Band  2, 
Teil  G,  pp.    123-125.   Berlin: 

Neiburger,  M. 

1944.         Research  paper  No.    19,    U.S.   Weather  Bureau,   Washington. 

1958.  Final  report,  subtropical  Pacific  meteorological  project.  Dept.  of  Mete- 
orology,   University  of  California,    Los   Angeles. 


44  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

POSNER,   G.   S. 

1957.  Studies  of  ichthyology  and  oceanography  off  coastal  Peru.  The  Peru 
current.  Bulletin  of  the  Bingham  Oce  anographic  Collection,  vol.  17, 
pp.   106-155. 

SCHOTT,  G. 

1931.  Der  Peru-Strom  un  seine  ndrdlichen  Nachbargebiete  in  normaler  und  anor- 
maler  Ausbildung.  Annals  of  Hydrographic  and  Maritime  Meteorology, 
vol.59,  pp.   161-159,  200-213,  240-253. 

1935.  Geographie  des  Indischen  und  Stillen  Ozeane.  Hamburg:  Deutsche  See- 
warte. 

1938.  Klimakunde  der  Siidse  e-Inseln.  In  Handbuch  der  Klimatologie,  Band  4, 
Teil  T,  pp.   37-40.   Berlin: 

Stewart,  A. 

1911.  A  botanical  survey  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Proceedings  of  the  Cali- 
fornia Academy  of  Sciences,    ser.  4,   vol.    1,  pp.    7-288- 

SVENSON,   H.    K. 

1946.  Vegetation  ofthe  coast  of  Ecuador  and  Peru  and  its  relation  to  the  Gal- 
apagos Archipelago.  American  Journal  of  Botany,  vol.  33,  pp.  394-426. 

SVERDRUP,  H.   U. 

1942.        Oceanography  for  meteorologists,  246  pp.  New  York:     Prentice-Hall,  Inc. 

U.   S.   Hydrographic   Office. 
1944.         Monthly   surface   temperature    charts   of  the    south   Pacific    Ocean.    Hydro- 
graphic  Office   Miscellaneous   Publications  no.    10,532,  Washington. 

WOLF,   T. 

1879a.  Apuntes  sobreelclima  delas  Islas  Galapagos,  segun  las  observacione  s 
hechas  en  los  meses  de  Agosto  a  Noviembre  de  1875.  Boletin  del 
Observatorio   Astronomico    de    Quito,   No.    3. 

1879b.  Ein  Besuch  der  Galap  agos-Inseln .  Sammlung  von  Vortragen,  vol.  1: 
H  eidelberg. 

1892.  Geografia  y  Geologia  del  Ecuador.  Publicada  per  orden  del  Gobierno 
de  la  Republica.  Leipzig,  pp.   469-493. 

1895.  Die  Galapagos-Inseln.  Verhandlungen  der  Gesellschaft  filr  Erdkunde, 
vol.  22,  pp.  246-265. 


ARCHAEOLOGY 
IN  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS* 

Thor  Heyerdahl 

Laigueglia,  Italy 


Archaeological  investigations  of  the  Galapagos  group  have  until  recent- 
ly been  neglected  on  the  assumption  that  the  area  has  been  outside  the  range 
of  aboriginal  craft  from  either  South  America  or  Polynesia.  It  is  noteworthy, 
however,  that  the  Galapagos  group  was  considered  within  the  reach  of  abori- 
ginal craft  from  Peru  and  Ecuador  by  observers  from  the  16th  to  the  19th  cen- 
tury who  were  personally  familiar  with  guara-operated  balsa  rafts,  whereas  the 
confidence  in  this  remarkably  ingenious  water  vehicle  disappeared  with  the 
craft  itself  at  the  turn  of  the  present  century.  Discussions  on  the  possibility 
of  pre-Spanish  visits  to  the  Galapagos  have  all  admittedly  been  biased  by  the 
writers'  attitude  toward  balsa  rafts. 

When  Miguel  Cabello  de  Balboa  and  Pedro  Sarmiento  de  Gamboa  inde- 
pendently recorded  the  16th  century  Inca  versions  of  Inca  Tupac  Yupanqui's 
enduring  ocean  voyage  by  balsa  rafts  to  distant  islands  in  the  Pacific,  they 
were  both  personally  familiar  with  the  type  of  rafts  in  question,  which  they 
also  describe.  Although  Polynesia  was  still  unknown  to  Europeans,  Bishop 
de  Berlanga  had  by  then  drifted  so  far  out  as  to  discover  the  Galapagos  group, 
and  Balboa  suggested  that  these  were  perhaps  the  islands  visited  by  the  Inca's 
armada  of  rafts.  Sarmiento  de  Gamboa,  however,  who  was  himself  a  keen  navi- 
gator, inquired  about  the  old  sailing  directions  still  preserved  among  some  of 
the  Peruvian  raftsmen,  and  concluded  that  the  inhabited  islands  known  to  the 
coastal  raftsmen  and  only  revisited  by  Inca  Tupac's  armada  were  in  the  South 
Pacific  on  a  line  west  southwest  from  Callao  and  at  a  distance  of  about  600 
leagues  (2,400  miles).  He  was  so  confident  in  this  specific  position  that  he 
talked  the  Viceroy  into  organizing  the  first  Mendana  expedition  which  was  ac- 
tually sailing  straight  into  the  waters  immediately  surrounding  Easter  Island 
when  Mendana,  to  Gamboa's  disgust,  altered  course  and,  instead,  discovered 
other  islands  further  away  from  Peru,  first  Melanesia,  and,  on  a  subsequent 
voyage,  Polynesia. 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.S.  A.,  21  August 
to   6  September  1961,   and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,   and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

-45- 


46  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

The  remarkable  capacity  of  balsa  sailing  rafts  and  the  expertness  of 
their  crews  in  navigation  were  unanimously  praised  by  the  contemporary  chron- 
iclers, including  Saamanos,  Xeres,  Andagoya,  Oviedo,  Zarate,  Las  Casas,  Bal- 
boa, Gamboa,  Inca  Garcilasso,  Benzoni,and  Cobo. 

In  1619  the  Dutch  admiral  Spilbergen  had  his  whole  fleet  atPayta,  Peru, 
supplied  with  dried  fish  from  a  sailing  raft  that  had  been  out  fishing  for  two 
months  in  the  open  ocean  between  Payta  and  the  Galapagos  group.  The  raft  is 
illustrated  with  a  native  crew  navigating  with  characteristic  guarahoards  sunk 
between  the  logs  fore  and  aft. 

In  1680  the  buccaneer  Captain  Sharp  cruised  in  the  local  waters,  trying 
as  well  to  land  in  the  Galapagos.  His  sailing  vessel  first  followed  the  coast 
towards  Peru,  but  turned  into  the  open  ocean  off  Punta  Parina  to  avoid  being 
detected  by  the  Spaniards.  Out  there,  where  the  impact  of  the  Humboldt  Cur- 
rent strikes  out  towards  the  Galapagos,  and  in  the  midst  of  what  the  buccan- 
eers describe  as  a  very  stiff  off-shore  gale,  they  encountered  a  merchant  bal- 
sa raft  under  sail.  Their  own  pilot  advised  them  not  to  meddle  with  its  native 
crew,  "for  it  was  very  doubtful  whether  we  should  be  able  to  come  up  with 
them  or  not..."  We  learn  from  the  same  early  buccaneer  record  that  these  ab- 
original balsa  rafts  sail  "excellently  well,"  and  that  some  are  so  big  as  to 
carry  two  hundred  and  fifty  packs  of  meal  from  the  valleys  of  Peru  to  Panama 
without  wetting  any  of  it. 

In  1736  two  Spanish  naval  officers,  Juan  and  Ulloa,  made  the  first  tech- 
nical study  of  the  ingenious  guara  method  which  permitted  the  Indians  to  steer 
their  rafts  into  the  open  ocean  irrespective  of  the  direction  of  the  winds.  Ar- 
chaeological specimens  of  guara,  dating  back  to  pre-Inca  times,  are  still  pre- 
served in  desert  graves  from  the  Chimu  area  and  as  far  south  as  Paracas  and 
lea  in  south  central  Peru,  and,  ethnographically,  guara  were  commonly  in  use 
in  northern  Peru  and  Ecuador  during  Juan  and  Ulloa's  investigations  in  the 
Guayas  region.  They  reported  that  Ecuadorian  balsa  rafts,  from  75  to  90  feet 
long,  with  entire  families  onboard,  and  often  a  cargo  of  20  to  25  tons,  resisted 
the  rapidity  of  the  currents  in  the  open  ocean  off  Puna  Island  and  northern 
Peru,  and  added:  "...but  the  greatest  singularity  of  this  floating  vehicle  is, 
that  it  sails,  tacks,  and  works  as  well  in  contrary  winds  as  ships  with  a  keel, 
and  makes  very  little  leeway.  This  advantage  it  derives  from  another  method 
of  steering  than  by  a  rudder;  namely,  by  some  boards,  three  or  four  yards  in 
length,  and  half  a  yard  in  breadth,  called  guaras,  which  are  placed  vertically, 
both  at  the  head  and  stern  between  the  main  beams,  and  by  thrustingsome  of 
these  deep  in  the  water,  and  raising  others,  they  bear  away,  luff  up,  tack,  lay 
to,  and  perform  all  the  other  motions  of  a  regular  ship.  An  invention  hitherto 
unknown  to  the  most  intelligent  nations  of  Europe..."  (Juan  and  Ulloa,  1748, 
vol.  1,  p.  264). 

Humboldt,  Stevenson,  and  Paris  continue  to  praise  the  amazing  sailing 
abilities  and  seaworthiness  of  the  balsa  rafts  surviving  in  the  19th  century. 


No.  44)  HEYERDAHL:   GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  47 

and  in  1832  Morrell  reported  seeing  them  fifty  miles  from  land  and  able  to  "beat 
to  windward  like  a  pilot  boat..."  Skogman  on  his  world  cruise  in  1854  reported 
that  deep  sea-going  balsa  rafts  even  visited  the  distant  Galapagos  group,  and 
he  met  them  at  sea  navigating  with  bipod  masts  and  long  guaras  sunk  between 
the  logs  fore  and  aft  (Skogman,  1854,  vol.  1,  p.  164). 

About  the  turn  of  the  century  the  balsa  rafts  disappeared,  and  the  direct- 
ly associated  and  ingenious  technique  of  guara  navigation  was  ignored  and 
forgotten.  Archaeological  guara  were  common,  but  often  ignorantly  labeled  as 
agricultural  tools,  while  writers  who  have  realized  it  was  a  former  naviga- 
tional device  have  judged  the  guara  to  be  a  kind  of  rudder  or  a  usual  center- 
board   serving  merely  as  a  substitute  to  a  keel  to  reduce  the  leeway  of  a  raft. 

At  this  time  the  first  scholarly  discussions  of  possible  pre-Spanish  vis- 
its to  the  Galapagos  began.  Historians  of  Inca  history  from  Markham  in  1907 
to  Means  in  1942  have  been  so  impressed  by  the  obviously  historic  aspect  of 
Inca  Tupac's  ocean  voyage  that  they  believed  his  raft  armada  to  have  visited 
the  Galapagos,  since  these  were  the  nearest  oceanic  islands.  Hutchinson 
(1875)  had  by  then  termed  the  balsa  raft  a  "floating  bundle  of  corkwood," 
and  Means,  although  believing  the  Inca  had  reached  the  Galapagos,  underesti- 
mated the  raft  which  had  taken  him  there,  stating  it  was  "obviously  a  type  of 
boat  that  would  awake  nothing  but  scorn  in  the  breasts  of  shipbuilders  of  al- 
most any  other  maritime  people  in  the  world. 

Lothrop  (1932)  made  a  more  comprehensive  study  of  the  practical  as- 
pects of  such  a  voyage,  but  was  misled  by  an  erroneous  19th  century  source 
to  believe  that  the  Galapagos  could  never  have  been  reached  by  balsa  rafts. 
He  referred  to  Byam  (1850),  an  English  traveller  a  century  ago,  who  also  saw 
a  balsa  beating  against  the  wind  off  northern  Peru,  and  who  was  told  by  his 
captain  that  these  rafts  could  tack  much  closer  into  a  contrary  wind  than  a 
European  whale-boat,  but  that  they  went  slower  through  the  water,  and  that  in 
a  few  weeks  they  lost  their  buoyancy  and  had  to  be  taken  ashore  to  dry.  From 
the  latter  statement  Lothrop  concluded  that  a  balsa  raft  was  unable  to  remain 
afloat  at  sea  long  enough  to  complete  a  voyage  to  the  Galapagos,  and  he  sug- 
gested that  Tupac  may  rather  have  transported  an  army  by  sea  and  plundered 
the  mainland  to  the  north  of  Guayaquil. 

Hornell(1946)  wrote:  "Certainly  no  ordinary,  untreated  balsa  raft  could 
make  a  prolonged  oversea  voyage  unless  the  Inca's  seamen  knew  of  an  effec- 
tive  method   of  treating  its  absorbent  logs  with  some  kind   of  waterproofing 
composition..."  He  found  it  likely,  however,  that  the  early  Peruvians  used  some 
preparation  of  gum,    resin  or  wax  in  some  solvent  to  rub  over  the  logs,    and 
that  this  had  helped  the  Inca  rafts  remain  afloat  to  the  Galapagos. 

However,  the  erroneous  verdict  of  the  balsa  rafts  had  now  spread  into 
the  general  Pacific  literature,  and  deprived  archaeologists  of  any  stimulus  to 
investigate  the  arid  and  uninhabited  Galapagos.  General  visitors  to  the  group, 
rather  than  being  alerted  to  the  possibility  of  finding  pre-Inca  vestiges,  denied 


48  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

it  absolutely.  For  example,  vonHagen  (1949,  p.  178)  was  lead  to  assert:  "What- 
ever islands  the  Inca  sailed  to,  he  did  not  sail  to  the  Galapagos."  He  backed 
this  assertion  by  citing  presumably  authoritative  statements  to  the  effect  that 
the  Andean  seaboard  dwellers  were  "majestically   inept"  in  marine  matters, 
and  concluded  that  Inca  landings  in  the  Galapagos   "was  a  manifest  impossi- 
bility." 

Subsequent  events  have  shown  that  the  modern  verdict  on  balsa  rafts 
has  been  erroneous  and  directly  misleading.  Since  1947,  five  manned  sailing 
rafts  from  Peru  have  passed  the  Galapagos,  one  to  be  picked  up  later  drifting 
about  in  the  doldrums,  and  four  to  end  up  in  East,  Central,  and  West  Polynesia. 
One  was  actually  heading  on  for  Melanesia  when  picked  up  off  Samoa.  Of  more 
importance  still,  renewed  experiments  with  the  guara  technique  carried  out  by 
Estrada,  Reed,  Skjolsvold,  and  the  writer  in  a  balsa  raft  off  Ecuador  in  1953, 
resulted  in  the  rediscovery  of  the  functional  system  of  this  exceedingly  in- 
genous  navigational  invention,  verifying  all  the  discredited  early  records  to 
the  effect  that,  through  a  correct  interplay  between  guara  fore  and  aft,  the  bal- 
sa will  turn  around  and  tack  along  any  chosen  course  regardless  of  wind  direc- 
tion. Other  experiments  have  shown  that  balsa  rafts  of  green  timber  will  re- 
tain perfect  buoyancy  for  two  years  and  probably  more. 

Accordingly,   the   Galapagos  are  located  far  within  the  feasible  range 
of  aboriginal  Peruvian  and  Ecuadorian  navigation. 

With  this  knowledge  in  mind,  an  expedition  organized  to  search  for  pos- 
sible archaeological  sites  was  led  to  the  Galapagos  by  the  writer  in  1953, 
with  E.  K.  Reed  and  A.  Skjolsvold  as  participating  archaeologists.  No  attempt 
was  made  to  accomplish  an  exhaustive  survey  of  the  group  or  any  single  is- 
land, and  areas  for  investigation  were  selected  according  to  apparent  geo- 
graphical possibilities  for  aboriginal  occupation  combined  with  primitive  land- 
ing facilities. 

Four  pre-Spanish  occupation  areas  were  located  on  three  different  is- 
lands. The  largest  site  was  on  the  plateau  above  James  Bay  on  Santiago  Is- 
land, where  eight  different  aboriginal  camp  sites  were  located.  A  mountain 
ridge  separated  these  from  another  site  at  Buccaneer  Bay  on  the  same  island. 
The  two  other  sites  were  encountered  respectively  at  Whale  Bay  on  Santa  Cruz 
and  at  Black  Beach  on  Floreana.  An  additional  prehistoric  site  was  located 
at  Cabo  Colorado  on  Santa  Cruz  by  Mr.  J.  C.  Couffer  and  Mr.  C.  Hall  subse- 
quent to  the  departure  of  our  expedition. 

The  combined  sites  yielded  in  all  1961  aboriginal  ceramic  sherds,  re- 
presenting at  least  131  pols,  probably  more.  Of  these,  44  pots  were  identifi- 
able with  known  ceramic  wares  from  the  coasts  of  Ecuador  and  northern  Peru 
and  13  additional  pots  are  probably  identifiable  with  ware  from  the  same  area. 
The  remaining  74  pots  represent  aboriginal  ware  of  which  67  are  unidentified 
merely  because  of  insufficient  characteristics  in  the  limited  material  preserved, 
whereas  7  pots  are  unidentifiable  in  spite  of  striking  characteristics  in  the 


No.  44)  HEYERDAHL:    GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  49 

remaining  sherds.  Some  sites  produced  only  Peruvian  sherds,  while  others 
yielded  both  Peruvian  and  Ecuadorian  material.  The  ceramic  types  from  the 
North  Coast  of  Peru  were  studied  and  identified  by  C.  Evans  and  B.  J.  Meggers 
of  the  Smithsonian  Institution. 

La  Plata  Molded  ware  is  represented  by  3  pots  from  two  different  local- 
ities in  James  Bay.  San  Juan  Molded  is  represented  by  one  pot  from  another 
locality  in  James  Bay.  Queneto  Polished  Plain  is  represented  by  2  pots  from 
two  different  localities  in  James  Bay.  Tiahuanacoid  ware  is  represented  by  3 
pots  from  two  different  localities  in  James  Bay.  San  Nicolas  Molded  is  repre- 
sented by  one  pot  from  James  Bay.  Tomaval  Plain  is  represented  by  at  least 
15  pots  from  James  Bay,  Buccaneer  Bay,  Whale  Bay,  and  Black  Beach.  Another 
five  pots  from  three  sites  were  probable  Tomaval  Plain.  Castillo  Plain  is  re- 
presented by  at  least  10  pots  from  James  Bay,  Whale  Bay,  and  Black  Beach. 
The  latter  site  also  produced  a  Mochica-type  clay  whistle.  Another  6  pots 
were  probable  Castillo  Plain.  The  other  identifiable  pots  were  characteristic 
plainware  of  the  Guayas  area  in  Ecuador.  The  material  is  reported  in  detail 
by  Skjolsvold  and  the  writer  in  Memoir  no.  12  of  the  Society  for  American 
Archaeology. 

With  the  exception  of  three  pots  of  hitherto  unknown  non-European  type, 
represented  by  377  rim,  handle,  and  body  sherds  of  a  very  thin  ware  with  thick, 
glossy  red  slip  and  complex  form,  no  distinctly  new  types  of  ceramic  were  en- 
countered. In  other  words,  the  material  collected,  as  such  is  in  itself  of  scant 
scientific  value.  Its  only  importance  is  embodied  in  the  fact  that  it  has  been 
left  behind  in  the  Galapagos  Islands,  from  600  to  1,000  miles  from  its  identi- 
fiable mainland  points  of  origins. 

Naturally  then,   the  question  arises:    to  what  extent  may  some  of  these 
remains  have  found  their  way  to  these  oceanic  islands  in  post-Columbian  times? 
It  may  be  useful  therefore   to  review  very  briefly  the  early  history  of  the  Ga- 
lapagos. 

The  group  was  accidentally  discovered  by  Europeans  in  1535,  when 
Bishop  Tomas  de  Berlanga  was  caught  by  the  strong  off-shore  set  of  the  com- 
bined El  Nino  and  Humboldt  Current  while  sailing  from  Panama  bound  for  Peru. 
A  day  was  spent  on  one  island  and  two  on  another  in  futile  search  of  water, 
whereupon  the  Spaniards  barely  managed  to  tack  hstck  to  Ecuador  against  the 
strong  westbound  currents.  Coming  from  Panama,  however,  the  Bishop  and 
his  party  could  hardly  have  brought  aboriginal  Peruvian  or  Ecuadorian  ceram- 
ics to  the  Galapagos. 

A  second  visit  to  the  group  occurred  in  1546,  when  Captain  Diego  de 
Rivadeneira  stole  a  ship  at  Arica,  present  Chile,  and  set  sail  for  Guatemala. 
He  rediscovered  the  Galapagos,  and  a  brief  and  futile  search  for  water  was 
made  on  one  of  the  smaller  islands,  whereupon  the  ship  immediately  left  the 
group  without  setting  foot  ashore  on  any  of  the  other  islands.  Under  these  cir- 
cumstances this  party  could  not  have  left  the  sherds  under  discussion. 


50  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

We  know  that  some  extremely  few  other  Spanish  caravels  sailed  into  the 
Galapagos  Sea  in  the  latter  part  of  the  16th  century,  but  it  is  also  known  that 
they  made  no  use  of  the  islands,  which  they  found  to  be  desert  and  without 
fruit  or  water.  It  is  possible  that  some  of  these  caravels  carried  some  Indians 
on  board,  and  that  some  of  the  latter  went  ashore  with  ceramic  pots,  some  of 
which  were  broken  there,  but  it  is  hardly  possible  that  they  carried  a  minimum 
of  131  aboriginal  pots  ashore,  and  broke  them  all.  Nor  would  they  even  have 
brought  along  such  variety  of  ware,  representing  widely  separated  geographi- 
cal regions  and  cultural  epochs  in  aboriginal  Peru  and  Ecuador. 

Although  first  referred  to  as  Galapagos  on  a  map  by  Ortelius  in  1570, 
this  remote  group  in  the  treacherous  Humboldt  Current  remained  Las  Islas  En- 
cantadas  to  the  Spaniards,  until  the  British  buccaneers  found  it  a  convenient 
hide-out  towards  the  end  of  the  17th  century.  As  cited  above,  the  buccaneer 
Captain  Sharp,  who  described  merchant  balsa  rafts  carrying  cargo  between  the 
valleys  of  Peru  and  Panama,  attempted  to  call  at  the  Galapagos  in  1680,  but 
the  currents  prevented  him  even  from  landing.  Four  years  later,  in  1684,  Euro- 
peans got  a  brief  foothold  ashore  for  the  first  time,  when  a  group  including 
Cowley,  Dampier,  Davis,  Wafer,  Ringrose,  and  John  Cook  anchored  for  twelve 
days  in  James  Bay  on  Santiago,  while  dividing  their  spoils.  A  British  Museum 
manuscript  by  Cowley  reflects  the  isolation  of  the  group  until  then:  "...wee 
sailed  away  to  the  Westwards  to  see  if  wee  could  find  those  Islands  called 
theGalipoloes,  which  made  the  Spaniards  Laugh  at  us  telling  us  that  they  were 
inchanted  Islands  and  that  there  was  never  any  but  Captaino  Porialto  that 
had  ever  seen  them  but  could  not  come  nearethem  to  Anchor  at  them,  and  they 
were  but  Shadowes  and  noe  reall  Islands." 

A  curious  incident  is  that  this  buccaneer  party  in  1684  stored  a  strange 
booty  in  James  Bay,  including  eight  tons  of  quince  marmalade.  The  Viceroy 
of  Peru  detected  their  hide-out,  all  the  large  jars  were  destroyed,  and  count- 
less sherds  of  thick,  wheel-made  "Spanish  jars,"  first  noted  by  Colnett  in 
1798,  are  still  found  all  over  the  local  plateau.  An  interesting  point  is  that 
some  of  these  sherds  were  seen  by  us  imbedded  in  the  large  black  lava  flow 
part  of  which  covers  a  main  portion  of  the  local  valley,  thus  showing  that  this 
major  volcanic  outburst  on  Santiago  Island  post-dates  A.D.  1684. 

These  pioneering  British  buccaneers  were  followed  in  1700  by  a  French 
expedition  under  Beauchesne-Gouin  which  remained  a  month,  whereas  the  Span- 
iards arrived  to  explore  and  map  the  group  under  Torres  in  1789,  a  visit  which 
is  recorded  to  be  the  first  of  any  consequence  by  a  Spaniard  since  Berlanga's 
brief  visit  of  discovery. 

There  is,  accordingly,  no  foundation  for  a  hypothesis  of  post-European 
introduction  of  the  aboriginal  refuse  in  various  sites  in  the  Galapagos  group. 
The  identification  by  Evans  and  Meggers  of  the  Peruvian  ware  shows  that  the 
local  deposits  consist  of  material  dating  back  through  Estero,  La  Plata,  and 
Tomaval  periods   on  the  mainland,  which  means  that  refuse  from  at  least  two 


No.  44)  HEYERDAHL:   GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  51 

of  the  Galapagos  sited  are  dateable  to  Coastal  Tiahuanaco  times. 

The  discovery  of  sherds  from  a  minimum  of  131  aboriginal  pots  broken 
and  left  behind  in  the  Galapagos  implies  a  considerable  human  activity  in 
precolonial  times.  It  is  quite  obvious  that  our  cursory  survey  failed  to  encoun- 
ter all  sites,  and  only  uncovered  part  of  the  material  still  available.  Owing  to 
the  general  scarcity  of  soil  on  the  coastal  cliffs,  much  of  the  refuse  is  also 
washed  into  the  sea.  It  is  also  clear  that  we  are  dealing  with  repeated  visits 
rather  than  permanent  habitation,  as  the  latter  would  have  left  thicker  depos- 
its and  a  more  homogenous  ware.  A  local  development  would  scarcely  have 
succeeded  in  achieving  an  independent  evolution  in  pottery  that  closely  fol- 
lowed the  mainland  pattern  from  Castillo  and  Tomaval  Plain  ware  through  poly- 
chrome Tiahuanacoid,  San  Nicolas  Molded,  and  finally  the  three  characteris- 
tic types  of  Chimu  blackware  as  represented  by  Queneto  Polished  Plain  and 
San  Juan  and  La  Plata  Molded.  The  refuse  deposited  represents  ceramic  types 
from  the  Guayas  area  of  Ecuador  down  to  the  Casma  Valley  near  the  transition 
to  the  Central  Coast  of  Peru,  1,000  miles  away. 

To  summarize:  The  use  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  probably  as  a  fishing 
outpost  is  not  a  practice  of  European  origin,  but  the  continuation  of  an  abor- 
iginal pattern  that  appears  to  date  at  least  as  far  back  as  the  Coastal  Tia- 
huanaco period  in  the  Peruvian  archaeological  sequence. 


Literature  Cited 
Byam,  G. 

1850.        Wanderings    in    some    of    the    western    republics    of    America...    London. 

HAGEN,   V.W.,   VON 

1949.         Ecuador    and    the    Galapagos    Islands.    University    of   Oklahoma    Press, 
IX  +  290  pp. 

HORNELL,   J. 

1946.        How   did  the   sweet  potato  reach  Oceania?   Journal  of  Linnaean  Society 
of  London,  vol.  53,   no.  348,  pp.  41-62,  figs.  1-2,   1  map.  London. 

Hutchinson,  T.  J. 

1875.         Anthropology  of  prehistoric  Peru.   Journal  of  the   Royal  Anthropological 
Institute,  vol.  4.   London. 

Juan,  G.,  and  A.  De  Ulloa 

1748.         Relacion  historica  del  viaje   a  la  America  Meridional...    Vol.    1.   Madrid. 

LOTHROP,  S.   K. 

1932.         Aboriginal   navigation   off  the   West   Coast  of  South   America.    Royal  An- 
thropological Institute,  vol.   62,.   London 

Skogman,  C. 

1854.        F  reg  at  ten  Eugenics  Resa  Omkring  Jorden  Aren  1851-53.  Vol.  1 .  Stockholm. 


OPPORTUNITIES  FOR  BOTANICAL  STUDY 
ON  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS*  i 

Henry  K.  Svenson 

U.  S.  Geological  Survey 
Washington,  D.   C 


Establishment  of  a  permanent  biological  station  on  the  Galapagos  Is- 
lands offers  botanists  an  unusual  opportunity  for  study  of  the  ecology  and 
systematics  of  flowering  plants  and  lichens.  Only  a  small  part  of  the  Galapa- 
gos Islands  has  been  well  explored.  The  flowering  plants  are  known  only  in  a 
provisional  way.  The  lichens,  worked  on  byLinder  (1934),  are  present  in  pro- 
fusion but  are  comparatively  little  known,  although  as  "orchilla  moss"  they 
were  once  used  in  dyes,  and  represented  the  only  vegetable  product  of  the  Is- 
lands that  was  of  any  commerical  value.  The  general  ecology  of  the  Islands 
has  been  treated  in  some  detail  by  Stewart  (1915),  but  the  ecology  of  varia- 
tion within  individual  species  is  almost  unknown. 

Much  of  the  southern  part  of  Indefatigable  Island  is  accessible  by  foot 
from  the  Darwin  Research  Station.  Even  in  the  neighborhood  of  the  Station  the 
complex  variability  within  individual  species  would  be  sufficient  for  the  solu- 
tion of  many  fundamental  problems  that  have  been  known  since  the  time  of 
Darwin.  For  example,  careful  field  examination  with  a  hand  lens  would  allow 
differentiation  of  the  various  species  of  Cordia  (Boraginaceae),  the  identifi- 
cation of  which  was  based  by  Johnston  (1935)  primarily  on  the  presence  of 
simple,  branched,  or  stellate  hairs.  Likewise,  field  examination  of  mature 
seeds  or  achenes  of  such  genera  as  Altemanthera  and  Scalesia  would  further 
the  understanding  of  fruiting  parts  in  these  difficult  genera.  It  is  to  be  hoped 
that  plants  can  be  experimentally  grown  from  seeds,  in  order  to  solve  many  of 
the  tangles  associated  with  variable  species  in  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Such 
experiments  could  be  carried  on  in  Hawaii,  California,  or  even  in  a  little  plot 
adjacent  to  the  laboratory. 

Variability  within  individual  species  on  the  Galapagos  Islands  is  more 
marked  than  in  the  same  species  on  the  mainland  of  Ecuador  (Svenson,  1946, 

•  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.  S.  A.,  21  August 
to   6   September  1961,   and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL   ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  bishop  Museum,  and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

1        Publication  authorized  by  the  Director  of  the  U.  S.  Geological  Survey. 

-53- 


54  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

p.  142).  The  variability  commonly  takes  the  form  of  reduction  in  leaf  surface, 
as  may  be  seen  in  Croton  (Svenson,  1935,  plate  4),  or  the  lack  of  spines  in 
Acanthospermum  microcarpum  (Robinson,  1902,  plate  1),  or  of  leaves  and  car- 
pels as  in  Sidaspinosa.  This  variability  within  species  is  fundamental  to  the 
study  of  evolution  of  species  in  the  Galapagos  Islands,  and  probably  uncon- 
sciously impressed  itself  on  Darwin.  Although  Darwin  had  no  extensive  knowl- 
edge of  South  American  plants  and  depended  upon  his  friend.  Hooker,  for  ident- 
ification of  specimens,  he  was  an  admirable  collector.  He  saw  the  great  dif- 
ference in  the  vegetation  of  the  Islands  compared  with  what  he  had  seen  on 
the  Peruvian  coast.  Excellent  accounts  are  given  in  the  Voyage  of  the  Beagle, 
and  references  in  the  Origin  of  Species.  2  The  letter  which  he  wrote  from  the 
Galapagos  Islands  to  his  sister  is  unfortunately  missing  (Barlow,  1946).  As 
an  incentive  to  exploration  it  may  be  mentioned  that  Darwin  collected  a  num- 
ber of  species  in  the  Islands,  including  small  Compositae  such  as  Elvira  in- 
elegans,  which  have  never  been  found  again. 

Lack  (1947)  published  a  memorable  account  of  Darwin's  finches,  the 
only  group  of  birds  outstanding  as  an  example  of  adaptive  radiation.  As  the 
diet  of  many  of  these  birds  is  vegetative,  the  identification  of  seeds  in  bird 
crops  should  be  one  of  the  goals  of  field  study  in  the  Islands  [See  Bowman, 
1961].  Lack  states  (page  17)  that  "Most  species  of  Darwin's  finches  occur  on 
a  number  of  islands.  In  some  cases  the  island  populations  differ  sufficiently 
to  justify  division  into  subspecies,  in  other  cases  the  differences  are  less 
marked,  and  yet  in  others,  they  are  barely  perceptible.  They  are  not  in  general 
confined  to  individual  islands."  He  notes  that  populations  of  finches  on  the 
smallest  islands,  such  as  Wenman  and  Tower,  are  the  least  variable;  that  those 
on  the  moderately  small  islands  of  Abingdon  and  Bindloe  are  somewhat  more 
variable;  and  that  the  population  on  the  larger  island  of  James  is  more  vari- 
able still.  Whether  such  generalizations  are  true  of  plants  is  not  known.  The 
relatively  small  number  of  species  of  plants  on  the  Galapagos  Islands  should 
make  studies  much  easier  than  on  the  mainland,  with  its  more  complicated  flora. 

Lack  notes  (page  115)  that  Darwin's  realization  that  a  species  may  be 
represented  by  different  forms  in  different  regions  was  one  of  the  most  impor- 
tant results  of  the  voyage  of  the  Beagle,  since  it  led  directly  to  the  question- 
ing of  the  immutability  of  species.  He  states  (page  125),  "The  apparent  fixity 
of  species  is  most  striking  and  provides  the  basis  for  systematic  zoology... 
Charles  Darwin  and  many  after  him  are  wrong  when  they  assert  that  the  deter- 
mination of  species  is  purely  arbitrary."  Dobzhansky  (1941,  page  365),  simi- 
larly finds  that,  "The  notion,  entertained  by  some  biologists  unfamiliar  with 


2  In  this  footnote  I  extend  my  appreciation  to  the  late  Professor  L.  J.  Henderson  of  Harvard 
University.  His  course  on  the  history  of  science  introduced  me  to  the  Origin  of  Species,  Merz' 
History  of  European  Thought  in  the  Nineteenth  Century,  and  his  own  book,  The  Fitness  of  the 
Environment,  a  background  for  Darwinian  evolution. 


No.  44)  SVENSON:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  55 

the  subject,  that  species  are  arbitrary  units  like  all  other  systematic  units, 
is  unfounded."  Zimmermann  (1954,  page  195)  observes  that  Linnaeus  passes 
in  general  as  the  representative  of  constancy  in  species  from  the  beginning, 
and  of  an  artificial  system,  but  that  is  correct  only  of  the  younger  Linnaeus. 

We  may  now  turn  our  attention  to  a  correlation  between  the  vegetation 
of  the  Galapagos  Islands,  the  South  American  mainland,  and  the  Caribbean  re- 
gion, and  the  means  by  which  plants  may  have  come  to  the  Islands.   Many  Com- 
positae  are  tree-like  on  islands,   but  such  a  point  of  view  can  easily  be  over- 
emphasized. Compositae  (Baccharis)  and  also  cacti  (Cereus)  are  just  as  large, 
if  not  larger,  on  the  adjacent  mainland  of  Ecuador.    The  Galapagos  Islands,  it 
is  true,  are  a  focal  point  of  dry  zones  from  the  Caribbean  to  Peru.  But  between 
these  dry  zones  intrudes   the  great  tropical  rain  forest,  which  extends  from 
Darien  to  Ecuador,   with  species  that  have  little  or  no  relationship  to  the  Ga- 
lapagos flora.  Overlooking  of  this  simple  fact  is,  I  believe,  the  basis  of  much 
of  Croizat's  troubles  (1958)  in  respect  to  the  Galapagos  vegetation.    Species 
on  the  Galapagos  Islands  are  more  variable  than  those  on  the  adjacent  conti- 
nent, and  Howell  (1934,  page  515)  has  fittingly  called  the  Islands  "Evolution's 
workshop  and  showcase."   The  number  of  species  in  the  Islands  is  relatively 
small,  which  is  all  to  the  good,    for  more  attention  can  then  be  paid  to  varia- 
tion in  species,  without  being  overwhelmed  by  their  number.  It  does  not  mean 
that  new  species  will  not  be  discovered  in  the  Galapagos  Islands,  for  every 
expedition  finds  them.     The  studies  should  try  to  show  how  continental  spe- 
cies  have  reached  the  Islands,   in  the  manner  of  the  excellent  contribution 
made  by  Howard  (1950)  for  Bimini  Island  in  the  Bahamas. 

As  adequate  meteorological  observations  are  made  on  the  Islands,  there 
is  the  opportunity  of  correlating  the  climatic  area  occupied  by  individual  spe- 
cies with  the  distribution  of  the  same  species  on  the  mainland.  For  example, 
the  yellow-flowered  Piscidia  carthagenensis  Jacquin  is  one  of  the  largest 
trees  on  the  Islands.  It  was  long  considered  to  be  the  same  as  the  widespread 
P.  erythrina.  Stewart  knew  it  from  Chatham  and  Santa  Cruz  Islands.  Altitudi- 
nal  distribution  of  this  tree  (Svenson,  1935,  page  210)  exceeds  that  of  any 
other  tree  in  the  Islands,  extending  from  near  the  coast  at  Academy  Bay  to 
over  2,000  feet  elevation.  Its  greatest  size  is  in  the  most  humid  region;  above 
1,000  feet  elevation  it  is  dwarfed.  On  the  mainland,  Piscidia  carthagenensis 
is  known  only  from  western  Ecuador,  the  Cartagena-Barranquilla  region  of 
Colombia,  and  the  north  coast  of  Venezuela.  All  of  these  areas  have  a  dry 
climate.  Thus  the  continental  distribution  of  this  tree  demonstrates  that  even 
the  moistest  parts  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  correspond  in  their  vegetation  to 
areas  of  dry  climate  on  the  mainland.  Such  continental  areas  in  northern  South 
America  are  shown  on  a  map  by  Sorge  (1930).  From  a  general  point  of  view, 
the  climatic  references  in  respect  to  vegetation  given  by  Koppen  (1931),  Lauer 
(1951  and  1952),  Tregurtha  (1961),  and  especially  Papadakis  (1961),  should 
also  be  consulted. 


56  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

The  best  knov/n  example  of  radiative  adaptation  of  plants  in  the  Gala- 
pagos Islands  is  Scalesia.     Sixteen  species  are  recognized  by  Howell  (1941). 
The  genus  is  related  to  Helianthus  of  western  South  America,  but  the  exact 
relationship  is  not  known.     Also  of  extraordinary  interest  from  the  point  of 
adaptive  radiation  is  the  genus  Euphorbia,    which  was  elaborated  by  A.  Hass- 
ler  (1929).   All  Galapagos  species  of  Euphorbia  are  related  to  one  another  ex- 
cept E.  viminea,    which  is  known  also  from  the  Bahama  Islands,   and  chiefly 
from   Turks  Island.     Euphorbia  viminea  may  thus  be  presumed  to  have  come 
from  the  Bahamas.  Nevertheless,  the  shrub  is  now  common  throughout  the  Ga- 
lapagos Islands,  and  it  was  treated  by  Robinson  and  Greenman  (1895,  page 
136)  as  an  example  of  unusual  variation,  with  the  notation,   "Perhaps  no  spe- 
cies to  be  found  on  the  different  islands  better  illustrates  the  noteworthy  ra- 
cial divergence  in  related  forms  than  Euphorbia  viminea."  It  was  first  collec- 
ted by  Macrae  in  1825  on  Albemarle  Island.    The  variation  is,  I  think,  mainly 
the  difference  between  adult  and  juvenile  foliage   (Svenson,   1935,  plate  2). 
This  species  is  probably  easily  spread  by  proliferations  developed  in  the  leaf 
axils,  and  presumably  has  come  from  the  Bahamas  in  connection  with  the  salt 
and  whaling  industry.     Turks  Island  was  an  important  source  of  high-grade 
salt  for  eastern  United  States  during  the  first  half  of  the  nineteenth  century, 
especially  for  preservation  of  meat;  and  in  early  days,  the  salt  was  loaded 
directly  into  ships  by  means  of  wheelbarrows.     My  friend,  Robert  Cushman 
Murphy   has   informed  me  that  he  does  not  know  of  any  definite  records  of 
whalers  stopping  at  Turks  Island  for  salt,  but  there  is  no  reason  to  suppose 
that  they  did  not  do  so.  To  show  how  easily  plant  fragments  can  spread,  we 
may  note  the  peculiar  distribution  of  Eleocharis  pachycarpa,   a  Chilean  spe- 
cies which  appeared  at  Port  Jackson  in  Australia  at  a  very  early  date.     The 
well  known  anthropologist  Herbert  Spinden,  then  of  the  Brooklyn  Museum,  sug- 
gested a  possible  explanation  to  me.  In  order  to  avoid  the  hot  journey  around 
the  Cape  of  Good  Hope,  ships  transported  sheep  and  cattle  from  England  to 
Australia  by  way  of  Cape  Horn,  with  stops  at  Buenos  Aires  and  Santiago  for 
pasture.  Under  such  conditions,  fragments  of  the  Eleocharis  could  easily  be 
picked  up. 

In  the  Galapagos  Islands,  modern  scientific  investigation  begins  with 
the  visit  of  David  Douglas  and  John  Scouler  in  January,  1825,  but  whaling  op- 
erations were  carried  on  at  an  earlier  date.  Woodes  Rogers  and  other  pirates 
were  there  as  early  as  1708.  What  plant  introductions,  if  any,  these  early  vis- 
itors made  upon  the  arid  shores  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  is  unknown. 

Dry  areas  of  the  Islands  seem  to  have  the  more  pronounced  endemism. 
Darwin  found  the  Galapagos  finches  to  be  characteristic  of  arid  regions,  and 
Howell  mentions  pockets  in  arid  regions  where  endemism.  is  exceptionally  well 
developed.  Thus  Howell  (1941,  page  237)  states,  "Not  uncommonly  the  same 
ecologic  factors  affecting  segregation  are  locally  active  in  several,  unrelated 
groups  of  plants,  and  because  of  the  peculiar  geologic  history  or  critical  geo- 


No.  44)  SVENSON:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  57 

graphic  position  of  the  particular  district  where  they  grow,  an  endemic  area 
may  emerge  in  which  unrelated  entities  exhibit  parallel  responses  to  some 
specialized  ecologic  condition.  Such  an  area  seems  to  occur  in  the  vicinity  of 
Sullivan  Bay  on  James  Island  where  several  remarkable  and  distinct  species 
are  found... another  is  that  region  including  the  Seymour  Islands  and  adjacent 
Indefatigable." 

Stebbins  (1952,  page  34),  in  a  general  discussion  of  aridity  as  a  stimu- 
lus to  evolution,  not  specifically  on  the  Galapagos  Islands,  mentions  that, 
"In  the  dryer  areas  it  is  possible  that  more  species  originate,  reach  their  cli- 
max, decline,  and  become  extinct,  than  in  more  favorable  regions.  Reduction 
of  leaf  surface,  development  oftrichomes,  scales  and  other  coverings,  ofsunk- 
en  stomata,  of  deciduous  leaves,  of  extensive  root  systems,  of  bulbs,  storage 
roots,  and  other  structures... all  of  these  appear  as  frequent  modifications  of 
xerophytes."  Many  references  have  been  made  to  the  lack  of  certain  families 
of  plants  in  the  Galapagos  Islands,  but  to  me  the  absence  of  the  Capparida- 
ceae,  so  prominently  represented  as  bushes  and  trees  on  the  xerophytic  coasts 
of  Ecuador  and  Peru,  is  the  most  striking. 

From  the  foregoing  review,  opportunities  for  botanical  research  in  the 
Galapagos  Islands  would  appear  to  be  outstanding.  For  much  of  the  background, 
and  for  help  in  what  I  have  said,  I  am  especially  indebted  to  John  Thomas 
Howell  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences. 

Literature   Cited 
BARLOW,  Nora,  ed. 

1946.         Charles    Darwin    and    the    Voyage     of  the   Beagle,   unpublished   letters    and 
notebooks.   279  pp.   The   Philosophical   Library.    New   York. 

Croizat,  L. 

1958.        Panbiogeographie.    Vol.    1,    961    pp.    The    New   World.    Weldon    &    Wesley, 
Herts,  England. 

DOBZHANSKY,   T. 

1941.        Genetics    and  the   origin  of  species.   Vol.   XVL  364  pp.   Columbia  Univer- 
sity Press,  ed.   2. 

Hassler,  a. 

1939.         On   the  limitation   of  the   species   within  the   Euphorbia-group    Cheloneae 
Doiss.   Botaniska  Notiser,  For.,   Ar.    1939,  pp.    745-748. 

Henderson,  L.  J. 

1913.        The    fitness    of   the    environment.    The    MacMillan    Company.    New   York. 

Howard,  R.  A. 

1950.        Vegetation    on    the    Bimini    Island    group,    Bahamas,    B.W.I.      Ecological 
Monographs,    vol.   20,  pp.   317-349. 

Howell,  J.T. 

1934.        Cacti    in   the   Galapagos   Islands.    Cactus    and   Succulent    Journal,   vol.   5, 

pp.  515-518,  531-532,  figs.    1-9. 
1941.        The   Genus  Scalesia.    Proceedings  of  the  California  Ac  ademy  of  Sciences, 

ser.  4,   vol.   22,   pp.   221-271. 


58  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 


Johnston,  I.  M. 

1935.        The   Genus   Cordia.     Journal  of  the  Arnold  Arboretum,  vol.  16,  pp.   174-176. 

KOPPEN,   W. 

1931.        Grundriss  der  Klimakunde,   ed.   2.  Walter  de   Gruyter  &   Co.    Berlin. 

Lack,  D. 

1947.        Darwin's  finches.   208  pp.   Cambridge   Unitersity  Press.   Cambridge   Eng- 
land. 

Lauer,  W. 

1951.  Die    Zahl  der  humiden   bzw.    ariden  Monate    (Isohygromenen)   in  Siidamer- 

ika  u.  Afrika.  Erdkunde,   Band  V,   Heft  4. 

1952.  Studien    zur  Klima  und  Vegetationskunde  der  Tropen.    Bonner  Geograph- 

ische   Abhandlungen,   Heft  9. 

LiNDER,   D. 

1934.        Lichens   of  the   Galapagos  Islands.     The   Templeton  Crocker  Expedition 
of   the    California    Academy    of   Sciences.      Proceedings    of   the   Cali- 
fornia Academy  of  Sciences,   ser.  4,  vol.  21,  pp.   211-221. 

Merz,  J.  T. 

1903.         History  of  European   thought   in   the    Nineteenth   Century.   London. 
PAPADAKIS,  J. 

1961.        Climatic  tables  for  the   world.     Av.   Cordoba  4564,   Buenos   Aires. 

Robinson,  B.  L. 

1902.         Flora   of  the    Galapagos   Islands.   Proceedings   of  the    American    Academy 
of  Arts  and  Sciences,  vol.  38,  no.   4,  pp.    77-269. 

ROBINSON,  B.  L.,and  J.  M.  Greenman. 

1895.         On   the   flora   of  the   Galapagos  Islands,   as   shown  by  the   collection  of  Dr. 
G.Baur.  American  Journal  of  Science,  ser.  3,   vol.  50,  pp.  135-149. 

SORGE,    E. 

1930.        Die    Trockengrenze    Slidamerikas.    Zeitschrift   der   Gesellschaft    fiir  Erd- 
kunde  zu  Berlin,  pp.   277-287. 

Stebbins,  L. 

1952.        Aridity   as  a  stimulant  to  plant  evolution.    American  Naturalist,  vol.   86, 
pp.  33-44. 

Stewart,  A. 

1911.        A   botanical   survey  of  the   Galapagos  Islands.    Proceedings   of  the   Cali- 
fornia Academy  of  Sciences,   ser.   4,   vol.    1,  pp.   7-288. 

1915.        Some  observations  concerning  the   botanical  conditions   on  the   Galapagos 
Islands.  Proceedings   of  the  Wisconsin  Academy  of  Sciences,  vol.  18, 
pp.   272-340. 

SVENSON,   H.   K. 

1935.        Plants  of  the   Astor  Expedition   (Galapagos   and   Cocos   Islands).    Ameri- 
can Journal  of  Botany,  vol.  22,  pp.   208-277. 
1946.         Vegetation   of  the   coast  of  Ecuador  and   Peru   and   its   relation  to  the   Ga- 
lapagos Islands.   American   Journal  of  Botany,   vol.33,  pp.  394-498. 
TREGURTHA,   G.   T. 

1961.         The   earth's   problem   climates.    University  of  Wisconsin   Press. 

Zimmermann,  a. 

1954.        Evolution,    die    Geschichte    ihrer  Probleme    und   Erkentnisse.      Freiberg. 


BIOSYSTEMATIC  STUDIES 
ON  GALAPAGOS  TOMATOES*  i 


Charles  M.  Rick 

University  of  California 
Davis,   California 


Introduction 

The  present  investigations  were  undertaken  in  order  to  ascertain  the 
natural  relationships  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes.  These  anomalous  members 
of  the  genus  Lycopersicon  deserve  attention  for  several  reasons:  (1)  Systema- 
tic problems.  Although  the  Galapagos  tomatoes  have  been  collected  frequently 
and  are  therefore  well  documented  in  various  herbaria  of  the  world,  numerous 
problems  have  persisted  in  their  biosystematics.  The  first  specimens  were 
collected  by  Darwin  in  1835  and  many  additional  collections  have  been  made 
by  numerous  expeditions  since  that  time.  Various  forms  of  the  Galapagos  to- 
matoes have  been  classified  into  as  many  as  four  species  and  subspecies.  Al- 
though they  have  attracted  the  attention  of  relatively  few  systematists,  much 
disagreement  can  be  found  among  these  few  treatments.  The  taxonomic  situa- 
tion was  reviewed  and  a  regrouping  of  the  material  proposed  by  Rick  (1956). 
(2)  Potential  contribution  to  the  genetics  and  breeding  of  tomatoes.  As  a  new 
source  of  germ  plasm  for  such  studies,  the  Galapagos  tomatoes  have  already 
exceeded  expectations.  For  reasons  that  will  be  briefly  outlined  below,  these 
accessions  prove  to  be  unusually  useful  in  enriching  the  genetic  variation  of 
cultivated  tomatoes.  (3)  Adaptability  to  experimental  approaches.  All  acces- 
sions so  far  obtained  have  proved  amenable  to  culture.  Although  they  do  not 
thrive  well  under  field  conditions  in  the  Central  Valley  of  California,  they 
survive  there  and  grow  luxuriantly  in  the  greenhouse  and  in  the  field  in  other 
regions  (for  example,  coastal  California).  The  plants  flower  and  fruit  when 
grown  in  small  containers,  and  controlled  matings  can  easily  be  made.  Seed 
dormancy  posed  an  obstacle  to  our  first  investigations,  but  this  problem  was 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.  S.  A.,  21  August 
to   6   September  1961,   and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,  and  the   University  of  Hawaii. 

^    Partial  support  of  this  work  by  grant  no.  G-10704  of  the  National  Science  Foundation  and  GA 
AGR  5547  of  the  Rockerfeller  Foiindation  is  gratefully  acknowledged. 

-59- 


60  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

eventually  solved  by  the  application  of  special  seed  treatments  (Rick  and  Bow- 
man, 1961).  These  tomatoes  therefore  constitute  one  of  the  few  genera  in  the 
Galapagos  biota  that  can  be  subjected  to  a  wide  range  of  biosystematic  ap- 
proaches: the  nature  of  breeding  systems,  compatibility  with  other  species, 
genetic  differentiation  between  races,  etc.  (4)  Relationships  to  the  Galapagos 
flora  in  general.  In  any  such  investigations  it  is  naturally  hoped  that  the  find- 
ings on  a  specific  group  might  shed  light  on  the  larger  problems— in  this  case, 
the  evolution  of  the  Galapagos  flora. 

The  present  study  is  based  on  herbarium  specimens  and  on  living  cul- 
tures established  from  34  accessions  collected  by  Alf  Kastdalen,  Zouzou 
Coray  de  Castro,  Miguel  Castro,  Otis  Barton,  and  Robert  I.  Bowman,  and  by 
the  writer  during  a  visit  in  1956.  The  writer  is  greatly  indebted  to  the  afore- 
mentioned people  for  tomato  accessions  and  for  assistance  in  many  other  re- 
spects. 

Description  of  Races 

The  Galapagos  tomatoes  are  all  low,  spreading  herbs  with  relatively 
diminutive  plant  parts.  Although  they  can  be  treated  in  culture  as  shortcycle 
annuals,  most  plants  encountered  in  the  wild  are  perennials,  continually  pro- 
ducing new  branches  from  the  crown  of  the  plant  in  the  same  fashion  as  most 
other  wild  species  of  Lycopersicon  do  in  their  native  habitat.  They  abound  in 
the  arid,  lowest  zone  of  the  islands,  but  have  also  been  encountered  occa- 
sionally in  the  middle,  forested  belt  of  the  larger  islands.  Phenomenally 
drought-resistant,  they  continue  to  grow  throughout  the  year,  and  are  often  the 
only  mesophytic  plants  in  leaf  during  the  long  dry  period  of  the  lowest  zone 
(figures  1  and  2).  All  examined  collections  have  twelve  pairs  of  chromosomes, 
in  common  with  other  species  of  Lycopersicon. 

Although  differentiated  into  many  different  biotypes,  all  truly  native 
forms  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes  possess  in  common  at  least  five  morphologi- 
cal and  physiological  traits  by  which  they  can  be  distinguished  from  all  other 
known  species:  (1)  Yellow  or  orange  fruit  color;  (2)  Yellow-green  foliage  co- 
lor; (3)  Minute  seed  size;  (4)  Consistent  and  severe  seed  dormancy;  (5)  Char- 
acteristic physiological  growth  requirements.  Although  poorly  understood,  the 
latter  differ  from  those  of  any  other  tomato  species  we  have  cultured. 

The  same  traits  were  recognized  in  an  earlier  survey  (Rick,  1956),  which 
was  based  on  herbarium  specimens  and  living  material  from  only  three  acces- 
sions. One  of  those  collections,  LA292,  then  identified  as  L.  esculentum  var. 
cerasiforme,  has  since  been  demonstrated  to  have  been  a  cultigen,  probably 
escaped  from  a  nearby  garden.  No  such  form  with  large  (>2cm.)  red  fruits  has 
been  demonstrated  unequivocally  to  be  native  to  the  Galapagos  Islands.  For 
more  details  concerning  the  taxonomy  and  description  of  races  the  reader  is 
referred  to  Rick  (1956). 


No.  44) 


RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


61 


\ 


..W       *' 


Figure  1.  Single  plant  of  L.  esculentum  var.  minor  growing  among  lava  rocks  near  the 
north  shore  of  Jervis  Island.  Elevation  25  feet.  Opuntia  myriacantha  in  background.  All  other 
plants  are  dead  or  dormant,  characteristic  of  vegetation  in  the  lowest  zone  during  the  dry  season. 


The  commonest  biotype  is  L.  esculentum  var.  minor   (L.  cheesmanii  vat. 
minor)  hereafter  designated  var.  minor.  This  form  is  known  from  at  least  six  of 
the  main  islands  and  from  many  different  sites  on  Albemarle  and  James  islands. 
In  addition  to  those  characteristics  that  are  constant  in  all  Galapagos  toma- 
toes, as  noted  above,  this  biotype  exhibits  short internodes,  large  accrescent 
calyx,  dense  hairiness,  and  highly  dissected  leaves.     The  consistent  appear- 
ance  of  these  four  unique  traits  and  other  less  tangible  ones   leaves  little 
room   to  doubt  the  close  genetic  relationship  of  all  accessions  of  this  type. 
These  traits  are  shown  in  figures  1  to  5  of  Rick  (1956),  and  the  general  as- 
pects in  the  wild  are  shown  in  figure  1.    Var.  minor  has  always  been  found  at 
low  elevations,  sometimes  within  100  feet  of,   and  only  several  feet  in  eleva- 
tion above,  the  surf.  The  widespread  distribution  and  proximity  to  the  strand 
of  this  form  hint  that  marine  transport  of  some  kind  might  have  been  respon- 
sible in  part  for  its  present  distribution. 

The  next  most  common  entity  is  one  that  has  most  generally  been  class- 
ified as  .a  form  of  L.  pimpinellifolium,  hereafter  designated  as  Gal.  ppn.  In 
contrast  to  the  two  preceding  biotypes,  it  has  longer  internodes,  less  divided 


62 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


leaves,  more  elongate  corolla  segments,  fewer  hairs,  and  smaller,  spreading 
calyx.  It  corresponds  to  Rick's  drawings  (1956),  figures  7  to  10,  in  all  details 
except  for  the  absence  of  pedicel  articulation  illustrated  in  the  latter.  Recent- 
ly, field  studies  have  revealed  that  the  monogenically-determined  absence  of 
joint  is  limited  to  the  Academy  Bay  region  of  Indefatigable  Island  and  that 
normal  articulation  prevails  throughout  most  of  the  range  of  this  type.  It  has 
been  found  on  four  of  the  islands,  generally  at  higher  points  in  the  lower  zone 
than  var.  minor  and  occasionally  extending  to  the  interior  of  the  islands,  as 
on  Indefatigable.  As  a  race  this  one  is  less  clearly  defined,  various  constant- 
ly breeding  deviations  have  been  seen  in  some  of  the  collections  as  well  as 
inter  gradations  with  the  following  form  in  a  few  populations.  Its  typical  habi- 
tat is  shown  in  figure  2. 

The  third  main  type  is  the  typical  form  of  Lycopersicon  cheesmanii,  the 
type  locality  for  which  is  the  north  side  of  Indefatigable.    Collections  of  liv- 
ing material  have  been  obtained  from  this  general  area  and  also  from  nearby 
Seymour  Island.     In  some  respects  typical  L.  cheesmanii  is  intermediate  be- 
tween the  two  preceding  forms.  Its  morphological  affinities  are  closer  to  those 


Figure  2.  Colony  of  Galapagos  form  of  L.  pimpinellifolium  (LA430)  growing  among  the 
lava  boulders  along  the  volcanic  escarpment  1  km.  NE  of  Academy  Bay,  Indefatigable  Island. 
Note  dormant  condition  of  the  trees  (Piscidia  erythrina)  and  absence  of  any  other  vegetation  in 
leaf,  characteristic  of  the  lowest  zone  during  the  dry  season. 


No.  44)  RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  63 

of  Gal.  ppn.,  but  it  resembles  var.  minor  in  respect  to  its  shorter  internodes. 
It  is  intermediate  in  respect  to  density  of  epidermal  hairs.  Its  foliage  is  some- 
what different  than  that  of  the  two  other  forms,  being  less  divided  than  either 
and  having  lateral  segments  orbicular  in  outline.  A  collection  showing  some 
resemblances  to  typical  L.  cheesmani  has  been  collected  from  Essex  Point 
on  the  southwestern  extremity  of  Albemarle.  The  key  morphological  features 
of  this  biotype  have  been  illustrated  by  Luckwill  (1943). 

Various  other  biotypes  of  more  limited  distribution  have  also  been  dis- 
covered. In  most  cases  these  have  been  encountered  in  only  one  population 
or  in  an  otherwise  very  narrowly  restricted  region.  For  the  most  part  they  can 
be  described  satisfactorily  as  combinations  of  characteristics  of  the  preced- 
ing three  main  biotypes. 

Population  Structure 

The  flower  parts  of  Galapagos  tomatoes,  like  those  of  the  cultivated 
L.  esculentum,  are  disposed  to  promote  self-pollination.  After  being  shed  into 
the  anther  tube,  the  pollen  drifts  downward  to  the  stigma,  which  is  situated  at 
the  mouth  of  the  tube  or  is  exserted  slightly  beyond  it.  The  flowers  are  small 
and  arrayed  much  less  conspicuously  than  those  of  the  highly  cross-pollinated 
species.  No  inherent  barriers  to  self-pollination  exist;  a  very  high  proportion 
of  the  artificially  selfed  flowers  set  fruit;  and  under  the  insect-free  condi- 
tions of  a  screened  and  fumigated  greenhouse  fruits  are  set  freely,  even  with- 
out agitation  of  the  flowers. 

Advantage  was  taken  of  every  opportunity  in  the  wild  to  observe  the  vi- 
sits of  insects  to  flowers  of  Galapagos  tomatoes.  Such  observations  were 
made  in  some  twelve  native  populations,  the  period  of  observation  varying  be- 
tween two  hours  to  several  days  per  population.  The  only  insect  visits  observed 
were  those  to  a  large  colony  of  Gal.  ppn.  (LA430)  in  the  vicinity  of  Academy 
Bay  in  the  talus  of  a  volcanic  escarpment  along  the  trail  to  the  highlands  (fig- 
ure 2).  Here  the  only  known  native  Gala'pagos  bee,  Xylocopa  darwinii  Cocker- 
ell  (Hurd,  1958),  was  observed  to  make  sporadic  visits  to  the  tomato  flowers. 
In  contrast,  the  amount  of  bee  activity  in  nearby  flowering  trees  of  Piscidia 
was  intense.  The  bees  were  unquestionably  visiting  the  tomato  flowers  for 
the  purpose  of  collecting  pollen  because  they  displayed  the  usual  vector  ac- 
tivity in  such  acts  as  grasping  the  anther  tube  with  their  legs  and  vibrating  it 
rapidly  with  a  high-pitched  buzz.  In  a  period  of  2  1/2  hours  spent  in  this  pop- 
ulation, only  four  bees  were  seen  visiting  tomato  flowers— an  activity  of  re- 
markably lower  level  than  that  observed  in  any  tomato  species  on  the  adjoin- 
ing mainland  (Rick,  1950)  and  far  less  than  that  seen  in  neighboring  species 
of  Piscidia,  Momordica,  and  Cryptocarpus. 

It  was  not  surprising  therefore  to  find  the  genetic  structure  of  most  pop- 
ulations to  be  exceedingly  uniform.  With  one  exception  the  plants  generally 
showed  remarkable  agreement  for  such  genetically  stable  characters  as  flower 


64  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

shape,  inflorescence  structure,  fruit  color,  and  anthocyanin  pigmentation.  In 
the  population  LA430,  75  plants  were  systematically  scored  for  ten  morpho- 
logical characters  and  only  two  were  found  to  deviate  in  gross  morphology 
from  a  single  prevailing  phenotype.  One  plant  had  a  normally  developed  pedi- 
cel articulation,  in  contrast  to  the  aforementioned  jointless  (/2)  condition,  and 
another  had  small  seedless  fruits,  presumably  resulting  from  some  type  of  gen- 
etic sterility.  Opportunity  for  similar  studies  was  found  in  two  other  popula- 
tions of  the  same  biotype  within  the  same  general  area.  Extreme  uniformity 
was  again  observed  in  19  plants  constituting  the  total  of  one  of  these  popula- 
tions (LA439)  found  on  the  cliffs  bounding  the  west  side  of  Academy  Bay.  In 
the  third  population  (LA432),  encountered  1  km.  east  of  LA430,  163  plants 
were  examined  and  16  were  found  to  deviate  in  one  of  several  well  defined 
traits  chiefly  of  the  fruits  (figure  3).  With  the  following  exception,  all  the 
other  wild  populations  studied  showed  the  same  degree  of  uniformity. 

The  exceptional  population  (LA438)  was  one  encountered  along  the 
coast  of  Albemarle  approximately  5  km.  southwest  of  Villamil.  This  area  was 

also  exceptional  for  the  sympatric  existence  of  both  var.  minor  and  Gal.  ppn. 
Here,  one  isolated  colony  of  about  20  plants  was  found  to  show  great  varia- 
tion between  plants  in  what  seemed  to  be  various  combinations  of  the  traits 
of  these  two  biotypes.  Of  13  plants  that  were  examined  in  detail,  five  were 
typical  var.  minor,  the  rest  being  "hybrid"  in  respect  to  the  presence  of  some 
Gal.  ppn.  traits.  Among  the  latter,  five  different  types  could  be  distinguished, 
several  plants  each  being  found  for  some  of  the  types.  Plants  of  Gal.  ppn. 
were  found  several  hundred  feet  away  in  lower  places. 

The  distributional  map  of  races  (figure  5)  suggests  that  a  situation  sim- 
ilar to  that  for  LA438  might  exist  on  the  slopes  of  the  crater  of  Narborough. 
Max.  minor  and  Gal.  ppn.  coexist  there  and  an  intermediate  phenotype,  closely 
approximating  typical  L.  cheesmanii  has  also  been  found.  Since  population 
studies  have  not  been  made  there,  the  existence  of  variable  populations  is  un- 
certain. 

The  same  remarkable  degree  of  uniformity  is  characteristic  of  progenies 
grown  in  culture  from  single  wild  plants.  In  no  case,  even  among  offspring 
from  the  variable  population  on  Albemarle,  was  any  genetic  variation  detect- 
able. These  populations,  mostly  of  no'more  than  20  plants  apiece,  have  been 
grown  from  over  50  parent  plants  from  many  populations.  The  degree  of  uni- 
formity typical  of  this  material  is  illustrated  by  seedling  cultures  in  figure  4. 
In  contrast,  the  level  of  variability  encountered  in  single-plant  progenies  of 
other  wild  tomato  species  is  very  much  greater.  From  20  years'  experience  in 
progeny  testing  tomato  lines,  I  can  state  with  confidence  that  the  uniformity 
of  Galapagos  tomatoes  is  matched  only  by  highly  inbred  lines  of  the  cultivated 
L.  esculentum. 

Another  interesting  aspect  of  population  structure  of  the  Galapagos  to- 
matoes is  the   fixation  of  various  recessive  genes.    One  of  the  first  examples 


No.  44) 


RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


65 


Figure  3.  Fruit  samples  from  population  LA432  of  Galapagos  form  of  L.  pimpinellifolium 
east  of  Academy  Bay,  Indefatigable  Island.  One  cluster  was  taken  from  each  of  six  different 
plants,  some  showing  marked  morphological  deviations  from  the  normal  type.  Typical  form  with 
jointless  f/^j  pedicels  in  upper  right.  Deviant  with  normal  pedicel  joints  in  middle  left.  Deviant 
with  small  fruits  at  lower  left.  Deviant  with  strong  anthocyanin  pigmentation  (atv)  in  lower  right. 
(1/2  Reduction) 


66  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

is  the  aforementioned  jointless  trait,  governed  by  a  single  recessive  gene,  /2. 
Since  the  time  of  the  earlier  work  (Rick,  1956),  field  studies  have  shown  that 
this  gene  is  completely  fixed  in  several  populations  in  the  vicinity  of  Aca- 
demy Bay.  The  yellowish  foliage  color  of  many  populations  of  L.  pimpinelli- 
folium  is  at  least  partly  due  to  the  presence  of  the  lutescent  gene  /I.  A  com- 
plete lack  of  anthocyanin,  characteristic  of  an  entire  population  of  Gal.  ppn. 
near  Wreck  Bay,  Chatham,  was  ascertained  to  be  determined  by  ag.  Although 
opportunity  has  not  been  found  to  investigate  all  of  the  encountered  variations, 
at  least  one  mutant  trait  encountered  segregating  within  a  population  has  been 
found  to  be  determined  by  a  previously  unknown  gene:  high  anthocyanin  con- 
tent of  fruits  and  foliage  (figure  3)  from  the  LA434  population  segregates  in 
this  fashion.  In  backcrosses  of  L.  esculentum,  the  purple  flush  of  the  fruit  has 
not  been  recovered,  but  the  recessive  homozygotes  can  be  clearly  identified 
by  the  intense  anthocyanin  coloring  of  leaves  under  cool  growing  conditions. 
This  new  gene  is  provisionally  named  atroviolaceum  (atv). 

The  very  high  level  of  inbreeding  that  must  exist  in  these  populations 
provides  ideal  conditions  for  the  fixation  of  such  genes  and  the  rapid  differ- 
entiation of  races.  It  is  very  likely  that  the  observed  monogenic  variations 
arose  from  mutations  in  the  Galapagos  material  and  it  is  tempting  to  suppose 
that  at  least  some  of  them  have  been  fixed  purely  at  random  without  reflecting 
selective  advantage. 

Distribution 

All  of  the  foregoing  evidence  reveals  an  extremely  high  level  of  uni- 
formity within  populations  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes.  With  minimal  excep- 
tions among  the  whole  group,  it  is  therefore  valid  to  equate  a  single  popula- 
tion with  a  single  genotype,  thereby  simplifying  the  visualization  of  geographic 
distribution.  Figure  5  illustrates  graphically  the  distribution  for  variation  in 
four  key  morphological  characters.  The  presence  and  intensity  of  expression 
of  these  characters  is  symbolized  by  Anderson's  (1949)  familiar  ideograms. 
According  to  the  scheme  adopted.  Gal.  ppn.  and  var.  minor  are  the  contrasted 
extremes,  the  latter  being  represented  in  figure  5  by  a  solid  circle  with  three 
long  appendages  and  the  former  by  an  empty  circle  without  appendages.  Only 
those  populations  are  included  that  have  been  grown  in  culture  or  for  which 
adequate  herbarium  specimens  exist. 

It  is  evident  from  this  summary  of  geographic  distribution  that  var.  minor 
is  widespread  throughout  the  archipelago,  lacking  in  only  four  of  the  larger 
islands,  possibly  for  reasons  of  inadequate  collections.  Gal.  ppn.  appears  on 
at  least  four  of  the  main  islands  and  is  as  widely  distributed  as  the  preceding 

Figure   4.     Typical  pattern  of  variation  in   seedling  progenies.   Each  family,   appearing  to 
the  right  and  above  its  respective  number,  is  the  progeny  of  a  single  plant  collected  in  the  wild. 
Family  471  and  474  are  typical  L.  cheesmanii.  Family  472  and   473  are  L.  esculentum  var.  minor. 
(1/4  Reduction) 


No.  44) 


RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


67 


[470 


[4.0 


[4743 


SPa^w 


C473:     ;;; 


68 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


form  in  respect  to  longitude.  Typical  L.  cheesmanii,  represented  in  figure  5 
by  a  half-solid  circle  and  single  vertical  appendage,  is  distributed  to  three 
and  j>erhaps  four  larger  islands. 

Such  widespread  distribution  of  single  biotypes  contrasts  strikingly  with 
the  narrow  endemism  of  many  other  components  of  the  Galapagos  biota.  To  il- 
lustrate this  contrast,  figure  6  has  been  prepared  to  show  the  distribution  of 
Scalesia  species  according  to  Howell's  (1941)  monograph.  In  this  familiar  ex- 
ample of  Galapagos  endemism,  all  but  five  of  the  nineteen  well  distinguished 
species  are  restricted  to  single  islands.  It  is  safe  to  speculate  that  at  least 
part  of  this  difference  in  distribution  reflects  differences  in  dispersal  ability  of 
the  two  genera.  As  already  stated,  the  very  close  approach  of  var.  minor  to  the 
strand  of  several  islands  suggests  that  this  form  might  occasionally  be  distrib- 
uted by  the  sea.  Experiments  with  seed  germination,  presented  in  the  next  sec- 
tion, offer  additional  suggestions  as  to  mechanisms  of  interisland  dispersal. 

Another  hint  of  successful  dispersive  ability  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes 
is  given  by  evidence  of  their  recent  invasion  of  new  habitats.     Some  popula- 


Hoirs 

3rd  order  leof 

divisions 
Intemode  length 

Colyx  lorge  ft 
Decrescent 


L  pimpinel- 
li folium 

noneO 
noneo 


long 
no 


L  esculentum 
vor  minor 

mony^ 
much  n 

short  o 
yes    '~^ 


^7 


m^ 


.^ 


Figure  5.  Geographic  distribution  of  races  of  Galapagos  tomatoes.  All  islands  are  shown 
except  the  northernmost  two,  Culpepper  and  Wenman,  from  which  tomatoes  have  not  been  re- 
ported. The  population  phenotypes  are  indicated  by  ideograms  according  to  Anderson  (1949). 
Galapagos  L.  pimpinellifolium  is  represented  by  an  open  circle;  L.  esculentum  var.  minor,  by  a 
solid  circle  with  three  long  appendages;  and  typical  L.  cheesmanii,  by  a  half-solid  circle  with 
a  single  vertical  appendage. 


No.  44) 


RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


69 


Figure  6.  Geographic  distribution  of  species  of  Scalesia  (after  Howell,  1941).  All  islands 
are  shown  except  the  northernmost  two,  Culpepper  and  Wenman.  Species  are  designated  by  the 
following  symbols:  af  -  S.  affinis,  as  -  aspera,  at  -  atractyloides.  B  -  Baurii,  co  -  cordata,  Cr  - 
Crockeri,  Da  -  Darwinii,  di  -  divisa,  g  -  gummifera.  He  -  Helleri,  Ho  -  Hopkinsii,  in  -  incisa, 
m  -  micTocephala,  p  -  pedunculata,  V\--  var.  typica,  P2  -  var.  Svensoni,  P3  -  var.  parviflora,  P4 - 
vaT.indurata,  P5  -  var.  ^/7osa,  t- retroflexa,  Sn-  Snodgrassii,  St.  -  Stewartii,  v-villosa,  S.  Snodgras- 
sii  has  been  collected  from  Wenman  Island  and  an  unidentified  species  from   Culpepper  Island. 


tions— for  example  var.  minor  on  Bartholomew  Island— have  been  found  growing 
in  crevices  of  lava  flows  in  which  the  pristine  condition  of  ripple  marks  at- 
tests very  recent  volcanic  activity.  Also,  native  tomatoes  have  been  collected 
from  areas  where  volcanic  activity  has  been  observed  in  historic  times.  Such 
populations  have  been  collected  from  at  least  six  different  places,  including 
the  interior  of  the  large  central  crater  of  Narborough  Island,  which  suffered  a 
violent  eruption  in  1825.  The  Galapagos  tomatoes  are  clearly  well  adapted  to 
migrate  and  colonize  new  areas.  They  are  nevertheless  endemic  in  the  sense 
that  the  whole  group  is  restricted  to  the  Galapagos  Islands. 

Seed  Dormancy 

The  problem  of  seed  dormancy  will  not  be  presented  in  detail  here,  since 
this  subject  and  the  development  of  effective  means  of  overcoming  thedorman- 


70  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

cy  are  treated  by  Rick  and  Bowman  (1961).  In  summary  it  was  found  that  all 
seeds  of  any  races  of  Galapagos  tomatoes  thus  far  acquired  show  a  severe 
dormancy,  which  is  not  corrected  by  prolonged  storage.  Of  the  many  different 
treatments  applied,  the  only  ones  effective  in  improving  germination  were  meth- 
ods that  partially  or  wholly  removed  the  seed  coats.  The  behavior  of  the  seeds 
in  those  tests  suggests  that  the  inhibition  is  simply  mechanical:  once  the 
seed  coat  is  partly  or  entirely  removed,  the  radical  emerges  rapidly.  The  simp- 
lest and  most  effective  treatment  was  found  to  be  the  exposure  of  seeds  to 
strong  solutions  of  sodium  hypochlorite.  In  a  search  for  mechanisms  that  might 
permit  natural  establishment  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes,  it  was  found  that 
passage  of  the  seeds  through  the  digestive  tract  of  the  giant  Galapagos  tor- 
toise, Testudo  elephantopus  porteri  resulted  in  improvement  of  germination  of 
war.  minor  from  1  to  85  per  cent  and  of  Gal.  ppn.  from  1  to  11  percent.  Two  to 
four  weeks  were  required  for  passage  through  the  tortoise  gut.  If  this  is  a  na- 
tural mechanism  for  establishment,  it  would  be  effective  not  only  in  permitting 
germination  but  also  in  expediting  dispersal  by  virtue  of  the  long  digestive 
period.  Dependence  upon  animal  digestion  poses  some  interesting  evolutionary 
problems.  The  selection  and  establishment  of  such  a  dependency  would  seem- 
ingly call  for  much  trial  and  error  and  would  likely  require  a  long  period  for 
establishment. 

If  animals  play  a  major  role  in  breaking  the  tomato  seed  dormancy,  the 
question  might  be  asked:    to  what  extent  are  they  responsible  for  the  present 
distribution  of  Galapagos  tomatoes?   The  role  of  the  tortoises  is  problematic: 
if  they  were  responsible  to  any  large  degree  for  dispersal  of  the  native  toma- 
toes, the  endemic  distribution  of  the  tortoises  themselves  would  be  contradic- 
tory. Beebe  (1922)  has  ascertained  that  the  tortoises  can  survive  and  swim  in 
sea  water.  On  the  other  hand,  safe  landings  on  the  hazardous  Galapagos  shores 
are  another  matter.    Yet,  death  or  severe  injury  to  a  tortoise  at  landing  would 
not  necessarily  preclude  establishment  of  the  tomatoes.     This  problem  is  ob- 
viously complex  and  has  many  facets;   nevertheless,  the  possibility  of  inter- 
island  dispersal  by  tortoises  as  a  rare  event  cannot  be  precluded  at  the  pres- 
ent state  of  knowledge.    Other  possible  agents  are  marine  or  such  terrestrial 
bird  species  that  can  migrate  from  one  island  to  another.  The  only  likely  avian 
agents,  however,  would  be  those  with  a  mild  digestive  action— for  example,  the 
Galapagos  mocker— for  tomato  seeds  do  not  tolerate  much  grinding  by  gizzards. 
The  two  native  species  of  iguana  might  also  be  implicated. 

A  treatment  of  the  tomato  distribution  would  not  be  complete  without 
consideration  of  the  effects  of  possible  early  changes  in  the  configuration  of 
the  archipelago.  The  ocean  floor  is  so  shallow  in  the  Galapagos  area  that  only 
slight  lowerings  of  the  water  level  or  elevations  of  the  land  masses  would  re- 
sult in  land  connections  between  various  islands.  Under  such  conditions  wide- 
spread dispersal  of  the  tomato  races  would  not  have  presented  serious  diffi- 
culties. 


No.  44) 


RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


71 


Compatibility  Tests 

Various  accessions  of  Galapagos  tomatoes  have  been  subjected  to  rou- 
tine tests  of  cross-compatibility  among  themselves  and  between  them  and  other 
species  of  tomatoes.  These  tests  have  been  conducted  in  the  spring  and  fall 
seasons  under  standard  greenhouse  conditions  at  Davis,  California.  Five  to 
ten  plants  of  each  accession  were  used  for  the  matings  and  six  or  more  flowers 
were  pollinated  in  each  combination  tested.  The  results  of  these  hybridiza- 
tion experiments  are  presented  in  graphic  form  in  figure  7.  The  tests  consis- 
tently revealed  absence  of  severe  barriers  to  crossing  between  the  two  most 
widespread  races  from  the  Galapagos,  var.  minor  and  Gal.  ppn.  and  L.  esculen- 
tum,   L.  pimpinelli folium  (typical  form  from  the  mainland),  L.  hirsutum,  L.  min- 


^  0  S     t^^CEss 


'0^ 


L. 

esculentum 


L. 

pimpine 
lifolium 

L 
minutum 


L. 
chilense 


Figure  7.  Compatibility  polygon  indicating  the  degree  of  compatibility  between  Galapagos 
forms  and  other  tomatoes.  The  width  of  connecting  lines  indicates  the  relative  amount  of  hy- 
brid seed  produced  by  the  hybridizations,  the  widest  lines  being  equivalent  to  complete  com- 
patibility as  measured  by  the  yield  of  selfs  or  sibs  within  the  race.  A  dotted  line  indicates 
failure  of  hybridization.  Circled  numbers  refer  to  specific  accessions.  All  accessions  that  are 
intercompatible  and  behave  similarly  in  all  test  crosses  to  Galapagos  races  are  enclosed  in 
larger  circles. 


72  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

utum,   and  Solanumpennellii  [which  in  these  and  other  tests  (Rick,  1960)  shows 
a  much  closer  genetic  relationship  with  Lycopersicon  than  Solanurn\.  Seeds 
produced  by  these  crosses  yielded  F^  hybrids  that  were  vigorous  in  all  com- 
binations and  fertile  in  all  save  combinations  with  S.  pennellii.     On  the  other 
hand,  very  severe  barriers  prevent  crossing  with  L.  chilense  and   L.  peruvian- 
um,  none  of  the  hundreds  of  attempted  crosses  yielding  hybrid  progeny. 

In  addition  to  the  aforementioned  tests,  thirteen  other  Galapagos  acces- 
sions (seven  of  Gb\.  ppn.,  three  oivar.  minor,  two  ofL.  cheesmanii,  and  one  of 
the  intermediate  type  from  Albemarle)  were  hybridized  with  L.  esculentum. 
These  crosses  likewise  produced  normal  yields  of  seeds,  and  the  hybrids  and 
backcross  generations  to  L.  esculentum  grown  therefrom  displayed  normal  vig- 
or and  complete  fertility.  Although  these  additional  collections  were  not  sys- 
tematically tested  against  each  other  and  the  other  tomato  species,  it  is  a 
foregone  conclusion  that  they  would  manifest  the  same  compatibility  relations 
as  the  two  accessions  (LA166  and  317)  that  were  tested  more  extensively.  The 
Galapagos  tomatoes  therefore  comprise  an  interfertile  group  of  races  that  hy- 
bridize freely  with  L.  esculentum  and  other  species  of  the  L.  esculentum  com- 
plex. 

The  complete  compatibility  between  Galapagos  tomatoes  and  members 
of  the  L.  esculentum  complex  was  entirely  unexpected  because  the  latest  tax- 
onomic  treatments    (MuUer,   1949;   Luckwill,   1943)   placed  the  former  in  the 
same  subsection  as  L.  peruvianum  and  L.  chilense.      From  the  standpoint  of 
tomato  genetics  and  breeding  this  finding  was  a  pleasant  surprise,  for  it  meant 
that  the  whole  gamut  of  variation  in  Galapagos  tomatoes  is  available  for  trans- 
fer to  L.  esculentum  by  applying  the  appropriate  breeding  techniques.  Although 
it  is  not  the  main  objective  of  this  paper  to  consider  applications  in  the  area 
of  genetics  and  breeding,  some  of  the  findings  are  illuminating  from  the  stand- 
point of  systematics  and  phylogeny.    To  date  a  number  of  interesting  charac- 
ters have  been  transferred  by  backcrossing  from  Galapagos  races  to  the  gar- 
den tomato.     Backcrosses  from  all  of  15  different  accessions,  including  the 
main  races,  have  recovered  the  gene  B,  which  diverts  synthesis  of  the  fruit 
carotenoids  entirely  to  beta-carotene.  The  presence  of  this  gene  accounts  for 
the  yellow  and  orange  fruit  color  in  all  accessions  of  Galapagos  tomatoes. 
Other  monogenic  traits  that  have  been  encountered  are  the  aforementioned  /2, 
ag,   l-^,  and  atv.     Of  this  group  of  genes,  ag  and  l-^  behave  normally  in  back- 
crosses  to  L.  esculentum,    But  /2   induces  unexpected  pleiotropic  effects  on 
floral  parts,  and  the  effects  of  atv  seem  to  become  diluted  in  the  sense  that 
the  intense  anthocyanin  pigmentation  develops  on  the  herbage  but  not  on  fruits 
of  backcross  derivatives.   Still  other  characters  have  been  encountered  in  the 
derivatives,  which  were  unknown  in  the  wild  parent.    Examples  of  such  "sur- 
prise" characters  are  elongate  fruits,  a  thick,  leathery  calyx,  and  a  pedicel 
joint  that  has  normal  morphology  yet  fails  to  abscise.  The  mode  of  inheritance 
of  these  characters  has  not  yet  been  ascertained,    but  the  limited  available 


No.  44)  RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  73 

data  suggest  simple  genetic  determination  probably  by  recessive  genes.  Un- 
doubtedly such  latent  characters  owe  their  appearance  to  a  complementary  in- 
teraction between  genes  from  the  wild  parent  and  the  genotype  of  the  culti- 
vated tomato.  Since  extensive  breeding  tests  are  required  to  reveal  these  la- 
tent characters,  only  a  slight  beginning  has  been  made  in  the  survey  of  this 
source  of  new  germ  plasm. 

Natural  Relationships 

According  to  all  available  evidence  the  races  of  Galapagos  tomatoes 
are  closely  related  among  themselves.  All  genuinely  native  accessions  pos- 
sess in  common  at  least  five  unique  traits,  which  are,  except  for  B,  unknown 
in  any  other  wild  tomatoes.  No  barrier,  whether  relating  to  incompatibility, 
vigor  or  fertility  of  F-j^or  later  generations,  has  been  found  to  their  interbreed- 
ing. The  same  freedom  of  hybridization  has  been  revealed  between  them  and 
L.  esculentum  and  closely  related  species.  If  all  the  facts  are  taken  into  ac- 
count, separation  of  the  group  into  different  species  can  scarcely  be  justified. 
The  taxonomic  status  of  the  whole  group,  on  the  other  hand,  is  problematic. 
By  morphological  criteria  alone,  it  should  be  recognized  as  a  species.  Yet  the 
genetic  evidence  points  to  such  a  close  relationship  with  L.  esculentum  that 
a  rank  above  subspecies  would  not  be  justified:  geographic  isolation  may  be 
the  only  factor  presenting  merging  and  intergradation  with  forms  of  the  latter 
species.  Clearly  then,  although  changes  in  the  nomenclature  are  needed,  any 
decision  must  be  to  some  extent  arbitrary.  Since  the  taxonomy  of  the  group  is 
not  the  primary  objective  and  complete  taxonomic  documentation  not  appro- 
priate here,  no  systematic  revision  is  currently  proposed. 

The  above  conclusions  differ  from  those  reached  in  an  earlier  study 
(Rick,  1956)  based  on  herbarium  material  and  experiments  with  living  material 
of  three  accessions.  The  three  were  treated  as  L.  esculentum  vai.  minor  (LA- 
317),  L.  pimpinellijolium  (LA166),  and  L.  esculentum  var.  cerasifoTme  (LA- 
292).  That  study  suffered  the  shortcomings  of  inadequate  living  collections 
and  lack  of  first-hand  experience  in  the  native  habitat.  In  the  meanwhile  the 
opportunity  to  study  living  plants  in  many  populations  in  the  Galapagos  and 
in  experimental  cultures  has  shown  unequivocally  that  LA292,  though  correct- 
ly classified  in  1956,  is  not  native  but  likely  excaped  from  nearby  gardens  in 
the  same  fashion  as  many  other  cultigens  in  the  Galapagos.  When  this  item  is 
removed  from  the  scene,  homogeneity  is  evident  between  the  two  remaining 
collections  and  all  other  known  truly  native  tomatoes. 

Origin  of  the  Galapagos  Tomatoes 

The  conclusions  reached  in  the  earlier  survey  (Rick,  1956)  concerning 
the  origin  of  Galapagos  tomatoes  are  largely  fortified  by  the  new  evidence. 
In  respect  to  the  elimination  of  LA292  from  consideration  as  a  native  form. 


74  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

the  picture  is,  in  fact,  simplified.  These  conclusions  can  be  briefly  summar- 
ized as  follows.  The  closest  approach  to  the  Galapagos  tomatoes  in  terms  of 
morphology  and  genetic  compatibility  is  found  informs  of  L.  pimpinellifolium 
from  coastal  Ecuador  and  Peru,  although  the  former  are  well  distinguished  by 
their  aforementioned  exotic  traits.  Of  these  unusual  features,  orange  fruit  col- 
or (B),  the  accrescent  calyx,  and  extreme  hairiness  of  vegetative  parts  found 
in  var.  minor  also  appear  in  L.  hirsutum,  also  native  to  the  Ecuadorean  coast. 
Whatever  differentiation  occurred  in  the  origin  of  the  Galapagos  elements,  it 
was  expedited  by  their  high  level  of  self-pollination. 

The  problem  of  origin  has  two  aspects:  determination  of  the  ancestral 
forms  from  the  mainland  and  differentiation  of  races  on  the  Galapagos.  In  com- 
mon with  most  endemic  groups  of  the  archipelago,  the  two  events  might  not 
have  been  independent;  differentiation  of  races  might  have  begun  before  mi- 
gration; although  this  process  appears  less  likely  than  the  migration  of  a  sin- 
gle stem  line.  •; 

Any  attempt  to  specify  ancestral  forms  is  fraught  with  the  usual  prob- 
lems of  gaps  in  the  record:  absence  of  a  reliable  fossil  record,  uncertainties 
about  the  geological  history,  and  others.  If  the  new  data  contribute  in  any  way, 
they  reinforce  the  implication  of  L.  pimpinellifolium  and  L.  hirsutum  or  some 
extinct  closely  related  forms.  The  former  provides  the  closest  approximation 
in  total  morphology  to  the  Galapagos  tomatoes;  the  latter  could  have  furnished 
some  of  the  exotic  traits.  The  B  gene  previously  found  to  be  exclusive  in  L. 
hirsutum,  LA166  and  LA317  has  been  detected  in  every  living  collection  from 
the  Galapagos,  and  it  seems  safe  to  extrapolate  that  it  exists  in  all  Galapagos 
tomatoes.  All  accessions  of  var.  minor,  including  living  and  herbarium  mater- 
ial, possess  in  common  the  aforementioned  accrescent  calyx  and  excessive 
hairiness.  In  addition,  one  of  the  latent  traits  revealed  in  the  new  studies— a 
thick  leathery  calyx -points  again  to  L.  hirsutum.  This  new  character  is  iden- 
tical in  appearance  with  fleshy  calyx  (fl),  a  monogenic  trait  bred  into  L.  escu- 
lentum  from  L.  hirsutum  (Butler,  1952),  although  a  genetic  test  of  identity  has 
not  yet  been  made.  Taken  together,  the  data  suggest  a  relationship  between 
the  Galapagos  tomatoes  and  L.  hirsutum.  Little  more  is  revealed,  however, 
and  it  is  highly  uncertain  how  they  came  to  share  these  genes.  Since  L.  hirsu- 
tum and  L.  pimpinellifolium  differ  extensively  in  a  great  welter  of  other  morph- 
ological and  physiological  characters,  it  is  tempting  to  suppose  that  hybridi- 
zations between  the  progenitors  of  the  two  led  to  introgression  of  a  few  genes 
from  the  former  into  the  latter  to  form  the  stem  line  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes. 

It  was  pointed  out  in  the  early  survey  that  self-pollination  could  have 
played  a  key  role  in  the  differentiation  of  the  group.  The  recently  acquired 
evidence  from  progeny  tests,  population  variability,  and  activity  of  insect 
vectors  reinforces  the  conclusion  that  the  Galapagos  tomatoes  are  very  highly 
self-pollinated.     Such  a  reproductive  system  guarantees  a  maximum  opportun- 


No.  44)  RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  75 

ity  for  rapid  differentiation  of  biotypes  and  for  fixation  of  genes.  It  could  also 
account  for  the  anomalous  frequency  of  fixed  monogenic  abnormalities  appear- 
ing in  some  or  all  individuals  of  certain  populations.  Nothing  remotely  com- 
parable to  the  fixation  in  whole  populations  of  such  genes  as  /  l-i ,  or  ag  is 
known  in  any  other  wild  tomatoes.  Although  guessing  at  the  adaptive  value 
of  such  characters  is  always  hazardous,  it  is  tempting  to  suppose  that  the  sur- 
vival in  similar  environments  of  genes  that  on  the  one  hand  control  loss  (ag) 
and,  on  the  other,  intensification  (atv)  of  anthocyanin  is  a  random  process. 
Also  it  is  difficult  superficially  to  perceive  a  selective  advantage  for  partial 
loss  of  chlorophyll  f/]^)  or  complete  loss  of  pedicel  articulation  C/o). 

Genetic  variation  within  populations  was  found  at  only  very  low  levels 
in  the  intensively  studied  examples.  Otherwise  the  only  evidence  of  appre- 
ciable genetic  variability  was  found  inLA438  on  the  coast  of  Albemarle.  Even 
in  this  instance,  however,  the  variants  were  not  products  of  immediate  genetic 
segregation,  for  progenies  of  the  tested  plants  bred  true.  The  responsible  gen- 
etic segregation,  if  any,  must  have  occurred  earlier,  possibly  many  genera- 
tions earlier.  The  unique  variation  in  this  population  is  accompanied  by  an- 
other unique  feature:  the  sympatric  occurrence  of  var.  minor  and  Gal.  ppn.  in 
the  vicinity  of  LA438.  This  remarkable  coincidence  strongly  suggests  that 
the  observed  variation  stemmed  from  introgression  between  the  latter  two  races. 

The  mode  of  derivation  of  the  various  races  of  Galapagos  tomatoes  re- 
mains highly  conjectural.  The  high  rate  of  self-fertilization  and  the  widespread 
and  occasional  sympatric  distribution  of  the  three  dominant  races  suggest 
that  these  races  originated  by  natural  selection  from  an  ancient,  variable  stem 
line.  Segregants  from  the  introgression  of  L.  pimpinellifolium  and  L.  hirsutum 
and/or  natural  mutation  might  have  provided  the  variable  milieu  from  which 
these  successful  races  emerged.  From  their  original  sites  they  could  have 
spread  together  or  separately  throughout  the  archipelago.  The  aspects  of  dis- 
persal and  colonization  of  these  races  are  discussed  in  the  sections  on  dis- 
tribution and  seed  dormancy.  The  other,  rarer  races  might  have  originated  in 
the  same  fashion  or  by  introgression  from  sporadic  hybridization  as  suggested 
by  LA438. 

If  the  proposed  origin  of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes  in  L.  pimpinellifolium 
and  L.  hirsutum  is  correct,  attention  would  be  directed  to  the  immediate  main- 
land of  Ecuador  and  north  coast  of  Peru.  Although  forms  of  L.  hirsutum  occur 
elsewhere,  the  ones  most  compatible  with  the  L.escw/erz^ww  complex  are  found 
in  the  above  region.  In  this  respect  the  tomatoes  provide  another  example  of 
the  many  ecological  and  botanical  ties  between  these  continental  areas  and 
the  Galapagos  outlined  by  Svenson  (1946).  Transport  to  the  islands  from  the 
adjacent  coast  is  favored  by  several  oceanographic  features.  In  the  first  place, 
the  prevailing  Humboldt  Current  sweeps  northwestward  alongthe  coast  of  Peru, 
and  Ecuador  whence  it  veers  westward  toward  the  Galapagos.  In  the  second 
place,  the  ocean  floor  rises  to  form  the  Carnegie  Ridge,  which  extends  from 


76  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

the  Galapagos  toward  continental  Ecuador,  being  separated  from  the  latter  by 
a  narrow  but  deep  trench  (Shumway,  1954).  If  this  ridge  emerged  above  sea 
level  at  an  appropriate  time  it  might  have  aided  the  migrations  of  tomatoes 
and  other  forms  of  life  to  the  Galapagos. 

Summary 

The  Galapagos  tomatoes  comprise  a  group  of  closely  related  races  pos- 
sessing in  common  five  exotic  morphological  and  physiological  traits,  in  which 
they  differ  from  most  other  species  of  the  genus  Lycopersicon.  The  three  com- 
monest races  are  relatively  well  distributed  throughout  the  archipelago  and 
account  for  nearly  all  individuals  of  known  populations. 

All  observations  on  floral  structure,  pollination  mechanisms  in  nature 
and  in  culture,  population  structure,  and  progeny  tests  point  to  a  very  high 
level  of  self-pollination.  Appreciable  genetic  variability  between  individuals 
was  discovered  in  one  wild  population,  although  the  individuals  bred  true  for 
their  deviating  phenotypes  in  progeny  tests.  Otherwise  the  extent  of  genetic 
variation  between  plants  in  a  single  population  is  so  low  that  most  individuals 
conform  to  a  single  phenotype.  Various  recessive  genes  of  well  distinguished 
phenotype  are  fixed  throughout  certain  populations  and  appear  in  a  small  pro- 
portion of  individuals  of  others.  Considerable  genetic  differentiation  is  evi- 
dent between  populations  but  is  not  much  greater  between  islands  than  between 
populations  on  the  same  island.  The  inbreeding  consequent  to  automatic  self- 
pollination  readily  accounts  for  such  population  characteristics. 

Seeds  of  Galapagos  tomatoes  are  minute  and  seldom  germinate  without 
treatments  that  remove  or  soften  the  seed  coats.  Passage  through  the  digest- 
ive tract  of  the  Galapagos  tortoise  improves  germination,  revealing  a  likely 
mechanism  of  natural  dispersal  and  establishment. 

All  tested  Galapagos  accessions  are  completely  inter-compatible  and 
cross-compatible  with  L.  esculentum,  L.  pimpinellifolium,  and  other  closely 
related  entities.  All  such  combinations  tested  yield  viable,  completely  fer- 
tile F^ ,  Fo,  and  BC  hybrids.  Like  other  members  of  the  L.  esculentum  com- 
plex, they  are  separated  from  L.  peruvianum  and  L.  chilense  by  severe  com- 
patibility barriers.  In  common  with  all  other  known  species,  the  Galapagos 
tomatoes  have  twelve  pairs  of  chromosomes. 

According  to  the  available  evidence,  all  genuinely  native  Galapagos  to- 
matoes should  be  treated  as  sub-specific  forms  of  a  single  species  of  the  L. 
esculentum  complex.  While  they  are  approached  most  closely  in  morphology 
by  L.  pimpinellifolium,  certain  other  traits  are  to  be  found  in  L.  hirsutum,  both 
of  these  species  being  native  to  the  adjacent  mainland.  On  the  basis  of  these 
and  other  facts,  suggestions  are  presented  to  account  for  the  origin  and  differ- 
entiation of  the  Galapagos  tomatoes.  Rapid  evolution  of  diverse  races  was 
undoubtedly  promoted  by  the  strictly  autogamous  breeding  system.  Dependence 


No.  44)  RICK:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  77 

upon  animal  digestion  for  establishment  might  account  for  the  widespread  dis- 
persal of  certain  races. 


Literature  Cited 


Anderson,  E. 

1949.  Introgressive  hybridization.     Wiley,    New  York.  109  pp. 

BEEBE,   W. 

1924.       Gala'pagos:    world's  end.   G.P.Putnam's  Sons,  London.   443  pp. 

Butler,  L. 

1952.        The  linkage  map  of  the   tomato.   Journal   of  Heredity,    vol.  43,  pp.  25-35. 

Howell,  J.  T. 

1941.        The   genua  Scalesia.    Proceedings  of  the   California  Ac  ademy  of  Sc  iences, 
4th  ser.,  vol.22,  pp.   221-271. 
HURD,  P.  D.,  Jr. 

1958.        The    carpenter  bees  of  the   eastern  P  acific  Oc  ean  islands.    Journal  of  the 
Kansas  Entomological  Society,  vol.31,  pp.   249-255. 
LUCKWILL,   L.   C. 

1943.  The  genus  Lycopersicon;  an  historical,  biological,  and  taxonomic  sur- 
vey of  the  wild  and  cultivated  tomatoes.  Aberdeen  University  Stud- 
ies,  120  pp. 

Muller,  C.  H. 

1940.  A  revision  of  the  genus  Lycopersicon.  United  States  Department  of  Agri- 
culture Miscellaneous   Publications,  382  pp. 

RICK,  C.  M. 

1950.  Pollination  relations  of  Lycopersicon  esculentum  in  native   and  foreign 

regions.  Evolution,   vol.  4,  pp.    110-122. 

1956.  Genetic  and  systematic  studies  on  accessions  of  Lycopersicon  from 
the  Galapagos  Islands.  American  Journal  of  Botany,  vol.  43,  pp. 
687-696. 

1960.  Hybridization  between  Lycopersicon  esculentum  and  Solanumpennellii: 

phylogenetic    and  cytogenetic   significance.    Proceedings   of  the  Na- 
tional Academy  of  Sciences,   vol.  46,  pp.   78-82. 

RICK,  C.  M.,  AND  R.  L  Bowman 

1961.  Galapagos  tomatoes   and  tortoises.   Evolution,  vol.    15,  pp.  407-417. 

Shumway,  G. 

1954.  Carnegie  Ridge  and  Cocos  Ridge  in  the  east  equatorial  Pacific.  Journal 
of  Geology,   vol.   62,   PP.   573-586. 

SVENSON,   H.   K. 

1946.  Vegetation  of  the  coast  of  Ecuador  and  Peru  and  its  relation  to  the  Ga- 
lapagos Islands.  I.  Geographical  relations  of  the  flora.  American 
Journal  of  Botany,  vol.   33,  pp.   394-426. 


COMPOSITION  AND  RELATIONSHIP 

OF  THE  TERRESTRIAL  FAUNAS  OF  EASTER, 

JUAN  FERNANDEZ,  DESVENTURADAS, 

AND  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS  * 

Guillermo  Kuschel 

Centra  de  Investigaciones  Zoologicas 
Universidad  de  Chile 
Santiago,   Chile 


South  America  has  a  great  number  of  offshore  islands,  particularly  in 
the  fjord  region  of  southern  Chile,  but  there  are  also  other  truly  oceanic  is- 
lands lying  far  from  the  mainland  and  composed  entirely  of  volcanic  material. 
In  this  paper  I  shall  attempt  to  present  a  general  account  of  the  composition 
of  the  terrestrial  faunas  of  the  oceanic  islands,  and  to  show  their  relationships 
with  the  faunas  of  other  regions,  before  discussing  the  origin  and  possible 
antiquity  of  their  older  elements.  Easter  Island,  Juan  Fernandez,  Desventura- 
das,  and  the  Galapagos  will  be  considered  here,  but  the  isolated  Salay  Gomez 
and  the  Cocos  and  Malpelo  islands  will  not  be  dealt  with  because  they  are 
not  sufficiently  well  known.  In  table  1  is  shown  the  location  of  the  islands  to 
be  considered,  together  with  other  basic  data  (see  also  fig.  1). 

Easter  Island 

This  remote  island  has  a  low  and  uniform  topography  relieved  by  a  few 
craters  which  have  no  human  record  of  volcanic  activity.  It  is  fairly  arid,  hav- 
ing no  streams,  lakes,  or  swampland,  and  showing  surface  water  only  in  the 
depths  of  three  of  the  craters.  Its  climate  is  warm-temperate,  with  its  rainfall 
evenly  distributed  through  the  year  (Cfa  in  the  Koppen-Geiger  classification). 

It  is  the  only  island  of  the  four  with  a  native  human  population.  Man 
and  his  domestic  animals,  particularly  sheep,  have  been  largely  responsible 
for  the  impoverishment  of  the  flora  and  for  this  reason  Easter  Island  has  only 
31  species  of  flowering  plants.  Skottsberg,  in  1928,  was  therefore  able  to  say 


♦  Presented   at  the  TENTH   PACIFIC   SCIENCE    CONGRESS  of  the   Pacific   Science 

Association,    held    at  the   University  of  Hawaii,   Honolulu,   Hawaii,   U.  S.  A.,    21   August 
to   6  September  1961, and    sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL   ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,  and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

-79- 


80 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


^ 


-© 


PASCUA  (Easter) 
Lat.   27°  10' 
Long.   109°  26' 
Area   118  km^ 
Alt.  530  m 
Rainfall    1149  mm 
Temp.    20.4   C 


GALAPAGOS 
Lat.  00°00' 
Long.  89°  00' 
Area  7643  km^ 
Alt.    ISOO  m 
Rainfall     665  mm 
Temp.    23.6  C 


PANAMA 


10 


COLOMBIA 


ECUADOR 


-   5 


-  10 


-  15 


PERU 


DESVENTURADAS 

Lat.  26°  19' 
Long.  79°  47' 
Area  7  km  ^ 
Alt.   478  m 
Rainfall +  600  mm 
Temp.  17.3  C 


JUAN  FERNANDEZ 
Lat.  33°  44' 
Long.  78°  50' 
Area  185  km 
Alt.  1500  m 
Rainfall   1152  mm 
Temp.   15.3  C 


-     20 


25 


30 


35 


CHILE 


-    40 


45 


50 


-   55 


No.  44) 


KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


81 


Table  1.     Data  on  four  island  groups  of  the  southeastern  Pacific  Ocean. 


PASCUA 

JUAN    FERNANDEZ 

DESVENTLIRADAS 

GALAPAGOS 

(Easterls.) 

Latitude 

27°  10'  S 

33°  37'  S 

26°  21'  S 

00°  00' 

Longitude 

109°  26'  W 

78°  52'  W 

79°  47'  W 

89°  00' 

Area  (km    ) 

118 

185 

7 

7643 

Max.   altitude  (m) 

530 

1500 

478 

1500 

Ann.   Temp.   C. 

20.4 

15.3 

17.3 

23.6 

Rainfall   (mm) 

1149.3 

1152.2 

600 

665 

Distance   from 

continent   (km ) 

3760 

666 

859 

950 

in  all  fairness,  "there  does  not  exist  another  Island  of  the  size  of  Easter  and 
with  such  a  fine  climate  where  the  native  flora  is  so  poor." 

Although  we  would  not  expect  a  rich  fauna  on  Easter  Island  it  is  quite 
clear  that  the  fauna  has  become  further  impoverished  and  it  is  possible  to 
point  to  certain  features  which,  in  this  respect,  distinguish  Easter  Island  from 
others  under  consideration: 

(1)  The  cosmopolitan  or  wide-spread  element  in  its   fauna  is  very  high, 

(2)  The  Indo-Malayan,  or  Pacific,  element  is  also  appreciable. 

(3)  Of  the  79  terrestrial  species  of  animal  life  only  six  are  endemic  and 
the  position  of  even  some  of  these  is  still  debatable.  These  endemic  species 
are: 

a)  Chrysopa  skottsbergi  Esben  Petersen,  1924  (Neuroptera) 

There  is  nothing  published  on  its  relationships  with  other  species 
but  it  was  most  likely  introduced  from  South  America. 

b)  Lipsana  insulae-paschalis  Enderlein,  1940  (Diptera) 

For  this  species  Enderlein  created  a  genus  but  gave  no  account 
at  all  of  its  relation  to  other  genera.  He  also  raised  a  new  sub-family  which 
he  put  in  the  Lonchaeidae. 

c)  Bidessus  skottsbergi  Zimmermann,  1924  (Coleoptera:  Dytiscidae) 

This  is  said  to  be  extremely  close  to  two  Australian  species. 

d)  P acindonus  bryani  (Swezey,  1921) 

(Coleoptera:  Curculionidae:  Cossoninae) 
The  genus  Pacindonus  Kuschel  is  of  Indo-Madagassian  origin  but 
is  widely  distributed  through  the  Pacific.     It  has  a  dozen  species  or  so,  and 
is  not  represented  in  the  Americas  or  in  the  cold-temperate  regions. 


Figure  1.  Schematic  position  ofthe  islands.  Vertical  line:  South  American  con- 
tinent, with  the  parallels.  Horizontal  line:  the  equator.  Arrows:  main  relationships  of 
the   terrestrial  fauna. 


82 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  2.     Climatological  data  for  Easter  Island. 


LATITUDE  27°  10'  S 

LONGITUDE 

109°  26*  W 

ALTITUDE  41  m 

Mean   max. 

Mean  Temp. 

Mean   m  in. 

Relative 

Rainfall 

temp.   C. 

C. 

temp.   C. 

Humid  it  y 

mm . 

January 

27.0 

23.1 

19.1 

78 

104.9 

February 

28.2 

23.7 

19.6 

77 

78.6 

March 

27.4 

23.1 

19.3 

77 

100.9 

April 

25.5 

21.5 

17.8 

76 

120.7 

May 

23.4 

19.9 

16.9 

80 

114.7 

June 

21.9 

18.3 

15.1 

81 

116.5 

July 

21.4 

17.8 

14.6 

83 

88.6 

August 

21.5 

17.8 

14.7 

83 

85.7 

September 

22.1 

18.1 

14.5 

82 

75.7 

October 

23.3 

19.1 

15.2 

81 

70.6 

November 

24.2 

20.2 

16.3 

83 

90.5 

Dec  ember 

25.5 

21.8 

17.9 

85 

101.9 

Annual 

24.3 

20.4 

16.8 

81 

1,149.3 

Years   of 

observation 

34 

34 

34 

28 

47 

e)  Tetragnatha  paschae  Berland,  1924  (Araneae) 

The  genus  is  of  world-wide  distribution  and  this  species  may  pos- 
sibly occur  in  other  Pacific  Islands. 

f)  Melampus  pascus  Odhner,  1922  (Mollusca) 
This  is  of  Oriental  origin. 

Of  the  six  endemic  species  so  far  known,  three  are  of  Oriental  origin, 
one  of  Australian  origin,  and  the  origin  of  two  is  as  yet  undetermined.  So  far, 
then,  there  is  no  proven  South  American  element  in  the  fauna,  and  Easter  Is- 
land must  be  considered  as  one  of  the  Pacific  islands  which  have  the  Indo- 
Malayan  element  as  the  strongest  in  their  faunas. 


Juan  Fernandez 

This  is  really  a  small  archipelago  comprising  the  islands  of  Masatierra, 
Santa  Clara,  and  Masafuera,  and  Santa  Clara  may  be  counted  a  continuation 
of  Masatierra,  for  it  is  separated  from  the  western  tip  of  the  latter  only  by  a 
narrow  channel.  Both  Masatierra  and  Masafuera  have  a  dense  but  varied  cover 
of  vegetation  and  this  is  particularly  well  developed  around  the  higher  hills 
of  Masatierra.  Only  170  km.  (92  miles)  separate  Masatierra  and  Masafuera, 
yet  each  has  its  own  endemisms.     Masafuera  tops  Masatierra  by  600  metres, 


No.  44) 


KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


83 


Table  3-  Composition  of  the  terrestrial  fauna  of  Easter  Island. 


ENDEMICS 

S.  AMERICA 

ORIENTAL 

AUSTR- 
NEOZ. 

WIDE 
SPREAD 

UNDEFINED 

Oligochae  ta 

.. 

•  ■ 

1 

•  • 

Isopoda 

•  • 

•  • 

•  • 

.. 

2 

Myriapoda 

•• 

•• 

•• 

2 

1 

Insecta 

(4) 

(-) 

(8) 

(1) 

(42) 

(2) 

Coll  embola 

,. 

.. 

1 

Odonata 

. . 

.. 

.. 

1 

Blattariae 

.. 

3 

1 

Orthoptera 

.. 

1 

■  • 

Embioptera 

.. 

1 

•  • 

Dermaptera 

.. 

•  • 

1 

Thysanoptera 

■  • 

.. 

1 

Psocoptera 

•  • 

.. 

•  • 

1 

Hemiptera 

.. 

•  • 

9 

Ne  uroptera 

1 

.. 

1 

Lepidoptera 

.. 

2 

4 

Diptera 

1 

.. 

8 

Coleop  tera 

2 

1 

8 

Hymenoptera 

•• 

7 

1 

Araneae 

1 

o 

4 

2 

Mollusca 

1 

1 

3 

•• 

■• 

Vprtebrata 

•• 

O 

•• 

•• 

-• 

Total 

6 

13 

4 

52 

7 

Table  4.     Relationships  of  the 

fauna  of  Easter  Island. 

S.   AMERICA 

AUSTRALIA 

ORIENTAL- 
POLYNESIAN 

WIDE 
SPREAD 

UNDEFINED 

Number  of  species 
Percentage 

•• 

2 
2.53 

16 

20.25 

52 
65.82 

9 
11.39 

its  peaks  are  covered  with  snow  in  winter,  and  light  falls  of  snow  are  common 
in  summer.  It  is  on  these  summits  that  the  interesting  Magellanic  element  of 
its  flora  is  found. 

Both  islands  have  some  permanent  streams  but  they  lack  lakes  and 
swampland.  There  are  no  volcanic  craters  aDthough  an  eruption  a  century  and 
a  quarter  ago  (1835)  took  place  off  the  extreme  south-east  of  Cumberland  Bay 
on  Masatierra  close  to  the  coast. 

Juan  Fernandez  has  a  warm  temperate  climate  with  rain  throughout  the 
year,  but  with  considerably  more  precipitation  in  winter  than  summer  (Csb2 


84 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  5-     Climatological  data  of  Juan  Fernandez  (Masatierra). 


LATITUDE  33°  37'  S 


LONGITUDE  78°  52'  W 


ALTITUDE    6  m. 


Mean  max. 

Mean   temp. 

Mean   m  i  n . 

Rel  ative 

Rainfall 

temp.    C. 

c. 

temp.    C . 

Humidity 

mm. 

January 

21,7 

18.4 

15.2 

74 

24.9 

February 

22.0 

18.9 

15.6 

73 

30.1 

March 

21.0 

18.3 

15.1 

74 

39.8 

April 

19.7 

16.8 

13.4 

77 

82.4 

May 

17.8 

15.2 

12.0 

79 

149.0 

June 

16.0 

13.7 

10.5 

78 

160.3 

July 

15.1 

12.9 

9.8 

80 

142.0 

August 

14.7 

12.3 

9.2 

79 

113.8 

September 

15.2 

12.4 

9.4 

77 

76.8 

October 

16.2 

13.3 

10.2 

76 

54.5 

November 

18.0 

15.0 

11.7 

74 

34.2 

Dec  ember 

20.0 

17.0 

14.0 

73 

26.4 

Annual 

17.9 

15.3 

12.2 

76 

1,152.2 

Years   of 

observation 

35 

35 

35 

35 

48 

in  the  Koppen-Geiger  classification).  The  lower-lying  areas  at  some  distance 
from  the  hills  have  a  very  dry  summer  and  an  arid  soil  that  applies  to  the  ex- 
treme west  of  Masatierra  and  to  Santa  Clara. 

The  flora  includes  147  species  of  flowering  plants.  There  are  no  native 
species  of  amphibians,  reptiles,  fresh-water  fish,  or  mammals,  but  there  are 
nine  species  of  land-birds,  all  of  which  are  related  to  the  Chilean  fauna. 

According  toSkottsberg  (1956)  there  are  147  species  of  flowering  plants 
on  Juan  Fernandez,  and  of  these  101  are  endemic.  He  divided  the  147  species 
into  6  elements  as  below: 

Andine  Chilean  element 

Subantartic  Magellanian  element 

Neotropical  element 

Pacific  element 

Atlantic-S.  African  element 

Eu-Fernandezian  element 

It  is  most  interesting  to  note  here  that  the  incidence  of  endemism,  on  a 
percentage  basis,  is  very  similar  in  the  insects  and  flowering  plants.  It  is  not 
yet  possible  in  the  case  of  the  insects  to  achieve  the  same  precision  of  class- 
ification by  origin  which  Skottsberg  made  for  the  plants,  but  the  literature 
shows  clearly  enough  that  the  southern  Chilean  element  predominates  strong- 


69 

46.9% 

15 

10.2% 

19 

12.9% 

26 

17.7% 

6 

4.1% 

12 

8.2% 

No.  44) 


KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


85 


Table  6.     Composition  of  the  terrestrial  Arthropod  fauna  of  Juan  Fernandez. 


ENDEMIC 

ENDEMIC 

NON-ENDEMIC 

UNDEFINED 

TOTAL  NUMBER 

GENERA 

SPECIES 

SPECIES 

SPECIES 

OF   SPECIES 

Isopoda 

1 

8 

3 

,  , 

11 

Myriapoda 

.. 

3 

6 

9 

Insecta 

(54) 

(440) 

(170) 

(77) 

(687) 

CoUembola 

. 

3 

5 

4 

12 

Thysanura 

. 

2 

.. 

2 

Orthoptera 

. 

2 

1 

•  1 

4 

Dermap  tera 

. 

.• 

1 

1 

Isoptera 

. 

1 

.. 

.. 

1 

P  so  cop tera 

. 

.. 

.. 

4 

4 

Thysanopt era 

. 

2 

2 

2 

6 

Hemip  tera 

8 

32 

7 

9 

48 

Neuroptera 

1 

4 

1 

5 

Trichoptera 

.. 

2 

1 

3 

Lepidoptera 

12 

63 

23 

2 

88 

Diptera 

2 

102 

73 

18 

193 

Coleoptera 

20 

191 

38 

6 

235 

Hymenoptera 

1  1 

38 

15 

31 

84 

Arane  ae 

•  • 

13 

6 

.. 

19 

Pseudoscorpionida 

4 

10 

.. 

1 

11 

A  cari 

1 

26 

2 

•  • 

28 

ly.  Second  in  importance,  as  in  the  case  of  the  plants,  comes  the  Pacific  ele- 
ment, mainly  Indo-Malayan. 


Desventuradas 

These  consist  of  the  two  tiny  islands  of  San  Felix  and  San  Ambrosio 
and  the  islet  called  Gonzalez.  This  group  lies  777  km.  (420  miles)  to  the 
north  of  Juan  Fernandez  and  859  km.  (464  miles)  from  the  nearest  point  of  the 
mainland. 

San  Ambrosio  is  larger,  measuring  roughly  4  km.  long  by  1  km.  wide. 
Its  coastline  is  very  steeply  countered  and  its  upper  parts  constitute  a  pla- 
teau, lying  between  300  and  478  metres  above  sea  level,  which  is  dissected 
by  a  few  small  and  shallow  ravines.  Surface  water  and  filtrations  through  the 
walls  are  totally  absent  except  immediately  after  rain  and  for  this  reason  the 
island  is  uninhabitable.  There  are  no  meteorological  data  for  the  Desventur- 
adas but  it  is  known  that  there  is  abundant  rain  in  winter,  while  from  October 
to  March  no  rain  falls  and  the  summit  is  quite  free  from  low  clouds. 

The  prevailing  wind  is  from  the  south-south-east.  The  vegetation  is 
halophytic  and  though  abundant  on  the  plateau  it  is  very  scarce  on  the  cliffs 
of  the  island.  The  island  has  only  19  native  species  of  phanerogams  and  one 
moss,  and  there  are  no  ferns  at  all.    Terrestrial  vertebrates  are  non-existent, 


86 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  7.    Percen 

tage  of  endemisms  of  Insecta 

and  Phanerogamae. 

ENDEMIC 

NON-ENDEMIC 

UNDEFINED 

TOTAL   NUMBER 

Insec ta 
Phanerogamae 

64.43 
68.7 

24.35 
21.3 

11.22 

687 
147 

either  native  or  introduced,  but  there  are  seven  species  of  sea  birds  which 
nest  on  the  island  and  there  is  one  land-bird  which  is  probably  only  the  Juan 
Fernandez  Sparrow  Hawk  (Falco  sparverius  fernandensis  Chapman)  which  is 
most  likely  a  recent  immigrant. 

San  Ambrosio  is  one  of  the  very  few  islands  which  has  so  far  avoided 
invasionby  any  terrestrial  vertebrates  or  by  any  weeds  and  has  totally  escaped 
the  effects  of  fire. 

San  Felix  Island  is  only  a  little,  way  to  the  west  of  San  Ambrosio.  It  is 
smaller,  lower  (170  m.  summit),  and  is  less  steeply  sloped,  it  is  much  more 
arid  and  its  vegetation  is  very  sparse.  It  has  some  eight  species  of  phanero- 
gams, two  of  which  are  endemic. 


Table  8.     Composition  of  the  terrestrial  Arthropod  fauna  of  San  Ambrosio. 


ENDEMIC 

ENDEMIC 

NON-ENDEMIC 

UNDEFINED 

TOTAL  NUMBER 

GENERA 

SPECIES 

SPECIES 

SPECIES 

OF    SPECIES 

Isopoda 

2 

•  • 

•• 

0 

Chilopoda 

•  • 

.. 

•• 

2 

2 

Insecta 

(4) 

(16) 

(21) 

(37) 

(74) 

Collembola 

1 

1 

Thysanura 

1 

.. 

1 

2 

Orthop  tera 

.. 

1 

1 

•• 

2 

P  socoptera 

.. 

.. 

•  • 

3 

3 

Thysanoptera 

.. 

.. 

1 

1 

Hemiptera 

1 

4 

4 

9 

Lepidoptera 

.. 

21 

21 

Dip  tera 

1 

2 

7 

3 

12 

Coleop  tera 

3 

9 

6 

1 

16 

Hymenoptera 

•• 

3 

4 

7 

Arane  ae 

.. 

5 

2 

y 

Pseudoscorpionida 

2 

.. 

2 

Acari 

•  • 

(20) 

(20) 

Gamasides 

3 

3 

Uropodina 

.. 

1 

1 

Trombidiformes 

5 

5 

Acaridiae 

1 

1 

Oribatei 

•• 

10 

10 

No.  44)  KUSCHEL:   GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  87 

A  point  worth  noting  in  table  8  is  that  the  lepidopterous  species  out- 
number both  the  Diptera  and  the  Coleoptera. 

As  the  first  intensive  collecting  of  the  small  animal  life  took  place  only 
at  the  end  of  1960,  much  of  the  material  yet  remains  to  be  determined  by  spe- 
cialists. Although  the  flora  of  the  island  only  slightly  resembles  that  of  Juan 
Fernandez,  the  fauna  is  much  more  closely  related.  The  percentage  of  endem- 
ism  seems. to  be  appreciably  lower  than  on  Juan  Fernandez,  but  there  are  not- 
able examples  of  endemism  in  both  species  and  genera.  Our  knowledge  to  date 
enables  us  to  distinguish  four  endemic  genera  in  the  Insecta,  a  genus  of  Calli- 
phoridae  related  to  Callyntropyga  of  Juan  Fernandez,  two  genera  of  Curculion- 
idae  (Cossoninae)  found  only  on  Thamnosens  and  related  to  the  Juan  Fernan- 
dez fauna,  and  a  carabid  of  problematical  relationships,  but  certainly  with  no 
closely  related  genera  in  Juan  Fernandez  or  on  the  Chilean  mainland.  A  few 
other  genera,  formerly  considered  endemic  in  Juan  Fernandez,  are  also  repre- 
sented on  San  Ambrosio,  although  not  by  the  same  species.  It  cannot  be  doubted 
that  the  terrestrial  fauna  of  the  Islas  Desventuradas  is  closely  related  to  that 
of  Juan  Fernandez  unlike  the  flora  which  is  only  distantly  related  as  a  whole. 


Galapagos 

These  islands  form  an  archipelago  situated  on  the  Equator  some  950  km. 
(510)  miles)  from  the  nearest  South  American  coast.  They  comprise  15  largish 
islands  together  with  a  host  of  smaller  islands.  Their  total  area  is  more  than 
40  times  greater  than  Juan  Fernandez  and  they  offer  a  wider  variety  of  envi- 
ronments, with  arid  and  moist  areas  and  with  an  altogether  richer  vegetation 
as  they  have  nearly  four  times  the  number  of  plant  species. 

The  terrestrial  vertebrate  fauna  is  comparably  well  known  but  the  same 
cannot  be  said  for  the  invertebrates.  Information  on  the  invertebrates  is  very 
widely  scattered,  so  that  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  obtain  a  concise  overall 
picture  of  the  Galapagos  fauna,  but  I  have  been  able  to  collate  all  known  pa- 
pers on  the  Coleoptera  and  this  is  given  in  table  11  where  it  is  compared  with 
data  for  Juan  Fernandez. 

Within  any  geographical  zone  there  is  a  clear  enough  observable  ratio 
of  flowering  plants  to  insects.  The  ratio  varies  with  the  incidence  of  endem- 
ism. On  the  basis  of  this  ratio  and  the  number  of  plants  known  to  exist  in  the 
Galapagos  Islands  one  would  expect  to  find  at  least  550  to  800  species  of 
Coleoptera,  but  up  to  now  there  are  recorded  only  190  species;  that  is  to  say, 
between  a  third  and  a  quarter  of  the  expected  number.  Moreover,  the  usual  ratio 
of  Carabidae  to  Curculionidae  is  roughly  1:5  and  it  is  extremely  strange  that 
more  Carabidae  than  Curculionidae  are  recorded  for  the  Galapagos.  From  these 
facts  we  can  only  deduce  that  the  Galapagos  fauna  has  been  selectively  and 
incompletely  collected. 


88 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  9.    Climatological  data  of  San  Cristobal  (Chatham  I.},   Galapagos. 


LATITUDE  00°  54*  S 


LONGITUDE  08°  37'  W 


ALTITUDE  2.7 


Me  an   max. 

Me  an   temp. 

Mean   min. 

Relative 

Rainfall 

temp.   C  . 

C. 

temp.   C . 

Humidity 

mm. 

January 

28.7 

24.8 

21.9 

81 

5.5 

February 

29.8 

25.8 

22.9 

82 

190.1 

March 

29.8 

25.9 

22.6 

83 

241.5 

April 

30.0 

25.9 

22.8 

84 

141.8 

May 

28.6 

24.9 

22.2 

80 

14.9 

June 

27.8 

23.8 

21.4 

77 

5.2 

July 

26.4 

22.7 

20.7 

78 

6.8 

August 

25.6 

21.7 

19.6 

79 

8.4 

September 

25.0 

21.1 

19.0 

79 

6.0 

October 

25.5 

21.7 

19.2 

76 

6.8 

November 

25.8 

22.2 

19.9 

75 

10.8 

December 

27.1 

23.2 

20.9 

77 

26.6 

Annual 

27.5 

23.6 

21.1 

79 

664.4 

Years   of 

observation 

3 

7 

3 

5 

3 

There  is  also  a  universally  observed  ratio  between  the  endemism  of 
phanagerogams  and  of  the  fauna,  this  being  particularly  true  of  the  insects. 
From  the  table  comparing  the  Coleoptera  of  the  Galapagos  and  Juan  Fernan- 
dez we  can  see  that  the  incidence  of  endemism  of  Coleoptera  species  is  about 
the  same  for  both  groups  of  islands,  but  for  plants  it  is  about  48  per  cent  for 
the  Galapagos  and  is  68.7  per  cent  for  Juan  Fernandez;  this  seems  to  point  to 
wrong  interpretations  in  plant  or  Coleoptera  studies  somewhere,  and  the  neces- 
sity for  an  intensive  collection  of  invertebrates  in  the  Galapagos  is  very  ap- 
parent. 

The  Gala'pagos  are  further  from  the  mainland  than  are  the  Desventuradas 
and  Juan  Fernandez  and  both  flora  and  fauna  are  typically  Neotropical,  with 
few  exceptions.  A  high  percentage  of  the  species  of  the  Galapagos  fauna  has 
been  found,  by  many  authors,  to  be  most  closely  related  to  the  faunas  of  Cen- 
tral America,    Mexico,    and  the  Caribbean  islands;  but  this  is  due  more  than 
anything  to  our  ignorance  of  much  of  the  fauna  between  Panama  and  northern 
Peru.    Of  the  fauna  I  have  personally  been  able  to  examine  (Curculionidae),  I 
am   quite  certain  that  the  most  closely  related  mainland  species  are  those 
which  live  immediately  opposite  the  Galapagos.     There  are   some  remarkable 
examples  of  Galapagos  species  being  extremely  closely  related  to  species  on 
Puna  Island  in  the  mouth  of  the  Golfo  de  Guayaquil. 


No.  44) 


KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


89 


Table     10.     Climatological  data  of  Seymour  Island,   Galapagos. 


Mean   max. 

Mean   temp. 

Mean   min. 

Rainfall 

temp.   C. 

c. 

temp.   C. 

mm. 

J  anuary 

29.4 

2  5.9 

22.5 

16.5 

February 

30.0 

26.8 

23.6 

29.7 

March 

30.1 

27.0 

23.8 

16.5 

April 

30.0 

26.7 

23.5 

20.6 

May 

29.2 

25.7 

22.2 

1.0 

June 

28.6 

25.1 

21.7 

0.2 

July 

27.1 

24.0 

20.8 

0.2 

August 

27.1 

23.3 

19.7 

0.2 

September 

26.8 

23.1 

19.5 

0.0 

October 

27.1 

23.3 

19.6 

0.0 

November 

27.5 

23.8 

20.1 

0.0 

December 

28.2 

24.6 

21.0 

0.0 

Annual 

28.3 

24.8 

21.4 

85.6 

Years   of 

observat  ion 

5 

5 

5 

5 

The  occurrence  ofendemism  in  species  and  plants  in  the  Galapagos  is 
much  lower  than  in  Juan  Fernandez. 

The  Origin  of  the  Faunas  of 
Juan  Fernandez,  Desventuradas,  and  Galapagos 


As  has  been  mentioned  earlier,  all  these  islands  have  today  a  purely 
volcanic  bedrock  and  their  degree  of  erosion  has  led  geologists  unanimously 
to  believe  that  the  islands  cannot  possibly  be  older  than  the  Pliocene;  that  is 
to  say,  that  they  are  not  much  more  than  ten  million  years  old.  We  have  to  ask 
if  this  relatively  short  time,  by  geological  standards,  is  sufficient  to  account 
for  the  clear  difference  observed  between  the  faunas  of  the  islands. 

Geographically  the  Galapagos,  Desventuradas,  and  Juan  Fernandez  are 
roughly  the  same  distance  from  the  South  American  coast  and  the  line  joining 
them  is  not  far  out  of  parallel  with  the  line  of  the  Andes.  This  makes  one 
wonder  if  they  might  not  have  a  common  tectonic  origin.  It  is  also  worthy  of 
note  that  petrographic  studies  have  shown  very  close  similarity  between  the 
rocks  of  Masafuera  and  the  Galapagos. 

On  the  origin  of  life  in  these  islands  much  has  been  written  but  the  opin- 
ions expressed  have  differed  greatly,  expecially  with  regard  to  the  Galapagos. 
There  are  those  who  passionately  maintain  that  winds,  sea  currents,  and  birds 


90  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

are  much  more  effective  dispersal  agents  than  is  commonly  conceded.  That 
such  agents  do  play  a  part  in  the  repopulation  of  islands  is  not  doubted,  but 
as  far  as  these  particular  islands  are  concerned  it  is  easy  enough  to  point  to 
a  series  of  components  of  the  fauna  which  could  not  have  been  so  transported, 
at  least  not  across  the  natural  barriers  as  they  are  today.  I  shall  attempt  to 
tackle  this  problem,    beginning  with  Juan  Fernandez  and  the  Desventuradas. 

Geological  studies  have  shown  that  the   Chilean  coast  south  of  Valpa- 
raiso had  more  or  less  the  same  coastline  in  the  late  Cretaceous  as  at  the 
present.     During  the  Eocene,  however,  we  know  that  an  important  movement 
occurred  between  the  38th  and  45th  parallels,  as  this  region  completely  lacks 
Eocene  sedimentary  rocks,  and  the  next  marine  sediments  to  appear  are  of  late 
Oligocene   age,   beginning  with  Navidad  strata.     This  means  that  during  the 
Eocene  and  most  of  the  Oligocene  there  was  formed  a  continuous  ridge  of  land 
which  cut  off  the  present  coast  from  the  sea.     This  unstable  mass  was  called 
"Land  of  Juan  Fernandez"  by  Briiggen  (1950)  and  this  distinguished  geolo- 
gist presumed  that  this  land  extended  obliquely  northwards  to  Juan  Fernan- 
dez, embracing  the  Desventuradas,  for  between  these  islands  there  is  today 
a  submarine  chain  nowhere  deeper  than  1.430  m. 

It  is  difficult  to  reconcile  the  proposed  recent  origin  of  the  islands  with 
our  certain  knowledge  that  Juan  Fernandez  and  the  Desventuradas  contain  an 
abundance  of  primitive  elements  in  their  flora  and  fauna  and  it  is  easier  to  ac- 
cept Brilggen's  hypothesis  of  the  islands'  origin.  That  is  that,  far  from  being 
of  Pliocene  or  Pleistocene  age,  the  islands  are  the  relics  of  an  older  exten- 
sive land-mass  which  had  direct  connection  with  the  continent  or  at  least  was 
very  much  closer  to  it  than  are  the  islands  today,  so  permitting  dispersal  of 
the  flora  and  fauna  until  the  very  late  Tertiary  when  it  is  supposed  a  final 
subsidence  isolated  the  present-day  islands  which  are  basically  volcanic  cones. 

On  the  basis  of  Briiggen's  hypothesis,  which  is  founded  on  some  geolo- 
gical facts,  Skottsberg  was  able  to  understand  and  explain  the  Eocene  flora 
of  Juan  Fernandez  and  also  the  high  incidence  of  endemisms  in  genera  and 
species.  The  occurrence  of  a  subantarctic  flora  on  the  peaks  of  Masafuera, 
however,  is  still  not  satisfactorily  explained  for  the  ocean  currents  cannot  be 
considered  a  likely  means  of  transporting  plants  to  island  peaks,  the  present- 
day  winds  do  not  lie  in  the  right  direction,  and  we  do  not  now  observe  bird  mi- 
grations between  southern  Chile  and  Juan  Fernandez.  On  the  other  hand,  it  is 
interesting  to  note  that  the  subantarctic  element  in  the  flora  is  not  paralleled 
in  the  fauna. 

As  far  as  the  terrestrial  fauna  is  concerned,  with  its  remarkable  degree 
of  generic  and  specific  endemism  and  its  high  percentage  of  species  related 
to  those  in  southern  Chile,  the  hypothetical  "Land  of  Juan  Fernandez"  accounts 
completely  for  its  presence  in  the  islands.  Nevertheless,  I  would  like  to  draw 
attention  to  two  facts  of  importance: 


No.  44)  KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  91 

(1)  The  number  of  species  of  Coleoptera  in  the  leaf  litter  is  startlingly 
low  despite  the  favorable  conditions  for  development  of  such  a  faunal  group. 
Most  of  the  elements  characteristic  of  southern  Chile  are  missing,  this  being 
especially  true  of  the  Pselaphidae,  Melandryidae,  and  Curculionidae(Crypto- 
rhynchinae.) 

(2)  Among  the  flying  insects,  such  as  the  Neuroptera  and  especially  the 
Diptera,  a  large  number  of  species  are  common  to  Juan  Fernandez  and  south- 
ern Chile,  or  at  least  extremely  closely  interrelated,  but  many  of  these  are 
found  only  in  forests  or  their  surrounds  and  not  near  the  Chilean  ports  from 
which  ships  set  sail  for  the  islands.  This  makes  it  almost  impossible  for  these 
species  to  have  been  transported  to  the  islands  by  man  's  agency.  While  on 
the  subject  of  flying  insects,  I  might  here  interpolate  some  mention  of  certain 
birds  which  can  scarcely  have  reached  the  islands  under  their  own  power  in 
conditions  as  they  are  today;  I  have  in  mind  such  species  as  Spizitornis  fer- 
nandezianus,     Cinclodes  oustaleti   baeckstroemi,    and   Aphrastura  masafuerae. 

The  first  point,  concerning  the  Coleoptera  fauna  of  the  leaf  litter,  seems 
to  suggest  that  the  Eocene  fauna  of  the  leaf  litter  lacked  this  element  or,  and 
perhaps  more  likely,  that  the  "Land  of  Juan  Fernandez"  was  not  entirely  con- 
tinuous but  interrupted  here  and  there  sufficiently  to  prevent  the  dispersal  of 
those  species  belonging  exclusively  to  the  soil.  We  can  hope  to  get  nearer 
the  truth  of  this  matter  once  the  hypogeous  fauna  has  been  carefully  studied. 

There  is  another  geological  fact  worth  mentioning  here.  Along  the  whole 
length  of  coast  from  the  5th  parallel  (Payta)  in  northern  Peru  to  just  beyond 
the  32nd  parallel  (to  the  North  of  Valparaiso),  there  are  found  no  marine  sedi- 
ments from  the  Eocene  to  the  early  Pliocene.  This  means  that  throughout  this 
considerable  period  the  coastline  must  have  lain  in  what  is  now  the  Pacific 
Ocean,  but  we  know  nothing  about  this  addition  to  the  continental  margin, 
which  disappeared  only  in  the  late  Pliocene.  It  is  worth  repeating  here  that 
the  flora  of  San  Felix  and  San  Ambrosio  is  most  closely  related  to  that  of  Ata- 
cama,  the  mainland  region  immediately  opposite  the  islands,  and  I  might  add 
that  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  account  for  this  by  means  of  the  usual  agents 
of  dispersion,  for  neither  atmospheric  nor  sea  currents  run  in  the  required  di- 
rection and  birds  do  not  now  migrate  from  Atacama  towards  the  islands. 

On  the  origin  of  life  on  the  Galapagos,  if  I  may  move  on  to  this  last 
group  of  islands,  much  has  been  written  and  one  might  almost  say  that  the 
number  of  opinions  equals  the  number  of  authors.  If  one  compares  its  flora 
and  fauna  with  that  of  Juan  Fernandez,  it  is  immediately  apparent  that  its  in- 
cidence of  generic  and  specific  endemisms  is  proportionally  lower,  and  also, 
that  its  species  do  not  display,  as  a  whole,  so  many  primitive  features.  On 
these  grounds  we  do  not  expect  such  an  early  origin  of  life  in  the  Galapagos 
as  in  Juan  Fernandez  and  the  Desventuradas.  As  there  is  an  ample  evidence 
of  important  geological  changes  throughout  the  whole  of  the  Tertiary  along 


92 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  11.     The  Coleoptera  o(  Galapagos  and  J  nan  Fernandez  compared. 


Galapagos 

Juan  Fernandez 

Genera 

Endemic 
genera 

Species 

Endemic 
species 

Genera 

Endemic 
genera 

Species 

Endemic 
species 

Cicindelidae 

1 

.. 

2 

2 

,, 

.. 

., 

,, 

Carabidae 

8 

... 

23 

23 

7 

1 

22 

18 

Dytiscidae 

4 

•• 

4 

1 

3 

1 

3 

2 

Gyrinidae 

1 

.. 

1 

1 

,, 

,  , 

.. 

.  . 

Hydrophilidae 

3 

1 

4 

2 

,  , 

.. 

.. 

., 

Limnebiidae 

1 

.. 

1 

1 

,, 

,  , 

.. 

.. 

Staphylinidae 

2 

.. 

2 

1 

16 

7 

20 

16 

Ptiliidae 

r. 

.. 

,  , 

.. 

3 

,  , 

5 

.. 

Scaphidiidae 

.. 

.. 

,  , 

,  , 

1 

,  , 

1 

Histeridae 

2 

.. 

4 

2 

1 

,  , 

1 

.. 

Passalidae 

1 

.. 

1 

,, 

,, 

.. 

.. 

.. 

Scarabaeidae 

3 

1 

5 

4 

IC) 

.. 

2(?) 

. , 

Trogidae 

1 

.. 

1 

.« 

,, 

.. 

., 

, , 

Cantharidae 

1 

1 

, . 

,, 

,  , 

,  , 

, , 

Lycidae 

1 

.. 

1 

.. 

.. 

,  , 

.. 

.. 

Meloidae 

1 

.. 

1 

.. 

.. 

.  . 

-- 

.. 

Mordellidae 

1 

.. 

1 

1 

.. 

.. 

.. 

Tenebrionidae 

9 

2 

40 

37 

3 

,. 

3 

1 

Alleculidae 

3 

.. 

4 

3 

.. 

,. 

.. 

.. 

Monotomidae 

1 

.. 

1 

1 

.. 

.. 

.. 

Oedemeridae 

2 

.. 

5 

4 

.. 

,, 

.. 

.. 

Nitidulidae 

2 

.. 

2 

1 

1 

,, 

5 

5 

Cucujidae 

1 

.. 

1 

1 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

Cryptophagidae 

1 

.. 

.. 

.. 

4 

2 

8 

7 

Languriidae 

1 

.. 

1 

,  , 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

Cisidae 

.. 

.. 

.. 

.. 

1 

3 

3 

Lathridiidae 

.. 

.. 

.. 

., 

4 

,, 

4 

4 

Colydiidae 

1 

.. 

1 

.. 

2 

., 

4 

4 

Mycetophagidae 

•  • 

.. 

,, 

,  , 

1 

1 

.. 

Elateridae 

7 

.. 

14 

12 

1 

1 

.. 

Melasidae 

.. 

.. 

,, 

,  , 

1 

1 

1 

Buprestidae 

2 

•  • 

3 

3 

.. 

.. 

•• 

•  • 

Ostomidae 

2 

.. 

2 

1 

1 

1 

3 

3 

Cleridae 

2 

.. 

2 

1 

1 

1 

.. 

•  • 

Dasytidae 

1 

1 

1 

1 

•  • 

.. 

.. 

.. 

Dermestidae 

1 

.. 

2 

•  • 

1 

.. 

1 

.. 

Anobiidae 

3 

.. 

4 

4 

5 

1 

8 

2 

Bostrichidae 

(+Lyctidae) 

3 

.. 

3 

•• 

2 

.. 

2 

•  • 

Coccinellidae 

5 

.. 

5 

3 

2 

.. 

3 

1 

Cerambycidae 

12 

.. 

18 

14 

•  • 

•  • 

•• 

•• 

Chrysomelidae 

4 

1 

5 

5 

1 

1 

3 

3 

Bruchidae 

2 

.. 

2 

2 

•• 

•  • 

•• 

•• 

Anthribidae 

1 

,, 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

1 

Curculionidae 

9 

.. 

17 

16 

12 

6 

126 

120 

Scolytidae 

1 

.. 

1 

1 

2 

•  • 

2 

•• 

Platypodidae 

1 

•• 

1 

1 

•• 

•• 

•• 

•• 

Total 

107 

6 

190 

152 

79 

21 

235 

191 

No.  44) 


KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


93 


Table  11.      Continued 

Galapagos 

Juan  Fernandez 

Genera 

Endemic 
genera 

Species 

Endemic 
species 

Genera 

Endemic 
genera 

Species 

Endemic 
species 

Families  (total) 

39 

27 

Families  with 
endemic  subspec 

ies 

31 

16 

Percentage  of 
genera 

94.4 

5.6 

73.5 

26.5 

Percentage  of 
species 

20 

80 

18.74 

81.26 

the  rest  of  the  South  American  coast,  we  might  expect  there  to  have  been  sim- 
ilar disturbances  along  the  coast  of  Ecuador  and  Colombia  and,  in  fact,  there 
is  evidence  of  changes  in  short  level  in  some  fossiliferous  raised  beaches  of 
late  Tertiary  age.  The  two  submarine  ridges,  the  Cocos  Ridge  which  runs  from 
Costa  Rica  to  the  north  of  the  Galapagos,  and  the  Carnegie  Ridge  which  runs 
from  Ecuador  to  the  same  islands,  suggest  a  possible  former  union  or  Closer 
proximity  of  islands  and  mainland.  Shumway,  however,  discounts  the  former 
ridge  by  saying  "the  apparent  absence  of  truncated  seamounts  on  Cocos  Ridge 
is  evidence  against  a  former  emergence."  Of  the  other  submarine  feature  he 
says  "on  the  basis  of  the  bathymetry  of  Carnegie  Ridge  and  the  geological 
history  of  Colombia  and  Ecuador,  it  is  speculated  that  the  easternmost  por- 
tion of  Carnegie  Ridge  may  once  have  been  part  of  the  western  borderland  for 
the  early  Tertiary  geosyncline  which  existed  along  the  present  coastal  low- 
land of  western  Ecuador.  This  would  have  shortened  the  sea  route  to  the  Ga- 
lapagos Islands  and  possibly  facilitated  the  rafting  of  plants  and  animals  to 
the  Islands." 

The  foregoing  shows  that  there  is  yet  no  geological  evidence  of  a  land 
connection  between  the  Galapagos  and  the  continent  in  recent  times  and,  in 
fact,  dates  any  such  connection  as  early  Tertiary  at  the  latest.  This,  however, 
hardly  does  more  than  deepen  the  mystery  as  the  very  close  relationships  be- 
tween animal  and  plant  species  on  the  Galapagos  and  the  continent  are  most 
striking  and  unquestionable,  while  other  species  on  both  mainland  and  islands 
are  identical.  If  the  origin  of  life  in  the  Galapagos  is  placed  as  far  back  as 
the  early  Tertiary,  then  it  seems  impossible  to  understand  the  much  lower  de- 
gree of  speciation  and  specialization  of  the  terrestrial  organisms  on  the  Gala- 
pagos in  comparison  with  those  on  Juan  Fernandez,  especially  as  the  more 
favorable  climate  produces  a  higher  turnover  of  genetic  material.  One  would 
therefore  expect  to  find  an  even  greater  difference  in  species  between  the  Ga- 
lapagos and  the  mainland  than  between  Juan  Fernandez  and  the  continent.    If 


94  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

I  might  be  permitted  to  express  a  personal  view,  I  would  say  without  much 
hesitation  after  having  studied  my  own  group  of  the  fauna  of  all  the  islands, 
and  making  the  considerable  assumption  that  one  can  extrapolate  from  this 
group,  that  the  Galapagos'  fauna  is  considerably  younger  than  that  of  Juan 
Fernandez  and  the  Desventuradas.  I  would  also  say  that  the  fauna  of  these 
last  two  remote  groups  of  islands  mostly  dates  back  to  the  Eocene  and  part  of 
of  the  Oligocene,  while  the  Galapagos  fauna,  including  the  terrestrial  verte- 
brates, might  go  back  only  to  the  Pliocene  or,  even,  to  the  end  of  the  Plio- 
cene and  to  the  Pleistocene. 

Summary 

After  a  brief  description  of  Easter  Island,  Juan  Fernandez,  the  Desven- 
turadas, and  the  Galapagos,  there  follows  a  general  account  of  the  terrestrial 
faunas  and  their  relationships  with  other  biogeographic  regions.  All  the  base- 
ment rock  now  visible  on  the  islands  is  volcanic  and  young  in  geological  time, 
probably  of  the  late  Pliocene. 

The  incidence  of  endemisms  in  species,  genera,  and  even  higher  sys- 
tematic categories  is  considerably  more  in  Juan  Fernandez  and  the  Desven- 
turadas than  in  the  Galapagos  and  it  is  concluded  that  most  of  the  life  on  these 
former  groups  is  of  more  ancient  origin  than  in  the  Galapagos.  Geological  evi- 
dence suggests  that  during  the  Eocene  there  existed  between  parallels  38  and 
45  along  what  is  now  the  coast  of  Chile,  an  extension  of  the  land  surface 
which  probably  embraced  Juan  Fernandez  and  the  Desventuradas.  The  struc- 
ture of  the  basement  rocks  of  these  islands  consisting  of  basalts  and  tuffs, 
also  the  small  degree  of  erosion  and  denudation  of  the  islands,  do  not  indicate 
an  age  earlier  than  Pliocene  for  these  two  groups  of  islands.  It  is  concluded 
that  the  last  remnants  of  Briiggen's  "Land  of  Juan  Fernandez"  can  only  have 
disappeared  finally  beneath  the  sea  in  very  recent  times  and  this  supposition 
is  sufficient  to  explain  the  presence  of  the  younger  elements  of  the  flora  and 
fauna  on  these  islands. 

The  date  of  the  origin  of  life  on  the  Galapagos  is  still  an  open  field  for 
speculation  for,  while  sea  bottom  soundings  have  provided  no  evidence  for  the 
presence  of  emerged  land  of  any  sort  between  the  continent  and  islands  dur- 
ing the  late  Tertiary,  the  greater  part  of  the  Galapagos  fauna,  if  not  all  of  it, 
is  relatively  young. 


No.  44)  KUSCHEL:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  95 

Literature  Cited 


Bruggen,  J. 

1950.  Fundamentos    de    la   Geologia   de    Chile.      Santiago,    ed.    2,   pp.  1-510,    il- 

lustr.    and  maps. 

Shumway,  G. 

1954.  Carnegie    Ridge    and   Cocos   Ridge    in   the    east   equatorial  Pacific.     Jour- 

nal  of  Geology,  vol.  62,  pp.   573-586. 
SKOTTSBERG,    C.      ED. 

1920-1956.  History  of  Juan  Fernandez  and  Easter  Island,  3  vols.,  688  pp.  Upp- 
sala,  Almquisl  &   Wiksells   Boktryckeri-A.-B. 

SKOTTSBERG,  C. 

1949.  Die  Flora  der  Desventuradas  Inseln  (SanFelix  und  San  Ambrosio),  Goete- 
borgs  Kungl.  Vetenskapoch  Vitterh  els-Sam  ha  ell  esHandlingar-Femte 
Foeljden,  Ser.  B,  vol.  6,  p.  3-88,  1937.  (Spanish  edition  in  Boletin 
Museo  Nacional  de  Historia  Natural,  Santiago,   vol.  24,  pp.  1-64. 

1945.         The    Juan    Fernandez    and    Desventuradas    islands,    in   Plants    and    Plant 
Science     in     Latin     America,     Waltham,     Massachusetts,     p.     150-153. 

1951.  Weitere    Beitraege    zur    Flora    der   Insel    San    Ambrosio     (Islas    Desventur- 

adas,   Chile),    Arkiv  for  Botanik,   ser.   2,   vol.    1,  no.    12,  pp.   453-459. 
1957.         The   vegetation  of  the   Juan   Fernandez    and  Desventuradas  Islands.   Pro- 
ceedings  of  the   8th   Pacific   Science    Congress,   vol.4,   pp.l81-185» 


THE  MARINE  SHORE-FISHES 
OF  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS* 

Richard  H.  Rosenblatt 

Scripps  Institution  of  Oceanography 
La  Jolla,   California 

and 
Boyd  W.  Walker 

Department  of  Zoology 
University  of  California 
Los  Angeles,    California 


Introduction 

The  Galapagos  Islands  have  long  been  of  interest  to  biologists  as  a  na- 
tural laboratory  for  the  study  of  the  effects  of  isolation  on  the  evolution  of  ter- 
restrial organisms.  It  has  perhaps  not  been  so  clearly  understood  that  the  650 
miles  of  deep  water  separating  the  Galapagos  from  the  South  \merican  main- 
land forms  a  barrier  to  the  dispersal  of  shore-dwelling  marine  organisms  as 
well.  An  analysis  of  the  fish  fauna  indicates  that  the  barrier  has  been  effec- 
tive. The  material  presented  here  is  based  on  a  manuscript  checklist  of  Gal- 
apagos fishes,  compiled  from  a  critical  review  of  the  literature,  a  re-examin- 
ation of  much  of  the  previously  existing  material,  and  records  from  recent  col- 
lections. Owing  to  the  changes  necessary,  our  analysis  is  quite  different 
from  any  based  on  published  lists  (Snodgrass  and  Heller,  1905;  Fowler,  1938). 

The  Environment 

The  Galapagos  Archipelago  is  a  group  of  oceanic  islands,  consisting  of 
13  principal  islands  and  a  host  of  islets  and  rocks,  lying  some  650  miles  west 
of  Ecuador.  The  main  portion  of  the  archipelago  is  located  between  the  equa- 
tor and  1°5'  South  latitude.  Two  small  islands,  Culpepper  and  Wenman,  are 
separated  by  some  80  miles  from  the  main  body  of  the  group.  These,  and  a 
group  of  three  small  islands  lying  some  30  miles  from  the  main  group,  are  sep- 
arated from  the  major  islands  by  deep  water.  The  largest  island,  Albemarle,  is 
about  80  miles  long  by  30  miles  wide,  but  the  others  are  considerably  smaller. 


•  Presented   at   the   TENTH   PACIFIC   SCIENCE   CONGRESS   of  the   Pacific   Science 

Association,    held   at  the   University  of  Hawaii,   Honolulu,   Hawaii,    U.S.A.,    21    August 
to   6   September  1961,    and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,    and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

-97- 


98  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

The  Galapagos  are  volcanic  in  origin,  and  geological  opinion  seems  to 
favor  the  interpretation  that  they  have  never  been  connected  with  the  main- 
land. Fossils  of  Pliocene  age  have  been  found,  but  the  group  is  probably  con- 
siderably older. 

As  might  be  suspected  from  their  volcanic  origin,  the  Galapagos  Islands 
are  characterized  by  rocky  shores,  although  sand  and  coral-gravel  beaches 
are  present.  The  bottom  sediments  at  moderate  depths  are  predominantly  coarse. 
The  Albatross  and  Velero  station  records  indicate  that  the  bottom  is  sand, 
rocks,  or  coral  at  almost  all  stations.  Only  once  was  mud  encountered,  at  70- 
80  fathoms  off  Daphne  Minor  Island  (Townsend,  1901,  Fraser,  1943). 
The  Galapagos  Islands  lie  in  the  South  Equatorial  Current,  which  is  composed 
mainly  of  cold  Peru  Current  water,  but  with  a  component  of  warm  water  from 
the  Equatorial  Countercurrent  to  the  north  (fig.  1).  The  heterogeneous  devia- 
tion of  the  waters  bathing  the  Galapagos  causes  great  variability  in  tempera- 
ture. Differences  of  5°  C.  (Beebe,  1924)  and  11°  C.  (Garth,  1946)  have  been 
reported  for  the  two  sides  of  Albemarle  Island.  At  irregular  intervals,  the  so- 
called  "El  Niiio"  years,  the  Peru  Current  is  deflected  far  to  the  west  of  South 
America.  Warm  water  from  Central  America  then  sweeps  far  to  the  south  and 
causes  extensive  warming,  causing  fish  kills  along  the  Peruvian  coast.  At 
these  times,  the  tropical  component  in  the  waters  surrounding  the  Galapagos 
must  be  greatly  increased  (Schott,  1931;  Posner,  1957).  Fourteen  such  El  Nino 
years  have  been  recorded  since  1791,  the  most  recent  being  in  1958. 

It  is  unfortunate  that  no  systematic  oceanographic  work  has  been  done 
at  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Little  or  nothing  is  known  of  short- or  long-term  fluc- 
tuations in  temperature,  and  nothing  is  known  of  variability  from  island  to  is- 
land. 

Composition  of  the  Fish  Fauna 

The  marine  fish  fauna  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  is  in  large  part  typical 
of  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific  faunal  region,  but  it  is  characterized  by  a  high 
degree  of  endemism  among  the  shore  species.  Twenty-three  per  cent  of  the 
shore  forms  are  confined  to  these  islands.  This  endemism,  plus  significant 
elements  from  the  transitional  fauna  between  thePanamic  and  Chilean  faunas, 
and  from  the  western  Pacific,  distinguish  the  Galapagos  fauna  as  a  separate 
subunit  of  the  Panamic  faunal  province. 

The  fish  fauna  of  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific  region  (American  Pacific 
Warm-Water  Region  of  Ekman,  1953)  is  characterized  by  a  high  degree  of  en- 
demism at  the  species  level.  With  the  exception  of  the  circumtropical  species 
(Briggs,  1961),  most  of  which  are  pelagic,  almost  all  of  the  species  found  in 
this  area  are  limited  to  it. 

Owing  to  the  influence  ofthe  cold  Peru  and  California  currents,  the  ex- 
tent of  the  tropical  regions  is  much  curtailed  on  the  western  side  of  the  Amer- 
icas. The  limits  of  the  tropical  fauna  are  at  about  25° N.  latitude  on  the  outer 


No.  44) 


ROSENBLATT  &  WALKER:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


99 


T 


10= 


0° 


10= 


^ 


WINTER 


.NORTH   EQUATORIAL  CURRENT 


COST/i 
RICA 


\TO^I 


EQUATORIAL   COUNTERCURRENT 

^ ^ 


SOUTH    EQUATORIAL  CURRENT 
GALAPAGOS  'V 


^^ 


PERU 


120= 


^ 


SUMMER 


10' 


>7 


■^EQUATORIAL   COUNTERCURRENT     J"  J 


^;A\   t^..  COSTA 


RICA 


0= 


SOUTH   EQUATORIAL  CURRENT 

GALAPAGOS'^'-' 


10' 


^    %PERU 


Figure    1.         Current   systems   in    the    vicinity   of   the    Galapagos    Islands.        (After 
Schott,1931   and   Cromwell   and   Bennett,    1959). 

coast  of  Baja  California  and  about  5°S.  on  the  Peruvian  coast.  This  is  in 
marked  contrast  to  the  situation  in  the  western  Atlantic,  where  the  boundaries 
of  the  tropical  region  are  at  about  35°  N.  and  35°  S. 

The  eastern  tropical  Pacific  fauna  is  relatively  depauperate  in  compar- 
ison with  other  tropical  regions.  Probably  only  the  west  African  fauna  is  poor- 
er (Ekman,  1953,  p.  56).  This  fauna  is,  however,  characterized  by  a  great  de- 
velopment of  fishes  characteristic  of  muddy  or  sandy  bottoms.  The  families 
Engraulididae  (anchovies),  Ariidae  (marine  catfishes),  and  Sciaenidae  (croak- 
ers) are  particularly  well  developed.  In  contrast,  the  fishes  primarily  adapted 


100  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

to  coral  reefs  are  very  poorly  represented.  This  impoverishment  is  especially 
pronounced  in  the  Labridae  (wrasses),  Chaetodontidae  (butterflyfishes),  Scar- 
idae  (parrotfishes),  and  Acanthuridae  (surgeonfishes). 

The  relationships  of  the  fishes  of  the  eastern  tropical  Pacific  lie  main- 
ly with  the  western  Atlantic  fauna.  A  very  large  number  of  genera  are  limited 
to  the  New  World  tropics.  This  relationship  carries  through  on  a  suprageneric 
level  as  well.  The  blennioid  family  Chaenopsidae  (Stephens,  MS)  is  found  on- 
ly in  this  region,  as  is  the  trachinoid  family  Dactyloscopidae  (stargazers.  In 
addition,  the  atherinid  (silverside)  subfamily  Atherinopsinae  (of  Jordan  and 
Hubbs,  1919)  is  restricted  to  the  New  World,  as  is  the  gobiesocid  (clingfish) 
subfamily  Gobiesocinae.  The  clinid  subfamily  Labrisominae  has  a  similar 
distribution,  except  for  two  obviously  derivative  forms  found  in  west  Africa, 

This  basic  unity  of  the  American  fish  fauna  (which  led  Ekman,  1953,  p.  30, 
to  term  it  the  Atlanto-East  Pacific  Fauna)  is  due  to  the  presence  of  a  Tertiary 
Central  American  water  gap  (Durham  and  Allison,  1960).  During  the  existence 
of  this  connection  the  faunas  on  the  two  sides  of  the  Americas  must  have  been 
very  similar,  although  probably  not  identical.  The  differences  which  we  see 
now  are  due  in  large  part  to  differentiation  since  the  destruction  of  the  water 
gap,  and  some  migration  into  the  eastern  Pacific  by  Indo-West  Pacific  species. 

The  Galapagos  ichthyofauna  is  relatively  large  as  compared  with  that 
of  the  other  oceanic  islands  of  the  eastern  Pacific.  This  enrichment  is  es- 
pecially noteworthy  in  the  Serranidae  and  in  certain  families  that  are  charac- 
teristic of  sandy  shores,  such  as  the  Gerridae,  Pomadasyidae,  and  Sciaenidae. 
We  record  269  species  from  88  families.  Seventy-five  percent  are  shore  forms 
and  twenty-five  per  cent  are  pelagic  or  coastal  pelagic.  The  few  deep  sea 
forms  that  have  been  taken  near  the  Galapagos  Islands  are  not  considered. 

Most  of  the  species  found  on  the  Galapagos  (60  per  cent)  are  found  at 
other  localities  in  the  eastern  Pacific,  but  their  ranges  do  not  extend  else- 
where. By  far  the  largest  segment  of  these  (53  percent  of  the  total  fauna)  are 
eastern  tropical  Pacific  endemics,  and  most  are  forms  ranging  widely  through- 
out the  region.  This  large  segment  would  seem  to  determine  the  proper  affini- 
ties of  the  fauna.  Eight  per  cent  are  pantropic.  There  is  small  but  notable 
representation  (six  per  cent  of  the  total  fauna)  of  forms  characteristic  of  the 
transitional  fauna  between  the  Panamic  and  Chilean  regions.  The  presence 
of  these  forms  indicates  the  profound  effect  of  the  Peru  Current  on  these  es- 
sentially equatorial  islands.  Less  than  two  per  cent  of  the  species  are  in 
common  with  the  Atlantic  and  these  are  also  found  in  other  eastern  tropical 
Pacific  localities.  Only  five  species  (about  two  per  cent)  are  found  only  on 
the  Galapagos  and  other  eastern  tropical  Pacific  offshore  islands. 

Endemism 

Eighteen  per  cent  of  the  species  are  endemic  but  only  one  of  these  (a 
flying  fish  of  doubtful  validity)  is  pelagic.   The  endemism  is  largely  confined 


No.  44)  ROSENBLATT  &  WALKER:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  101 

to  the  shore  fishes;  twenty-three  per  cent  of  these  forms  are  peculiar  to  the 
Galapagos.  Further,  endemism  is  not  evenly  distributed  between  families. 
Over  a  third  of  the  families  with  endemic  species  have  two  or  more  such  forms. 
And  the  number  of  endemics  does  not  correlate  with  the  family  representation. 
The  Serranidae  (basses)  and  the  Carangidae  (jacks)  are  the  largest  families; 
each  has  17  representatives.  There  are  but  three  endemic  serranids,  and  all 
of  the  carangids  have  been  taken  elsewhere.  The  pomacentrids  (demoiselles) 
are  the  next  most  speciose  group  with  nine  representatives,  but  only  one  of 
these  is  limited  to  the  Galapagos  group.  There  are  seven  labrids  (wrasses), 
but  all  have  been  taken  elsewhere.  On  the  other  hand,  three  of  the  five  sciae- 
nids  (croakers)  are  endemic,  as  are  five  of  the  nine  pomadasyids  (grunts)  and 
clinids  (klipfishes). 

This  difference  in  degree  of  differentiation  correlates  with  a  differen- 
tial in  vagility.  Carangids  are  strong  swimmers,  and  many  live  pelagically. 
Serranid  larvae  are  well  suited  to  pelagic  life  (Smith,  1959),  and  at  least  some 
have  special  modifications  for  it.  Pomacentrids  also  have  a  pelagic  prejuven- 
ile  (Hubbs,  1958)  stage  in  their  life  history.  There  is  no  evidence  that  the 
labrids  have  a  long  larval  period,  but  many  of  the  forms  are  crevice  dwellers 
and  nibblers,  and  thus  would  seem  eminently  suited  to  rafting. 

The  sciaenids  and  pomadasyids  are,  on  the  other  hand,  mostly  charac- 
teristic of  shallow  waters  in  muddy  or  sandy  bays  and  along  open  sandy  beach- 
es. Larvae  of  these  groups  are  almost  never  taken  in  offshore  collections,  and 
very  small  juveniles  are  found  schooling  near  the  bottom. 

Clinids  are  small,  demersal  fishes  of  rocky  reefs.  The  adults  are  sed- 
entary, their  eggs  are  usually  demersal,  and  the  larval  period  is  short.  Forms 
with  this  type  of  life  history  are  poor  candidates  for  transport  by  currents.  The 
one  clinid  which  seems  to  be  completely  undifferentiated  (Labrisomus  multi- 
porosus)  has  the  widest  geographic  distribution  of  any  Pacific  species  in  the 
genus,  and  also  seems  to  have  a  longer  larval  life  than  is  usual  for  the  group 
(Hubbs,  1953). 

Most  of  the  endemic  species  of  the  Galapagos  are  strongly  differentia- 
ted from  their  congeners.  It  is  thus  difficult  to  pinpoint  any  mainland  species 
as  a  sibling  or  possible  ancestor.  It  is  possible,  however,  to  determine  the 
group  (usually  generic)  to  which  the  Galapagos  forms  are  most  closely  related. 
When  the  data  was  analyzed  in  this  fashion  we  find  that  of  the  46  Galapagos 
endemics,  34  are  most  closely  related  to  eastern  tropical  Pacific  species. 
Five  are  related  to  forms  characteristic  of  the  Peruvian-Chilean  warm  temper- 
ate, two  are  derived  from  Indo-West  Pacific  groups,  and  one  is  allied  to  a 
west  Atlantic  species.  The  relationships  of  three  were  too  questionable  to  in- 
clude. This  is  in  general  accord  with  the  overall  composition  of  the  Galapagos 
ichthyofauna. 


102  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

Analysis  of  Faunal  Relationships 

The  Galapagos  are  not  particularly  close  faunistically  to  the  other  east- 
ern Pacific  oceanic  islands,  Cocos,  Clipperton,  and  the  Islas  Revillagigedo. 
It  is  true  that  their  faunas  have  certain  common  characteristics  as  opposed  to 
that  of  the  adjacent  mainland  areas.  They  are  rich  (for  this  area)  in  pelagic 
types  and  in  Indo-West  Pacific  species,  relatively  rich  in  rocky  shore  forms, 
and  poor  in  sandy  shore  and  muddy  bottom  forms—that  is,  they  are  unbalanced. 
In  addition  the  endemics  tend  to  show  certain  parallel  modifications.  We  do 
not  feel  that  these  similarities  imply  any  real  relationship  however.  The  rela- 
tive faunal  imbalance  reflects  two  factors.  One  is  the  deep  water  between  the 
islands  and  the  mainland,  which  acts  as  a  filter  bridge  which  excludes  a  large 
number  of  species.  The  other  is  the  nature  of  the  insular  environment,  where 
deep  waters  are  found  close  to  the  shore,  and  the  bottom  tends  to  be  mostly 
rocky.  In  the  same  way  the  parallel  morphological  modifications  toward  more 
terete  bodies,  longer  fins,  and  an  increase  in  number  and  length  of  gill-rakers 
can  be  ascribed  to  adaptation  to  the  island  environment. 

Snodgrass  and  Heller  (1905)  listed  seven  forms  which  occurred  at  two 
or  more  of  the  islands,  and  termed  them  "Eastern  Pacific  Insular  species." 
Further  collecting  indicates  that  the  ranges  of  four:  Prionurus  laticlavius, 
Melichthys  radula,  Halichoeres  nicholsi,  and  Lutjanus  viridis,  extend  to  the 
mainland.  Pomacentrus  leucorus  is  restricted  to  the  Revillagigedo  Islands 
and  is  replaced  at  Isla  del  Coco  and  the  Galapagos  by  Pomacentrus  beebei 
(Loren  P.  Woods,  personal  communication).  Pomacentrus  arcifrons  and  Apogon 
atradorsata  still  are  known  only  from  the  Galapagos  and  Isla  del  Coco. 

The  presence  of  these  three  species  on  Cocos  and  the  Galapagos  indi- 
cates that  there  must  have  been  some  faunal  transfer  in  the  recent  past.  It  is 
almost  certain  that  these  species  originated  on  Cocos  Island,  since  transport 
is  possible  only  south  from  Cocos. 

The  15  species  derived  from  the  warm  temperate  fauna  of  Peru  and  Chile 
represent  an  element  not  found  on  the  other  islands.     The  presence  of  these 
species  and  the  five  endemics  with  their  affinities  in  this  area  is  related  to 
the  Peru  Current  which  flows  from  the  mainland  toward  the  Galapagos. 

Of  the  24  Indo-West  Pacific  forms  in  the  Galapagos  fauna  (9  per  cent) 
only  two  have  not  been  found  at  other  localities  in  the  eastern  tropical  Paci- 
fic. However,  one  of  these  is  a  burrowing  eel,  otherwise  known  only  from  the 
type  locality,  and  the  other  is  a  pelagic  flying  fish  which  likely  has  a  wider 
eastern  Pacific  distribution.  Of  the  remaining  22,  4  are  found  only  on  the  other 
oceanic  islands  and  18  are  found  on  the  mainland  as  well.  Although  the  abso- 
lute numbers  of  Indo-Pacific  forms  are  about  the  same  at  the  Galapagos  and 
the  mainland,  these  species  form  a  more  conspicuous  element  in  the  depau- 
perate Galapagos  fauna. 

As  might  be  expected,  most  of  these  Indo-West  Pacific  forms  are  well 


No.  44)  ROSENBLATT  &  WALKER:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  103 

adapted  to  transport  by  currents.  Of  the  24  forms,  7  have  long  pelagic  larval 
stages  and  12  are  pelagic  as  adults  as  well.  Five  others  are  well  suited  to 
rafting,  by  accompanying  floating  debris.  The  two  remaining  forms  are  a  labrid 
(wrasse)  and  a  scarid  (parrot  fish).  Little  is  known  of  the  early  life  history 
of  these  groups,  but  both  the  young  and  adults  are  nibblers  and  known  to 
frequent  areas  of  algal  growth.  Thus  they  might  be  good  candidates  for  trans- 
port by  rafting.  These  conclusions  are  in  general  agreement  with  those  of 
Briggs  (1961)  and  Hubbs  and  Rosenblatt  (manuscript). 

The  evidence  indicates  that  there  has  been  little,  if  any,  direct  inva- 
sion of  the  Galapagos  Islands  from  the  west.  Only  two  currents  impinge  on 
the  Galapagos  Islands.  The  flow  of  the  South  Equatorial  Current  is  to  the  west. 
The  recently  discovered  Cromwell  Current  flows  from  west  to  east,  but  it  is 
an  undercurrent  and  may  well  be  too  deep  to  be  of  any  use  to  the  larvae  or 
young  of  offshore  forms  (Knauss,  1960,  and  personal  communication).  Clipper- 
ton  and  Cocos  islands,  which  are  far  to  the  north  in  the  path  of  the  east-flow- 
ing Equatorial  Countercurrent,  have  several  Indo-Pacific  species  which  have 
not  been  taken  elsewhere  in  the  eastern  Pacific.  If  the  Cromwell  Current  were 
indeed  carrying  trans-Pacific  migrants,  it  might  be  expected  that  the  Galapa- 
gos Islands  would  have  a  similar  number  of  such  forms  not  found  elsewhere. 
This  expectation  is  heightened  by  the  prevailing  current  which  flows  strongly 
away  from  the  mainland.  The  opposite  is,  of  course,  the  case.  All  but  two  of 
the  western  Pacific  migrants  found  at  the  Galapagos  occur  at  other  eastern 
Pacific  localities. 

The  distributional  data  and  the  known  current  patterns  in  the  eastern 
Pacific  thus  indicate  that  the  Galapagos  received  its  Indo-Pacific  elements 
secondarily  from  the  mainland  and  Clipperton  and  Cocos  islands.  During  De- 
cember, January,  and  February  there  is  a  southwest  flow  of  water  from  the 
"Panama  Bight"  into  the  South  Equatorial  Current  (Cromwell  and  Bennett, 
1959).  The  possibility  for  transport  would  be  much  greater  during  El  Nino 
years,  when  the  flow  of  warm  water  from  the  north  is  much  greater  (Schott, 
1931;  Posner,  1957). 

Garth  (1946)  distinguished  a  Gulf  of  California  element  in  the  brachy- 
uran  crab  fauna.  To  explain  the  uniquely  known  occurrence  at  the  Galapagos, 
and  in  the  Gulf  of  California,  of  11  species  of  crabs,  he  found  it  necessary  to 
invoke  a  drastic  alteration  in  the  current  systems  of  the  Pacific.  More  recent- 
ly (Garth,  1960),  this  was  considered  part  of  a  general  eastern  Pacific  island 
relationship.  As  we  have  indicated  earlier,  we  find  no  such  relationships  in 
the  fishes.  Further,  we  see  no  reason  to  expect  them.  The  juggling  of  ocean 
currents  to  explain  distribution  patterns  is  as  fraught  with  hazards  as  the  erec- 
tion of  land  bridges,  and  should  be  approached  with  equal  circumspection.  It 
seems  probable  that  intensive  collecting  efforts  along  the  mainland  coast 
would  reduce  considerably  the  number  of  species  known  only  from  the  Gulf 
and  the  Galapagos. 


104  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ  Papers 

Another  concept  in  need  of  re-examination  is  that  of  the  Galapagos  ori- 
gin of  certain  Central  American  species.  The  burden  of  Garth's  argument  was 
that  a  species  now  occurring  at  Galapagos  and  Central  America,  but  without 
an  Atlantic  analogue,  must  have  evolved  at  the  Galapagos.  Its  absence  from 
the  Atlantic  is  evidence  that  it  did  not  invade  the  Central  American  mainland 
until  after  the  closure  of  the  Central  American  water  gap. 

However,  the  postulate  that  the  western  Atlantic  and  eastern  Pacific 
had  completely  common  faunas  during  the  existence  of  a  connection  between 
the  Atlantic  and  Pacific  is  not  compelling.  Certainly  the  connection  was  a 
shallow  one,  and  probably  muddy  (Schuchert,  1935).  Such  a  connection  might 
be  of  little  use  to  a  species  restricted  to  the  rocky  shore  habitat.  And  these 
are  the  species  which  should  be  particularly  suited  to  life  at  the  Galapagos, 
where  rocky  habitat  predominates. 

The  fauna  of  the  Gulf  of  California  indicates  that  continuity  of  coast- 
line in  itself  does  not  indicate  faunal  homogeneity.  Certainly  the  Gulf  is  in 
communication  with  the  rest  of  the  Pacific  and  yet  there  are  endemic  species 
of  fishes  and  crabs,  and  a  number  of  Panamic  species  are  missing  (Walker, 
1960;  Garth,  1960).  One  could  also  point  to  the  existence  of  a  large  number 
of  Central  American  species  of  fishes  which  have  no  Atlantic  analogs  and 
which  are  not  found  at  the  Galapagos  or  any  other  oceanic  island.  If  they  did 
not  use  the  Central  American  water  gap,  or  if  they  evolved  subsequent  to  its 
closure,  may  this  also  not  be  true  of  those  species  which  are  found  at  the 
Galapagos?  This  line  of  reasoning  does  not  prove  that  the  Galapagos  have 
not  been  the  center  of  origin  of  certain  Central  American  species,  but  we  be- 
lieve it  indicates  that  the  evidence  for  such  an  origin  is  not  strong. 


Literature    Cited 


Beebe,  William 

1924.  Galapagos:  world's  end.  G.P.Putnam's  Sons,  New  York,  xxi+443  pp., 
frontis,   pis.    1-8. 

Briggs,  John  C. 

1961.  The  East  Pacific  Barrier  and  the  distribution  of  marine  shore  fishes. 
Evolution,  vol.   15,  no.   4,   pp.  545-554. 

Cromwell,  T.,  and  E.  B.  Bennett 

1959.  Surface  drift  charts  for  the  Eastern  Tropical  P  acific  Ocean.  Inter-Amer- 
ican Tropical  Tuna  Commiss  ion,  Bulletin,  vol.  3,  no.  5,  pp.  217-235 
(English):  pp.  236-238  (Spanish). 


No.  44)  ROSENBLATT  &  WALKER:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  105 

Durham,  J.  W.,  and  E.G.  Allison 

I960.  The  geologic  history  of  Baja  California  and  its  marine  faunas.  System- 
atic  Zoology,  vol.   9,  no.  2,  pp.   47-91. 

Ekman,  Sven 

1953.  Zoogeography  of  the  sea.  Sidgwick  and  Jackson,  Ltd.,  London,  xiv  + 
417  pp. 

Fowler,  Henry  W. 

1938.  The  fishes  of  the  George  Vanderbilt  South  Pacific  Expedition,  1937. 
Academy  of  Natural  Science  of  Philadelphia,  Monograph  no.  2,  v  + 
342  pp.,  pis.    1-12. 

Fraser,  C.  McLean 

1943.         General   account  ofthe  scientific   work  of  the      Velero  III     in  the   eastern 
Pacific,    1931-41.   Part   111.      A   ten-year  list   of  the     Velero  III     col- 
lecting   stations.   Allan   Hancock   Pacific   Expeditions,    vol.    1,   no.   3, 
pp.   259-431,   charts   1-115. 
Garth,  John  S. 

1946.  Distribution  studies  of  Galapagos  Brachyura.  Allan  Hancock  Pacific 
Expeditions,  vol.  5,   no.    11,   pp.   603-638,   charts   1-10. 

1960.  Distribution  and  affinities  of  the  brachyuran  Crustacea.  Systematic 
Zoology,  vol.   9,  no.   3,   pp.    100-123. 

HuBBS,  Carl  L. 

1958.  Dikellorhynchus  and  Kanazawaichthys:  nominal   fish   genera   interpreted 

as    based   on   prejuveniles   of  Malacanthus  and   Antennarius,    respec- 
tively,    Copeia,  no.  4,  pp.   282-285. 

HuBBS,  Clark 

1953.  Revision  of  the  eastern  Pacific  fishes  of  the  clinid  genus  Labrisomus. 
Zoologica,  New  York  Zoological  Society,   vol.  3  8,   pt.  3,  pp.  113-136. 

Jordan,  D.  S.,  and  C.  L.  Hubbs 

1919.  Studies  in  ichthyology:  A  monographic  review  of  the  family  Atherinidae 
or  silversides.  Leland  Stanford  Junior  University  Publications, 
University  Series,  pp.    1-87,    12  pis. 

Knauss,  J. 

1960.         Measurements    of  the   Cromwell   Current.   Deep   Sea   Research,    vol.   6,   no. 

4,  pp.  265-286. 
Posner,  G.  S. 

1957.         The    Peru    Current.      Bulletin   of   the    Bingham   Oceanographic    Collection, 

vol.   16,   no.   2,  pp.    106-155. 

Schott,  G. 

1931.         Der    Peru-Strom    und    seine    nbrdlichen,    Nachbargebie te   in    normaler  und 
anorm  aler  ■  Ausbildung.         Annalen    der    Hydrographie    und    Marltimen 
Meteorologie,   vol.   59,   pp.    161-169,   200-213,  240-257,  pis.    17-22. 
Schuchert,  C. 

1935.  Historical  geology  of  the  Antillean-Caribbean  region  or  the  lands  bor- 
dering the  Gulf  of  Mexico  and  the  Caribbean  Sea.  John  Wiley,  New 
York,   811   pp. 

Smith,  C.  L.,  Jr. 

1959.  A    revision   of  the    American   groupers   {Epinephelus   and    related   genera). 

Microfilm-Xerox    copy    of   Ph.D.    thesis.    University    of   Michigan,    xiv 
+  563  pp. 


106  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 


Snodgrass,  R.  E.,  and  E.  Heller 

1905.  Shore  fishes  of  the  Re villagigedo,  Clipperton,  Cocos  and  Galapagos  Is- 
lands. Proceedings  ofthe  Washington  Academy  of  Sciences,  vol.  6, 
pp.  333-427. 

TOWNSEND,   C.   H. 

1901.         Dredging  and  other  records    ofthe    United  States   Fish   Commission  Steam- 
er  Albatross,    with   bibliography   relative    to   the    work    of   the    vessel. 
United    States    Commission    of    Fish    and    Fisheries,    Commissioners 
Report  for  1900,  pp.  387-562,   pi.    1-7. 
WALKER,   BOYD  W. 

1960.  The  distribution  and  affinities  of  the  marine  fish  fauna  of  the  Gulf  of 
California.     Systematic    Zoology,   vol.  9,   no.   3,  pp.    123-133. 


EVOLUTIONARY  PATTERNS 
IN  DARWIN'S  FINCHES  ♦ 

Robert  I.  Bowman 

Department  of  Biology 

San  Francisco  State  College 

San  Francisco,   California 


Introduction 

Darwin's  finches  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  l  represent  one  of  the  best 
known  groups  of  Galapagoan  animals.  Indeed,  they  are  famous  out  of  all  pro- 
portion to  their  size  because  of  their  remarkable  degree  of  adaptive  radiation 
in  feeding  habits  and  associated  structures  —  perhaps  one  of  the  best  exam- 
ples of  this  phenomenon  in  the  class  Aves  (fig.  1).  Furthermore,  many  of  the 
species  show  such  an  unusual  range  of  variation  in  structure  that  to  the  cas- 
ual observer  there  would  seem  to  be  a  nearly  continuous  intergradation  of 
forms  (fig.  2).  It  was  this  very  fact  which  greatly  impressed  the  young  Charles 
Darwin  when,  in  1835,  he  first  encountered  these  birds  in  their  native  habitat. 
In  his  "Journal  of  Researches,"  second  edition  (1845),  he  wrote:  "Seeing 
this  gradation  and  diversity  of  structure  in  one  small,  intimately  related  group 
of  birds,  one  might  really  fancy  that  from  an  original  paucity  of  birds  in  this 
archipelago,   one  species  had  been  taken  and  modified  for  different  ends." 

Patterns  of  evolution  in  Darwin's  finches  are,  fundamentally,  adapta- 
tions to  the  environment.  In  the  past  it  has  been  customary  to  explain  evolu- 
tion as  largely  or  entirely  determined  by  factors  of  the  external  environment 
acting  through  selection.  Until  fairly  recently  much  less  attention  has  been 
paid  to  the  inherent  properties  and  potentialities  of  peculiar  genetic  systems, 
which  are  the  limiting  factors  of  the  organism's  internal  environment  (Mayr, 
1945;  White,  1948).  Surely,  all  evolutionary  patterns  result  from  the  opportun- 
istic interaction  of  factors  of  the  external  environment  and  genetic  systems. 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.S.  A.,  21  August 
to  6  September  1961,   and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,  and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

1    One  species  of  Darwin's  finch,  the  honeycreeper-finch  (Pinaroloxias  inornata),  resides  only 
on  Cocos  Island,   Costa  Rica.     It  is,  unquestionably,  a  member  of  the  Geospizinae  subfamily  of 
fringillid  finches.  (See  Swarth,  1931.) 

-  107- 


108 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Figure  1.    The  pattern  of  adaptive  radiation  in  Darwin's  finches. 


Figure  2.  Variations  in  shape  of  bill  in  14  species  of  Geospizinae.  A,  Geospiza  magni- 
rostris  (Tower  Island);  B,  Geospiza  magnirostris  (James  Island);  C,  Geospiza  conirostris  (Hood 
Island);  D,  Geospiza  fortis  (Albemarle  Island);  E,  Geospiza  conirostris  (Gardner-near-Hood  Is- 
land); F,  Geospiza  foTtis  (Chatham  Island);  G,  Geospiza /or//s  (Charles  Island);  H,  Geospiza  ful- 
iginosa  (Abingdon  Island);  I,  Geospiza  difficilis  (Indefatigable  Island);  J,  Certhidea  olivacea 
(Indefatigable  Island);  K,  Pinaroloxias  inornata  (Cocos  Island);  L,  Platyspiza  crassirostris 
(Charles  Island);  M,  Camarhynchus  psittacula  (James  Island);  N,  Camarhynchus  psittacula(Bind- 
loe  Island);  O,  Cactospiza  pallida  (Chatham  Island);  P,  Camarhynchus  pauper  (Charles  Island); 
Q,  Camarhynchus  psittacula  (Albemarle  Island);  R,  Camarhynchus  parvulus  (Indefatigable  Is- 
land); S,  Cactospiza  pallida  (James  Island);  T,  Geospiza  scandens  (Abingdon  Island);  U,  Geo- 
spiza scandens  (James  Island);  V,  Geospiza  fuliginosa  (Chatham  Island),    After  Swarth,  1931. 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


109 


A  O 


B  O 


c      O 


D  O 


E        O 


M 


no 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


In  Darwin's  finches  our  study  of  evolutionary  patterns  is,  necessarily, 
restricted  in  fact  to  the  observable  end-products  of  a  long  unrecorded  history: 
There  is,  of  course,  considerable  basis  in  theory  for  a  divergence  of  opinion 
regarding  the  significance  of  the  facts  and  on  the  nature  and  importance  of 
the  biological  processes  involved;  for  example,  the  meaning  of  intraspecific 
variation  in  bill  structure,  the  importance  of  the  chance  factor  ("random  gen- 
etic drift")  in  accounting  for  minor  interisland  differences,  and  the  role  of  in- 
terspecific "competition"  in  shaping  the  feeding  niches  of  sympatric  "sib- 
bling"  species.  It  is  not  surprising,  therefore,  that  several  authors  have  differed 
in  their  biological  interpretation  of  this  remarkable  group  of  birds  (Lowe,  1930, 
and  Stresemann,  1936;  Swarth,  1931,  and  Lack,  1945,  1947;  and  Bowman,  1961). 
We  must  await  the  results  of  many  more  studies,  and  especially  those  of  an 
ecological  and  ethological  nature,  before  our  understanding  of  the  total  biol- 
ogy of  Darwin's  finches  is  anywhere  nearly  complete. 

The  remarks  which  follow  are  concerned  mainly  with  the  results  of  evo- 
lution; that  is,  the  adaptations  by  which  the  Galapagos  finches  appear  to  have 
"solved"    the   problems   of  survival   in  their  particular  insular  environment. 
Some  of  the  views  presented  here  have  been  discussed  more  fully  elsewhere 
(Bowman,  1961). 


^^^^--^^^___^      C^^C^ 


ZONE  WIDTH  AS   A     PERCENT 

OF   TOTAL    LENGTH    OF    TRANSECT 

FROM    ACADEMY    BAY 

TO   HIGHEST    PEAK 


ALTITUDINAL  LIMITS   OF  ZONES 
ALONG    TRANSECT 
(IN  FEET  ABOVE  SEA   LEVEL) 


Figure  3.    Altitudinal  zonation  of  the  vegetation  on  the  south  side  of  Indefatigable  Island, 
from  Academy  Bay  to  the  top.  Diagrammatic. 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  111 

The  Galapagos  Environment 

Basic  to  my  discussion  is  an  understanding  of  the  Galapagos  environ- 
ment, about  which  the  following  facts  are  pertinent. 

The  various  islands  are  remarkably  multiform,  superficial  appearances 
to  the  contrary.  They  differ  in  their  geologic  age  (Chubb,  1933),  size  and  ele- 
vation, and  distance  from  each  other  (table  1).  The  climatic  conditions  in  Gal- 
apagos are  somewhat  anomalous  for  the  tropical  Pacific  Ocean  largely  owing 
to  the  modifying  effects  of  the  cool  Humboldt  Current,  which  surrounds  the  is- 
lands. Whereas  there  are  marked  differences  in  average  precipitation  both  sea- 
sonally and  yearly,  mean  daily  air  temperatures  at  sea-level  vary  only  two  or 
three  degrees  throughout  the  year  (Alpert,  1946). 

Correlated  with  interisland  differences  in  geologic  age,  climatic  expos- 
ure, and  time  of  last  volcanic  activity,  are  the  interisland  dissimilarities  in 
species  composition,  growth-form,  and  relative  abundance  of  the  vegetation 
(table  1),  as  well  as  the  physical  character  of  the  substratum  (color,  amount 
of  soil,  and  mulch). 

As  is  characteristic  of  most  oceanic  islands,  the  flora  and  fauna  are 
depauperate  in  the  sense  that  certain  of  the  typical  mainland  groups  are  ab- 
sent. With  regard  to  the  plants,  an  individual  community  is  not  rich  in  species, 
but  because  of  the  local  diversity  in  topography,  soil,  and  moisture,  there  are 
many  different  plant  communities  within  a  single  island  and  between  the  sev- 
eral islands  (Howell,  1942;  Stewart,  1911,  1915).  In  response  to  the  climatol- 
ogical  and  pedological  features  associated  with  an  increase  in  elevation,  there 
results  an  altitudinal  zonation  of  the  vegetation  on  the  higher  islands.  This 
phenomenon  is  most  clearly  and  elaborately  demonstrated  on  the  south  side  of 
Indefatigable  Island  from  Academy  Bay  inland  (fig.  3).  Close  to  shore  there 
is  an  "Arid  Coastal  Zone"  dominated  by  cacti,  deciduous  shrubs,  and  dwarf 
trees  (fig.  4);  the  general  aspect  is  light  grey  in  color,  except  for  a  pale  green 
cast  during  the  rainy  season.  At  slightly  higher  elevations  there  is  an  open 
forest  growth  called  the  "Transition  Zone"  (fig.  5);  this  is  a  region  of  inter- 
gradation  of  plants  typical  of  the  higher  and  lower  regions.  At  still  greater 
elevations  a  non-deciduous  forest  prevails,  dominated  by  the  tree-composite 
Scalesia  pedunculata  and  a  dense  undergrowth  of  shrubs  (fig.  6).  The  xero- 
phytic  nature  of  the  vegetation  of  the  "Scalesia  Forest  Zone"  is  most  appar- 
ent during  periods  of  drought  (Svenson,  1946).  Above  the  Scalesia  forest  two 
plant  species,  Psidium  galapageium  and  Zanthoxylum  fagara,  retain  their  tree 
stature  and  constitute  the  "Brown  Zone."  Above  the  Brown  Zone  on  Indefat- 
igable Island  there  occurs  a  uniqueshrub  formation  termed  the  "Miconia  Belt," 
about  6  to  10  feet  high,  composed  principally  of  the  fern  Pteridium  sp.  and 
the  endemic  melanostome  shrub  Miconia  robinsoniana  (fig.  8).  The  highest 
peaks  are  treeless  and  densely  vegetated  with  low  growing  herbs  and  ferns, 
constituting  the  "Upland  Zone"  (fig.  7). 


112 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  1.     Distribution  of  13  species  of  Geospizinae  and  comparative  data  on 
16  main  islands  of  the  Galapagos  Archipelago. 


Species 

of 
Geospizinae 

c 

o 
-o 

W) 

c 

IS 

< 

to 

E 
aj 

< 

c 

c 

M 
C 

to 

o 
c 

re 

U 

5 
a 

U 

I- 

ttj 
a, 
a. 
u 
a 

U 

re 
0 
c 

C 

0 
0 

-a 

CO 
M 

a 
c 

OJ 

E 
a 

> 

C 
u 
0 

re 

3 
0 

E 

'Ti 

0 

c 
re 
E 
c 

Geospiza 

magnirostris 

foTtis 

fuliginosa 

difficilis 

scandens 

conirostris 

X 
X 
X 
X 
X 

X 
X 
X 

X 

X 
X 
X 

X 

X 
X 
X 

X 

Xa 

X 

X 

..f 

X 

X 
X 

••g 
X 

Xb 

X 

Xb 

X 
X 
X 

X 

..c 
X 

X 

X 
X 
X 

Xh 
X 

X 
X 
X 
X 
X 

X 
X 
X 

X 

X 
X 
X 

Xi 

X 
X 
X 

X 

X 

..d 

X 
X 

X 

..d 

Xe 

X 

Platyspiza 
crassirostris 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Camarhynchus 
psittacula 
pauper 
parvulus 

X 
X 

X 
X 

X 

X 

X 

X 
X 
X 

..j 

X 

•  • 

X 
X 

•• 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 
X 

Xk 
X 

X 
X 

•  • 

XI 

Cactospiza 
pallida 
heliobates 

■■ 

X 
X 

•• 

•• 

..m 

X 

•  • 

X 

•• 

X 

X 

X 

..n 
X 

X 

•• 

Certhidea 
olivacea 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

.V 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

X 

Total  number 
of  species 

per  island.... 

q 

10 

7 

7 

9 

•7 

4 

9 

3 

10 

10 

9 

9 

8 

4 

5 

Relative  size 
of  island 

8 

1 

11 

( 

6 

5 

15 

13 

9 

2 

4 

14 

3 

11 

12 

16 

Highest  eleva- 
tion (ft.)  ° 

o 

C<1 

o 
o 
in 
in 

o 
in 
00 

in 

1 — 1 

o 

o 

r— 1 

0 
in 
ro 
CM 

0 
in 
in 

0 
in 

0 
in 

in 

en 

CO 
CM 

CM 

m 
0 

CM 

0 
0 

0 
0 

CM 

0 

CM 

0 
m 
CO 

Vegetation 

P 
zones 

1-3 

1-4 

1 

1 

1-4 

1-4 

1 

1-2 

1 

1-4 

1-4 

1 

1-4 

1 

1 

1 

Total  number 
vascular 
plants 

119 

329 

48 

47 

319 

306 

(' 

103 

79 

193 

224 

42 

80 

52 

22 

14 

Relative   size 
of  flora 

6 

1 

1 

12 

0 

J 

16 

/ 

9 

5 

4 

13 

8 

10 

14 

15 

Distance  from 

Indefatigable 
Island   s 

75 

17 

10 

54 

31 

42 

162 

6 

55 

.  • 

12 

15 

59 

Mo 

58 

139 

No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  113 


One  individual  collected  in  September,   1957.  Compare   with  Lack  (1945,  pp.  9-10)  and 
Swarth  (1931,  PP-   146-147). 

b 

Compare  Swarth  (1931,  pp.   149-150,   206(   and  Lack  (1945,  pp.  8-9). 

See  Gifford  (1919,  p.  227)  and  Swarth  (1931,  p.   138,    164). 

d 

Reported  from  island  but  probably  not  a  permanent  resident. 

^  See  Swarth  (1931,  p.   174). 

See  Lack  (1945,  pp.   14-15). 

^  See  Lack  (1945,  p.   14). 

h     ,  .  ,  . 

Now  considered  extinct. 

Numerous  individuals  collected  by  author  in  September,   1957.     See  alsoGifford  (1919,  p.  238). 

Now  considered  extinct  on  this  island.  See  Lack  (1945,  p. 17),   Rothschild  and  Hartert  (1899, 
p.   167),  and  Gifford  (1919,  p.  246). 

The  wTiter  observed  this  species  on  Narborough  Island  during  September,   1957.  The  only  pre- 
vious record  is  that  of  Snodgrass   and  Heller  (1904,  p.  286)  based  on  a  single  specimen. 
Swarth  (193L  P-  223)  refers  this  specimen  to  the  form    "af/inis". 

See  Gifford  (1919,  p.  250). 

One  specimen  in  collection  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sciences  (see  Swarth,   1931,  p.  249). 

See  Gifford  (1919,  p.  254). 

Elevations  from  United  States  Hydrographic  Office  Map  no.   1798,    11th  ed.,   1946,  except  for 
Seymour  Island. 

From  Stewart  (1911,   1915):   1,  dry;   2,  transition;  3,  moist;  4,   grassy. 

'^  From  Stewart  (1911,  p.  237). 


n 


P 


The  smaller  the  number,  the  larger  (relatively)  the   flora. 

Distances  measured  in  English  miles  using  the  American  Geographical  Society  map  N.A.-17, 
1949  edition. 


Darwin's  finches  reside  on  all  of  the  main  islands  of  the  Galapagos 
group,  although  the  number  of  species  represented  and  their  relative  abundance 
differ  from  island  to  island  (table  1).  In  addition  to  the  13  species  of  finches, 
there  is  a  spotty  occurrence  of  mainland  groups  of  land  birds,  including  the 
following  resident  species:  the  Yellow  Warbler  (Dendroica  petechia  aureola), 
the  thrasher-like  Mockingbirds  (four  island  species  of  the  endemic  genus  Ne- 
somimus),  the  Martin  (Progne  modesta),  three  flycatchers  (two  species  of  Py- 
Tocephalus  and  one  species  of  Myiarchus),  acuc\ioo(Coccyzus  melacoryphus), 
and  an  endemic  dove  (Nesopelia  galapagoensis).  Two  North  American  mi- 
grants, the  Bobolink  (Dolichonyx  oryzivoms)  and  the  Barn  Swallow  (Hirundo 
erythrogaster),     are    regular    winter    visitants    to    Galapagos     (Swarth,   1931). 


114 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Figure    4.     Vegetation  of  the   Arid   Coastal    Zone  near  Academy   Bay,    Indefatigable  Island. 
(Photo  courtesy  R.  Freund.) 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:    GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


115 


Figure  5.    Vegetation  of  the  Transition  Zone,  two  miles  north  of  Academy  Bay. 


116 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Figure  6.    Vegetation  of  the  Scalesia  Forest  Zone,  six  miles  north  of  Academy  Bay. 


Figure  7.     Vegetation  of  the  Upland  Zone,  highlands  north  of  Academy  Bay.     (Photo  cour- 
tesy R.  Freund.) 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  117 

Concerning  predators  on  the  finches,  the  following  three  species  of  ver- 
tebrates are  the  most  important  (fig.  9):  a  hawk  (Buteo  galapagoensis),  the 
Short-eared  Owl  ( Asio  galapagoensis),  and  a  colubrid  snake  (Dromicus  biser- 
ialis). 

Evolutionary  Patterns 

The  major  patterns  of  differentiation  in  Darwin's  finches  appear  to  be 
concerned  in  the  main  with  adaptations  for  food-getting.  Guided  by  selection, 
the  exploitation  of  the  constitutional  and  ecological  opportunities  has  resulted 
in  an  impressive  array  of  food-niche  specializations.  The  adjustments  of  the 
organism  to  the  different  ways  of  feeding  have  involved  not  only  the  basic 
feeding  mechanism  (bill,  tongue,  palate,  jaw  muscles,  stomach,  and  intestine) 
but     also  correlated  features  (plumage,  heart,  and  behavior). 

a.  Structural  pattern  in  the  bill.  Darwin's  finches  are  most  readily 
distinguished  on  the  basis  of  the  relative  size  and  shape  of  the  bill.  The  14 
species  may  be  grouped  into  six  genera  as  follows:  Geospiza  (6  species), 
Camarhynchus  (3  species),  Cactospiza  (2  species),  Platyspiza  (1  species), 
Certhidea  (1  species),  and  Pinaroloxias  (1  species).  Structural  features  and 
mechanical  potentialities  of  the  six  bill  types  are  summarized  in  table  2.  In 
brief,  the  seed  crushing  bill  of  Geospiza,  which  may  be  likened  to  a  heavy 
duty  linesman's  pliers  (fig.  10),  is  capable  of  its  greatest  adduction  at  the 
base.  In  Camarhynchus,  the  bill  resembles  a  high  leverage  diagonal  pliers 
with  high  cutting  potential  at  the  tip,  and  is  used  to  cut  into  tough  woody 
tissues  wherein  insect  larvae  are  to  be  found.  The  elongated  bill  of  Cacto- 
spiza shows  similarities  in  structure  to  a  pair  of  long-chain-nose  pliers  and 
serves  both  for  tip-biting  and  probing  while  excavating  in  woody  tissues  for 
insects.  The  genus  Platyspiza  is  characterized  by  a  bill  that  basically  is 
similar  to  a  parrot-head  gripping  pliers,  with  crushing  potentialities  more  or 
less  equally  distributed  along  its  length.  The  bill  of  Certhidea,  somewhat 
analagous  to  a  needle-nose  pliers,  resembles  in  great  detail  the  bills  of  cer- 
tain parulid  warblers,  and  is  suited  for  probing  crevices  in  search  of  small  in- 
sect food.  The  bill  of  Pinaroloxias  is  decurved  and  slender  and  resembles 
grossly  a  pair  of  curved  needle-nose  pliers.  It  is  well  suited  for  procuring 
soft  foods  such  as  nectar  and  insects,  and  for  piercing  fleshy  fruits. 

Species  differences  in  the  bills  of  Geospiza  concern  the  absolute  size 
and  depth-to-length  ratio,  which  features  determine  the  mechanical  potential- 
ities of  the  bill.  The  interspecific  differences  may  more  readily  be  apprecia- 
ted if  we  compare  four  sympatric  species  of  Geospiza  from  Indefatigable  Is- 
land (fig.  11).  Especially  instructive  here  is  the  nature  of  the  individual  var- 
iation in  size  of  bill  in  G.  fortis,  which  in  its  smallest  version  is  but  a  trifle 
larger  than  G.  fuliginosa,  and  in  its  largest  version  only  slightly  smaller  than 
G.   magnirostris.     But  despite  this  impressive  size  difference  within  a  single 


118 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  119 

Table  2.     Bill  features  in  six  genera  of  Geospizinae. 


GENUS  BILL   CHARACTERISTICS*  BILL   CAPABILITIES 


Geospiza  Culmen  convex.  Strong  biting  at  tip. 

Gonys  essentially  straight.  Very  strong  crushing  at  base. 

Bill  large  to  small,  conical  elongate. 


Camarhynchus  Culmen  convex  (usually  strongly  so).  Very  strong  biting  at  tip. 

Gonys  convex  (slightly  to  strongly).  Strong  crushing  at  base. 

Bill  short,  laterally  compressed. 


Cactospiza  Culmen  slightly  convex.  Strong  biting  at  tip. 

Gonys  slightly  convex.  Strong  probing. 

Bill  relatively  slender. 


Platyspiza  Culmen  strongly  convex  Very  strong  crushing  along 

Gonys  straight.  entire  length. 

Bill  short,  broad,  and  deep.  Very  strong  biting  at  tip. 


Pinaroloxias  Culmen  curved.  Weak  probing. 

Gonys  straight.  Grasping  tip. 

Bill   slender,  sharp-pointed,  decurved. 


Certhidea  Culmen  straight  proximally,  slightly  Grasping  tip. 

curved  distally.   **  Strong  probing. 

Gonys  straight  or  slightly  convex. 
Bill  small,  slender,  acute. 


*     After  Swarth,   1931.  See  fig.   10. 
**    After  Ridgway,  1896  [1897} 


population  of  G.  fortis,  the  same  relative  shape  of  bill  prevails,  as  evidenced 
by  the  paralleling  of  the  culmen  and  gonys  in  the  three  sizes  of  bill. 

Within  Camarhynchus  and  Cactospiza,  species  and  individual  differen- 
ces in  the  bill  involve  the  absolute  size,  depth-to-length  ratio,  and,  more 
prominently,  the  curvature  of  the  culmen  and  gonys.  (See  fig.  2,  and  compare 
M,  N,  and  Q  for  Camarhynchus  psittacula,  and  O  and  S  ioT  Cactospiza  pallida. ) 

b.  Structural  pattern  in  the  jaw  musculature.  The  potentialities  of 
the  bills  are  realized  only  when  the  upper  and  lower  mandibles  are  set  in  mo- 
tion by  the  jaw  muscles.  The  relative  size  and  position  of  the  muscles  affect 
the  action  of  the  bill.  Without  entering  into  a  discussion  of  the  kinetics  of 
the  avian  bill,  or  a  detailed  description  of  the  individual  muscles  (see  Bow- 
man, 1961,  for  details),  suffice  it  to  say  that  within  the  Geospizinae  the  great 
est  variation  in  the  jaw  musculature  concerns  the  size  of  certain  of  the  "ad- 
ductor" groups;  namely,  M.  adductor  mandihulae  extemus  and  Mm.  pterygoi- 
deus  dorsalis  et  ventralis  (see  figs.  12  and  13). 

Figure  8.     Vegetation  of  the  Miconia  Belt,  eight  miles  north  of  Academy  Bay.  (Photo  cour- 
tesy R.  Freund.) 


120 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


vfvr-r^-M-^^ 


~  tiWi ;  >^  ■ 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


121 


GEOSPIZA 


HEAVY   DUTY 
LINESMAN'S    PLIERS 


PLATYSPIZA 


PARROT-HEAD 
GRIPPING   PLIERS 


CAMARHYNCHUS 


HIGH  LEVERAGE 
DIAGONAL  PLIERS 


PINAROLOXIAS 


CURVED 
NEEDLE   NOSE  PLIERS 


CACTOSPIZA 


LONG  CHAIN  NOSE  PLIERS 


CERTHIDEA 


NEEDLE  NOSE  PLIERS 


Figure   10.     Comparison  of  shapes  of  bill  in  six  genera  of  Geospizinae   with  shapes  of  six 
kinds  of  pliers  (cf.  table  2). 

To  illustrate  the  nature  of  the  differences,  let  us  consider  three  sib- 
ling species  of  Geospiza  on  Indefatigable  Island.  The  large  lateral  and  ven- 
tral muscle  complexes  (nos.  1,  2,  3  and  5,  6,  7,  8,  respectively,  in  figs.  12 
and  13)  become  disproportionately  larger  as  we  proceed  from  the  small- to  the 
medium-  to  the  large-billed  species  (i.e.,  G.  fuliginosa,  G.  fortis,  G.  magni- 
Tostris).  In  parallel  fashion  we  observe  a  disproportionate  increase  in  size  of 
these  muscles  as  we  proceed  from  the  small-  to  the  large-billed  species  of 
Camarhynchus  (fig.  13). 

c.  The  pattern  of  feeding.  On  the  basis  of  their  diets,  the  13  species 
of  Galapagos  finch  may  be  grouped  into  four  categories  as  follows: 

1.  Almost  exclusively  herbivorous:  Platyspiza  crassirostris 

2.  Chiefly  gramnivorous  (with  some  insects):    6  species  of  Geospiza 

3.  Chiefly  insectivorous  (with  some  seeds):   3  species  of  Camarhyn- 
chus and  2  species  of  Cactospiza. 

4.  Almost  exclusively  insectivorous:  Certhidea  olivacea. 

Thus  there  are  six  different  kinds  of  seed-eating  niches  occupied  by 
six  species  of  Camarhynchus ,  Cactospiza,  and  Certhidea,  in  addition  to  the 
herbivore  niche  occupied  by  Platyspiza  crassirostris. 


Figure    9.      Three    important   predators   on   Galapagos   finches.        a.    Buteo  galapagoensis; 
b.  Asio  galapagoensis;    c.  Dromicus  biserialis. 


122 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


large   magnirostris 
small  magnirostris 


large  fort  is 


culm  en 


medium  fort  is 


fuliginosa 


small  for  lis 


scan  dens 


gonys 


Figure  11.     Bill  profiles  of  four  species  of  Geospiza  from  Indefatigable  Island. 


A  more  detailed  analysis  of  the  diets  and  the  foraging  locations  provides 
us  with  important  points  of  difference  in  the  feeding  niches.     The  nine  resi- 
dent species  of  finch  on  Indefatigable  Island  have  been  most  thoroughly  stud- 
ied in  this  regard  and  data  on  these  are  presented  in  table  3  and  figures  14, 
15  and  16. 

d.  Explanation  of  patterns  described.  Species  of  Geospiza  represent 
several  lines  of  evolution  toward  the  solution  of  the  problem  of  efficient  ex- 
ploitation of  the  seed  resources  of  the  Galapagos  environment.  The  great  ar- 
ray of  sparrow-like  crushing  bills  is  a  clear  reflection  of  the  abundance  of 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


123 


Geospiza  magnirostris 


Geospiza    fortis 


Geospiza   fuliginosa 


Figure  12.  Jaw  muscles  of  Geospiza  magnirostris,  G.  fortis,  and  G.  fuliginosa:  above, 
lateral  view  of  superficial  muscles;  below,  ventral  view  of  superficiar(left  half)  and  deep  (right 
half)  muscles.  1.  M.  adductor  mandibulae  externus  superficialis;  2.  M.  adductor  mandibulae  ex- 
ternus  medialis;  3.  M.  adductor  mandibulae  externus  profundus;  4.  M.  adductor  mandibulae  pos- 
terior; 5.  M.  pterygoideus  dorsalis  lateralis;  6.  M.  pterygoideus  dorsalis  medialis;  7.  M.  ptery- 
goideus  ventralis  lateralis;  8,  M.  pterygoideus  ventralis  medialis;  9,  M.  depressor  mandibulae; 
10,  M.  pseudotemporalis  profundus;  11,  M.  pseudotemporalis  superficialis;  12,  M.  retractor  pal- 
atini; 13,  Lig.  jugomand.  art.;  14,  Lig.  jugomand.  ext.;  15,  Proc.  palato-max.;  16,  Proc.  transpal.; 
17,  pterygoid;  18,  rhampbotheca. 


seeds  differing  in  their  size,  hardness,  and  location.  A  characteristic  adapta- 
tion of  angiosperms  in  arid  and  semi-arid  regions  is  a  drought-resistant  seed 
(Stebbins,  1952),  which  condition  is  well  developed  in  Galapagos  plants  (Hook- 
er, 1847,  pp.  256-257). 

The  adaptive  trends  in  the  Geospiza  series  proceeding  from  G.   fuligi- 
nosa to  G.  fortis  to  G.  magnirostris  are  as  follows: 


Trend 

1.  more  terrestrial  in  foraging  habits 

2.  consumption  of  larger  seeds 

3.  consumption  of  harder  seeds 


Data  presented  in 
fig.  14 
fig.  15 
fig.  15 


124 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Trend  Data  presented  in 

4.  consumption  of  fewer  insects  fig.  14 

5.  bill  larger  and  thicker-based  fig.  10 

6.  "adductor"  muscles  relatively  larger  fig.  12 

Three  species  of  Geospiza;  namely,  G.  difficilis,  G.  scandens,  and  G. 
conirostns,  differ  from  the  foregoing  species  in  having  elongated  bills;  that  is, 
bills  which  are  longer  relative  to  their  basal  depth  (see  fig.  2,  I,U,C,  respec- 
tively). The  elongate  bill  permits  the  bird  to  seize  food  that  might  be  more 
difficult  to  obtain  were  the  bill  attenuate,  because  interference  of  the  eyes 
with  the  substrate  is  thus  substantially  diminished.  For  example,  G.  scandens 
is  prone  to  probe  the  thick  pear-like  fruit  of  Opuntia  cactus  for  moderately 
hard  seeds,  and  to  insert  the  bill  tip  into  the  spine  clusters  to  procure  sugary 
secretions  at  the  extra-floral  nectaries.  In  G.  conirostric  and  G.  difficilis  the 
elongated  bill  permits  the  birds  to  reach  seeds  and  insects  in  crevices  and 
beneath  leaf  litter,  with  a  minimum  of  interference  to  the  eyes. 


Platyspiza  crassirostris        Camarhynchus    psittacula  Camarhynchus  parvulus 


Figure  13.  Jaw  muscles  of  Platyspiza  crassirostris,  Camarhynchus  psittacula,  and  Cam- 
arhynchus parvulus;  above,  lateral  view  of  superficial  muscles;  below,  ventral  view  of  super- 
ficial muscles;  below,  ventral  view  of  superficial  (left  half)  and  deep  (right  half)  muscles.  Num- 
bers as  in  figure  12. 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


125 


S   I   S   I   S  I 

FEEDING    STATION 


C  porvuSus 


S,  60 

S40 
2  30 
uj20 
=  10 


®®® 
'^  ft 

.-^  _^  1%^ 


ii  Isi 


S  I  S   I  N  I 

FEEDING    STATION 


Plafyspiza 

g  60 
f^50 

® 

® 

© 

IV  40 

^30 

s  10 

1- 

n 

Cactospiza 


(?. 

magnirostns 

(?  /'or/zs 

G  fuhginosa 

u  60 
^50 

® 

® 

® 

^40^ 

2  30  ■:■ 
?  10  :•; 

1-           u 

V 

4 

%m 

I 

_i>:i 

C  psittacula 


r« 

1  ■E-i';- 

S   I    S   I   S  L 

FEEDING    STATION 


(^  ground 

(B)  trunks,  large  branches 

fC)  leaves ,  twigs 


1® 

i 

S  seeds 

I  insects 

fl  nectar 

L  leaves,  flowers. seeds 


Figure   14.     The  principal  feeding  stations  and  the  extent  of  their  occupancy  by  nine  spe- 
cies of  Geospizinae  on  Indefatigable  Island. 


The  large-,  medium-,  and  small-billed  individuals  of  Geospiza  fortis  on 
Indefatigable  Island  (fig.  11)  are  known  to  differ  in  their  diets,  with  the  larger 
forms  taking  progressively  harder  seeds  than  the  smaller  forms  (see  Bowman, 
1961,  p.  60. 

In  Camarhynchus,  Cactospiza,  and  Certhidea,  the  "problem"  of  extract- 
ing insects,  which  are  concealed  beneath  woody  tissues  during  the  daylight 
hours  to  escape  from  predators  and  dessication,  has  been  "solved"  through 
the  evolution  of  powerful  tip-biting  bills  (Camarhynchus),  probing  bills  (Cacto- 
spiza), and  forceps-like  bills  (Certhidea). 

The  adaptive  trends  in  the  Camarhynchus  series  from  C.  parvulus  to  C. 
psittacula  on  Indefatigable  Island  are  as  follows: 

Trend  Data  presented  in 

1.  more  arboreal  in  foraging  habits  fig.  14 

2.  consumption  of  larger  insects  larvae  fig.  16 

3.  consumption  of  fewer  seeds  fig.  14 


126 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Trend  Data  presented  in 

4.  bill  larger  and  thicker  fig.  13 

5.  "adductor"  muscles  relatively  larger  fig.  13 

If  we  compare  all  the  "insectivorous"  finches  on  Indefatigable  Island 
in  the  sequence  Certhidea  olivacea--Camarhynchus  parvulus—Camarhynchus 
psittacula--Cactospiza  pallida,  we  find  that  the  smaller-billed  species  feed 
on  smaller  insects  (larvae)  than  do  the  larger-billed  species  (fig.  16.)  Concom- 
itantly, Certhidea  ioTSiges  typically  on  the  leaves  and  terminal  twigs  of  bushes 
and  trees,  whereas  the  larger-billed  and  smaller-billed  species  of  Camarhyn- 
c>?>ws  forage  typically  on  the  larger  and  smaller  branches  of  trees,  respectively, 
with  Cactospiza  showing  a  distinct  preference  for  large  branches  and  trunks 
in  its  search  for  insect  booty  (see  fig.  14). 


Geospiza  fuliginosa 


Geospiza   scandens 


Geospiza  forfis 


Geospiza  magnirostris 


A      B     C      D      E      F      G      H      I 
SIZE  OF  SEED 

Geospiza  fuliginosa 


A  B         C         D         E 

SEED  HARDNESS 


Geospizo  scandens 


Geospiza  fortis 


Geospiza  mognirostris 


Figure    15.     Analysis   of  the   diets   of  four   species   of  Geospiza  from  Indefatigable  Island 
on  the  basis  of  size  (above)  and  hardness  (below)  of  seeds  consumed. 


e.  Structural  pattern  in  the  digestive  tract.  Invertebrates,  general- 
ly, it  is  well  known  that  herbivorous  species  possess  relatively  longer  intest- 
ines than  do  carnivorous  and  nectivorous  species— a  condition  correlated  with 
the  greater  east  of  digestion  and  assimilation  of  proteins  and  simple  sugars 
as  compared  to  starches  and  celluloses.  A  trend  of  this  kind  may  be  demon- 
strated in  species  of  Galapagos  finches  on  Indefatigable  Island  (fig.  17)  by 
comparing  the  relative  lengths  of  the  intestine  (i.e.,  length  of  intestine  over 
cube  root  of  body  weight)  with  the  relative  amounts  of  cellulose-rich  food  in 
the  diets. 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


127 


Certhtdea  olrvacea 


A  B  C  0 

SIZE   OF  LARVA 


Camorhynchus  porvulus 


Comarhynchus  psittaculo 


Cactospizo   pallido 


Figure    16.     Analysis  of  the  diets  of  four  species  of  insectivorous  finches   from  Indefati- 
gable Island  on  the  basis  of  size  of  larvae  consumed. 

Whereas  the  gradual  shortening  of  the  intestine  in  the  morphological 
series  Geospiza  magnirostris--G.  fortis—G.  fuliginosa  is  correlated  with  a  re- 
duction in  starch- and  cellulose-rich  seeds  and  an  increase  in  protein-rich  in- 
sects (fig.  14),  in  G.  scandens  the  still  shorter  intestine  is  correlated  with  a 
seed  diet  supplemented  with  sugar-rich  nectar  and  comparatively  more  insects. 
The  intestine  of  Platyspiza  is  conspicuously  longer  than  that  of  Geospiza 
magnirostris  owing  to  the  fact  that  the  former  species  consumes,  in  addition 
to  seeds,  large  quantities  of  buds,  leaves,  and  flowers,  which  items  are  taken 
much  less  frequently  by  the  latter  species.  Platyspiza  rarely  feeds  on  insects. 

In  the  insectivorous  series  of  finches;  namely,  Camarhynchus  parvulus— 
C.   psittacula--Cactospiza  pallida-- Certhidea  olivacea,   there  is  a  regular  re- 
duction in  the  relative  amounts  of  plant  food  in  the  diets,  tending  toward  com- 
plete insectivorousness  in  Certhidea.  Correlated  with  this  shift  in  diet  is  the 
gradual  reduction  in  length  of  intestine  (see  also  fig.  14). 

f.  Foraging  activity  and  heart  size.  Recent  studies  by  Hartman  (1954, 
1955)  and  Norris  and  Williamson  (1955)  have  shown,  among  other  things,  that 
species  differences  in  heart  weight  may  be  a  reflection  of  certain  inherent 
physiological  adaptations,  and  particularly  as  this  relates  to  activity.  It  has 
been  assumed  that  in  any  one  species  a  particular  heart  size  is  an  adaptation 
of  the  circulatory  system  to  the  sum  total  of  the  various  physiological  condi- 
tions resulting  from  physical  exertion,  heat  production,  and  environmental  in- 
fluences. Since  the  major  differences  between  species  of  Galapagos  finches 
concern  adaptations  for  food-getting,  and  since  food-getting  constitutes  a  major 
part  of  the  daytime  activity  of  the  birds,  some  correlation  between  heart  size 
and  type  of  foraging  activity  might  be  expected. 

Platyspiza  crassirostris,  the  largest  (heaviest)  finch,  has  the  smallest 
heart  ratio  (table  4).  Correlated  with  this  is  the  fact  that  Platyspiza  is  most 
commonly  seen  sitting  quietly  in  bushes  or  trees  feeding  on  berries,  leaf  buds, 
or  flowers.  Platyspiza  show  less  activity  in  food-getting  than  does  any  other 
species  of  finch. 


128 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Table  3-     Food  habits  of  the  Geospizinae, 


P^CJOD   HABITS   OF   GEMS 

FOOD    HABITS   OF    SPFCIFS 

SPECIES    UITH    SIMILAR    BILL 

Geospiza:  mainly  seeds, and 

magnirostris;  small   variety  of 

Coccothraustes  coccothraustes 

occasionally  exposed 
insects. 

hard  seeds 

( Fringillidae) 

fortis:    large  variety  of  moder- 

Melanospiza richardsoni 

ately  hard  seeds 

(Fringillidae) 

fuliginosa:  large  variety  of 

Passerina  cyanea 

soft  seeds 

(Fringillidae) 

scandens:  small  variety  of 

Tangavius  aeneus 

moderately  hard   seeds;  pref- 

(Icteridae) 

erences  for  fruits  and  nectar 

of  Opuntia  cactus 

difficilist  poorly  known  but 

Lophosphingus  griseo-cristatus 

presumably  similar  to  fuli- 

(Fringillidae) 

ginosa,  but  possibly  includ- 

ing more   insects 

conirostris:   poorly  known  but 

Saltator  albicollis 

presumably  soft   to   hard 

(Fringillidae) 

seeds  and  soft  tissues  of 

Opuntia  cactus 

Camarhynckius:  mainly  con- 

psiltacula: moderate  variety  of 

Psittiparus  gularis 

cealed   insects  excavated 

largish  insects;   fewsoft  seeds 

( Paradoxornithidae) 

from  woody  tissues,   and 
occasionally  seeds 

pauper:  poorly  known,  but  pre- 

Similar to  above 

sumably  intermediate  between 

psiltacula  and  parvulus 

parvulus:  large  variety  of 

Parus  inornata 

smallish  insects  and  moder- 

(Paridae) 

ate  amount  oi  soft  seeds 

Cactospiza:  mainly  conceal- 

pallida: small  variety  of  larg- 

Tachyphonus coronatus 

ed  insects  removed  by 
furrowing  with  bill  and  by 

ish  insects;  soft  fruits 

(Traupidae) 

means  of  a  "tool"  held  in 

heliobates:  poorly  known  but 

Similar  to  above 

bill  {pallida  only);  occa- 

presumably mainly  insects 

sionally  soft  fruits  and 

from  mangroves 

seeds 

Platyspiza:  buds,  leaves, 

crassirostris:  same  as  for 

Structural  equivalent  not  known 

flowers,  fleshy  fruits,  soft 

genus 

to  hard  seeds 

Certhidea;  insects  exclus- 

olivacea; same  as  for  genus 

Basileuterus  belli 

ively,  and  mainly  small 

(Parulidae) 

exposed  forms 

Pinaroloxiasr  presumably 

inornata:  same  as  for  genus 

Coereba  flaveola 

insects,  nectar,  and 

("Coerebidae") 

some  fruit 

No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


129 


LjJ 


CO 
LU 


U. 
O 

X 

I- 
z 

Ld 


LlI 
> 


UJ 


1 — 

1 1 

n 1 r- 

1 

1               1 

0 

80  - 

70  ■ 

• 

no"* 

,x- 

60  • 

• 

i^ 

0^ 

.^^ 

50  ■ 
40  • 

7 

C5- 

0)- 

30  • 

1— 

— 1 1 

H 1 1- 

1 

— 1 1 

10     20     30      40     50      60     70      80     90 

PERCENTAGE  OF  CELLULOSE-RICH   FOOD  IN  DIET 


Figure   17.     Relationship  between  intestinal  length  and  diet  in  nine  species  of  Geospizinae 
from  Indefatigable  Island. 

Camarhynchus  psittacula  and  C.  parvulus  have  very  similar  methods  of 
foraging,  but  there  are  some  fairly  obvious  differences.  In  general,  C  parvulus 
forages  on  the  small  branches  and  terminal  twigs  of  trees  and  bushes,  where 
its  behavior  resembles  that  of  certain  parids.  The  larger  C.  psittacula  tends 
to  forage  more  on  the  larger  branches  of  trees,  where  its  twisting  actions  with 
the  bill  appear  to  be  more  vigorous  than  similar  actions  in  the  smaller  C  par- 
vulus, and  undoubtedly  of  greater  absolute  strength.  In  other  words,  the  field 
observations  do  not  indicate  any  important  differences  in  intensity  of  foraging 
activity,  but  do  demonstrate  certain  significant  differences  in  habitat  selec- 
tion. The  difference  in  heart  ratio  between  C  parvulus  (.664)  and  C.  psitta- 
cula (.632)  is  prohahly  the  result  oi  the  diiierences  in  general  body  size  (fig.  18). 

Certhidea  olivacea  is  not  only  the  smallest  but  also  the  most  active  of 
the  Galapagos  finches.  Its  relatively  large  heart  (largest  heart  ratio)  is  surely 
a  reflection  of  this  high  level  of  activity.  Its  erratic  aerial  flights,  frequent 
wing  flitting,  and  constant  changing  of  position  while  foraging  in  the  foliage, 
are  all  manifestations  of  its  relatively  greater  metabolic  rate.  Certhidea  is  al- 
most the  perfect  antithesis  of  Platyspiza  with  regard  to  activity  and  relative 
heart  size. 


130 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


8  9  10  15       20     25   30   35 

BODY  WEIGHT  IN   GRAMS 


Figure   18.     Average  heart  weight  plotted  against  average  body  weight  for  nine   species  of 
Galapagos  finches  from  Indefatigable  Island  (Logarithmic  scale.) 

Cactospiza  pallida  and  Geospiza  scandens  have  the  same  heart  ratio 
(.690),  which  value  is  second  largest  in  the  group  (table  4).  Not  only  do  these 
two  species  have  the  same  body  size  and  superficially  similar  bills  (fig.  1), 
but  also  both  may  forage  on  the  Opuntia  cactus.  Because  of  these  similarities, 
both  were  considered  originally  to  be  members  of  the  same  genus  ("Cactomis"). 
The  practice  of  foraging  on  the  trunks  of  trees  (or  cactus)  requires  an  excep- 
tionally high  expenditure  of  energy,  merely  in  maintaining  ahold,  let  alone  in 
climbing  about  or  in  excavating  with  the  bill.  This  might  account  for  the  rela- 
tively large  and  identical  heart  ratio  for  these  species. 

The  three  species  of  "ground-finch,"  Geospiza  magnirostris,  G.  fortis, 
and  G.  fuliginosa,  have  heart  ratios  of  .674,  .647,  and  .594,  respectively.  This 
series  constitutes  a  major  exception  to  the  general  principle  that  smaller  birds 
have  relatively  larger  hearts  than  do  larger  birds  (Hartman,  1955,  p.  223).    In 


No.  44) 


BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


131 


Table  4.    Heart  ratio  for  nine  species  of  Galapagos  finches  from 
Indefatigable  Island, 


SPECIES 


HEART   RATIO* 


SPECIES 


HEART  RATIO* 


Geospiza 

magnirostris 

fort  is  

fuliginosa    .... 
scandens  


Cactospiza 
pallida  ... 


.674 
.647 
.594 
.690 


.690 


Cer  thidea 
olivacea.. 


Camarhynchus 
parvulus  .... 
psittacula  .. 


Platyspiza 

crassirosiris 


.697 

.664 

.632 

.538 


*  Mean  heart  weight  expressed  as  a  per  cent  of  mean  body  weight 


attempting  to  account  for  the  differences,  it  should  first  be  pointed  out  that 
all  three  species  spend  about  50  per  cent  of  their  time  foraging  at  ground  level 
where  scratching  with  the  feet  in  search  of  seeds  demands  the  greatest  phys- 
ical exertion  of  any  foraging  activity  typical  of  these  three  species.  Field  ob- 
servations indicate  that  G.  magnirostris  is  somewhat  more  wary  than  the  two 
smaller  species,  and  head  movements  are  much  slower  and  more  deliberate  in 
G.  magnirostris.  The  latter  face  prompted  me  to  examine  the  relative  size  and 
weight  of  the  head  in  these  three  species.  Whereas  in  all  finches  other  than 
G.  magnirostris,  G.  fortis,  and  G.  fuliginosa,  the  skull  and  lower  jaw  make  up 
23  to  34  percent  of  the  total  skeletal  weight,  in  the  three  species  of  Geospiza 
under  consideration  the  skull  and  lower  jaw  comprise  46.8,  38.9,  and  27.8  per 
cent,  respectively,  of  the  total  skeletal  weight. 

In  view  of  these  rather  striking  differences  in  head  size,  it  would  seem 
to  be  reasonable  to  imagine  that  the  differences  in  heart  ratio  between  the  lar- 
ger and  smaller  species  oiGeospiza(G.  scawfiews  excepted)  might  be  correlated, 
at  least  in  part,  with  the  relatively  greater  energy  demands  for  the  function- 
ing of  the  very  large  jaw  musculature,  and  also  for  maintaining  the  posture  of 
a  much  heavier  head  (see  fig.  12).  The  differences  in  the  heart  ratios  between 
Geospiza  magnirostris,  G.  fortis,  and  G.  fuliginosa  are  attributed  mainly  to 
differences  in  the  relative  size  differences  in  the  skull  and  jaw  musculature. 


Observations  on  the  flight  of  species  of  Geospiza  in  the  wild  and  in  cap- 
tivity indicate  that  G.  scandens  has  the  strongest  and  most  rapid  flight  as 
well  as  the  greatest  agility,  whereas  G.  fuliginosa  has  the  weakest  type  of 
flight.  It  is  probably  not  fortuitous  that,  of  the  four  species  of  Geospiza  on 
Indefatigable  Island,  G.  scandens  has  the  largest  and  G.  fuliginosa  the  small- 
est heart  ratio. 


132 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


100 


111 

o 


-^   INSECTIVOROUS 


ABOVE  GROUND  FORAGING 


!'■  ■  i  I  y  ■'■'*■  I  ■  ■  ■ 
••■■■■■■•■■•■ 

lasaaaaflaaaaB 

aaaaaaaaaaaaa 

aaaaaaaaaaaaa 

-----^aaaaaea 

-  -  -  -  a  a  a 


:•:•:■:•  ground  level  foraging  :•:•:•:■:■:■:•: 


•   a   ■   ■   ■   ■   ■    ari 
■    ■••••■- 
■  ■  a  a  a  ■   I 


I  a  •  a  I 
a  a  a  a 
I  a  a  a  L, 
a    ■   ■    aji 


•  a  a  a  a  a  ■ 
a  a  ■  a  a  a  r 

a   ■   a  a  a  a 
a   •   ■   a  a  a  L 

a   •   a  a  a  a  ■ 
a   a   a   a  a  a  ~ 


■  ■  ■  ■  iti'n  i'l  ■■■  i 

laaaaaaaaaaaa 
aaaaaaaaaaaa 
laaaaaaaaaaaa 


GEOSPIZA         PLATYSPIZA    CAMARHYNCHUS 


CACTOSPIZA 


CERTHIDEA 


< 


LU 

< 
2 


V%l^t^T 


®      ®  !    ®      ©      ®      ® 


Figure  19.     Correlation  of  male  plumage  condition,  foraging  level,  and  diet  in  five  genera 
of  Geospizinae. 

g.    Adaptive  variation  in  plumage  and  bill. 

(1)  Plumage  coloration.  Most  previous  workers  on  the  finches  have 
claimed  that  the  plumage  colorations  are  of  little  or  no  adaptive  value.  I  do 
not  believe  that  the  available  evidence  supports  this  view. 

Because  of  the  dietary  differences  between  the  finch  species,  it  is  not 
surprising  that  we  should  find  differences  in  foraging  level  (fig.  14).  For  ex- 
ample, the  seed-eaters  of  the  genus  Geospiza  spend  about  50  percent  of  their 
time  on  the  ground  in  search  of  seeds.  In  the  arid  coastal  zone,  where  these 
species  are  most  common,  there  is  a  preponderance  of  dark  colored  lava.  Cor- 
related with  these  conditions  of  behavior  and  environment  are  the  adult  male 
plumages  that  may  be  fully  black,  partially  black,  or  non-black  and  essential- 
ly like  that  of  the  females  (fig.  19). 

The  insect-eaters  of  the  genus  Camarhynchus,  as  well  as  the  fruit-and- 
bud  eaters  of  the  genus  Platyspiza,  find  their  food  chiefly  on  the  branches  and 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  133 

among  the  foliage  of  trees  and  shrubs  where  the  dominant  colors  are  green  and 
grey.  Occasionally  the  birds  will  forage  for  seeds  on  the  ground.  Thus,  these 
birds,  Camarhynchus  and  Platyspiza  are  brought  into  contact  with  backgrounds 
of  strong  color  contrast,  namely,  grey-green  and  black.  The  plumages  of  the 
adult  males  of  Camarhynchus  and  Platyspiza  are  usually  black  over  head  and 
breast,  black  on  the  head  only,  or  completely  grey  brown  like  the  females 
(fig.  19).  Those  individuals  with  black  on  the  anterior  parts  of  the  body  are 
surprisingly  difficult  to  see  either  on  the  ground  or  in  the  trees,  because  of 
the  visually  disruptive  effect  produced  by  this  kind  of  marking. 

The  remaining  species  of  finches  of  the  genera  Cactospiza  and  Certhi- 
dea  rarely  forage  at  ground  level.  Their  plumages  are  various  shades  of  olive 
and  grey,  but  never  black,  thus  matching  the  dominant  hues  in  the  trees  and 
shrubs  where  they  forage. 

The  selective  force  in  the  case  of  plumage  coloration  is  predation  by 
hawks,  owls,  and  snakes  (fig.  9). 

There  are  numerous  examples  of  geographic  variation  in  plumage  color- 
ation in  the  Galapagos  finches.  The  most  striking  of  these  is  to  be  found  in 
the  genus  Geospiza.  In  this  group  there  may  be  a  succession  of  plumages  in 
the  male  beginning  with  no  black,  followed  by  increasing  amounts  of  black 
over  head  and  breast,  to  complete  blackness  (see  fig.  19).  This  gradual  de- 
velopment is  at  least  partly  associated  with  age.  At  each  annual  molt  an  in- 
creasing number  of  black  feathers  may  appear,  but  in  addition  there  are  some 
plumage  types  that  are  genetically  fixed.  Some  birds  may  appear  to  acquire  a 
partially  black  plumage  precociously,  and  retain  this  stage  in  subsequent  years. 
Other  males  never  seem  to  acquire  any  black  plumage  whatsoever.  Further- 
more, the  relative  frequency  of  the  various  plumage  types  in  adult  males  seems 
to  be  somewhat  different  from  island  to  island  (Lack,  1945;  Swarth,  1931),  al- 
though an  intensive  field  study  of  this  situation  is  still  wanting.  Because 
there  are  differences  in  the  dominant  background  color  between  islands,  we 
may  assume  that  each  plumage  type  has  its  own  selective  advantage  in  cer- 
tain kinds  of  environments,  and  that  the  specific  frequency  of  occurrence  of 
each  type  may  change  from  season  to  season,  depending  upon  the  age  compo- 
sition and  sex  ratio  of  the  population,  as  well  as  upon  the  local  feeding  hab- 
its of  the  birds.  In  other  words,  the  non-black,  the  partially  black,  and  the 
fully  black  male  plumages  adapt  the  population  as  a  whole  to  the  extremes  of 
background  coloration.  The  need  for  such  camouflage  is  greatest  at  the  end  of 
the  dry  season  in  the  arid  coastal  zone. 

(2)  Bill  structure.     It  seems  clear  that  a  species  living  on  two  islands, 
differing  in  their  food  supply,   is  going  to  show  geographic  variation  in  its 
feeding  harits.  And  such  is  known  to  be  the  case  on  Galapagos.  Let  me  illus- 
trate this  point  with  one  example.  The  bill  of  the  grosbeak-finch  (Geospiza 
magnirostris)  from  Tower  Island  is  almost  the  largest  for  the  species;  on  In- 


134 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


defatigable  Island  the  bill  is  of  somewhat  smaller  size.  An  examination  of  the 
skulls  from  both  islands  shows  that  there  are  differences  in  the  overall  rug- 
gedness,  in  the  size  of  processes  for  muscle  attachment,  and  in  relationships 
of  bones  of  the  skull  (fig.  20).  The  functional  significance  of  these  inter-is- 
land differences  in  morphology  may  be  summarized  as  follows:  the  finches  on 
Tower  Island  are  capable  of  more  powerful  adduction  than  the  finches  on  In- 
defatigable Island.  Indeed,  on  Tower  Island  relatively  more  of  the  available 
seeds  are  large  in  size  and  hard  shelled,  than  are  those  on  Indefatigable  Is- 
land, to  judge  from  the  known  facts  about  the  vegetation  on  the  two  islands. 
The  anatomical  differences  in  the  head  region  between  these  two  island  pop- 
ulations of  Geospiza  magnirostris  are  of  the  same  general  character  as  those 


Tower  Island 


Indefatigable  Island 


Figure  20.     Comparison  of  the  skulls  of  Geospiza  magnirostris  from  Tower  and  Indefatig- 
able islands  in  lateral  profile  (left)  and  posterior  profile  (right). 

differences  between  large-,  medium-,  and  small-billed  individuals  oi  Geospiza 
fortis  (fig.  11),  about  whose  functional  significance  there  is  no  doubt.  Addi- 
tional examples  are  discussed  elsewhere  (Bowman,  1961). 


Adaptive  Radiation  in  Darwin's  Finches 

Within  this  one  insular  sub-familial  group  of  songbirds,  the  Geospizinae, 
we  find  biological  equivalents  of  no  less  than  seven  continental  familial  groups, 
(see  fig.  1).  This  pattern  of  adaptive  radiation  has  been  shaped  largely  by  the 
nature  of  the  Galapagos  environment  and  by  the  genetic  constitution  of  the  birds. 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  135 

Origin  of  the  Geospizinae.  Although  Galapagos  probably  has  been  in 
existence  since  Tertiary  times  (Shumway,  1954),  we  have  no  notion  as  to  the 
exact  time  of  entry  by  the  ancestors  of  the  finches,  or  of  any  other  terrestrial 
group.  There  seems  to  be  little  doubt  that  the  Galapagos  (and  Cocos)  islands 
are  truly  "oceanic"  in  origin  inasmuch  as  they  are  composed  almost  entirely 
of  basaltic  lava,  and  the  deeps  between  the  archipelago  and  the  mainland  are 
so  great  as  to  preclude  a  former  continuous  land  connection  (see  Shumway, 
1954).  The  general  inaccessibility  (or  unsuitability)  of  the  islands  to  terres- 
trial colonists  from  the  adjacent  mainland  of  South  America  is  indicated  by 
the  seemingly  random  make-up  of  the  biota,  especially  well  seen  in  the  fam- 
ilies   of  vascular  plants  and   insects    (Hooker,    1847;   and   Van  Dyke,   1953). 

In  view  of  the  remarkable  uniformity  in  the  internal  anatomy,  plumage, 
song,  nest,  and  egg  in  the  14  species  of  Geospizinae,  it  is  reasonably  certain 
that  Darwin's  finches  constitute  a  monophyletic  group  of  birds.  But  the  pre- 
cise nature  of  the  ancestral  type  is  not  quite  so  obvious  as  some  writers  would 
seem  to  think  (see  Simpson,  et  al.,  1957,  p.  446).  Avian  systematists  are  of 
the  opinion  that  several  New  World  families  of  songbirds  are  phylogenetically 
closely  related,  including  the  sparrows  (Fringillidae),  thetroupials  (Icteridae), 
the  tanagers  (Thraupidae),  the  warblers  (Parulidae),  and  the  honeycreepers 
(Coerebidae).  I  think  it  is  significant,  therefore,  that  we  find  among  Darwin's 
finches  ecological  and  morphological  counterparts  of  these  mainland  families 
(see  fig.  1).  And  in  addition,  we  find  equivalents  of  two  other  mainland  fami- 
lies, the  parrotbills  (Paradoxornithidae)  and  the  titmice  (Paridae),  which  are 
not  generally  considered  to  be  closely  allied  to  the  previously  mentioned 
groups. 

Since  only  five  of  the  14  species  of  Geospizinae  are  clearly  identifiable 
as  "finch"  types,  I  see  no  reason  to  assume  a  priori  that  a  "finch"  origin  of 
the  group  is  any  more  likely  than  a  "warbler"  origin,  etc.  (see  table  3).  Also, 
we  are  not  obliged  to  assume  that  the  geospizine  ancestors  came  from  the  ad- 
jacent coast  of  South  America  (Ecuador)  simply  because  that  region  is  the  most 
proximate.    To  the  evidence  marshalled  by  Swarth  (1934),  showing  a  close  af- 
finity between  elements  of  the  Galapagos  and  Caribbean  avifaunae,  may  be 
added  the  example  of  Geospiza  fortis,  which  shows  a  striking  resemblance  to 
Melanospiza  richardsoni  of  St.  Lucia  Island,  Lesser  Antilles.  The  Galapagos 
may  have  been  no  less  remote  in  effect  to  colonists  from  the  Caribbean  than 
from  coastal  Ecuador  when  one  considers  the  possibility  of  chance  rafting  in 
mid-Tertiary  times  by  means  of  an  ocean  current  system  flowing  through  breach- 
es in  the  Isthmus  of  Panama  (Swarth,  1934;  Vinton,  1951). 

In  summary  it  may  be  said  that  we  have  no  precise  notion  about  the  na- 
ture of  the  ancestors  of  the  Geospizinae;  nor  do  we  know  the  place  of  origin 
of  the  colonial  stock  other  than  that  it  was  from  America. 


136  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

Conditions  on  the  Galapagos  Islands  in  Colonial  times.  We  can  only 
speculate  on  the  environmental  conditions  as  they  existed  when  the  ancestors 
of  Darwin's  finches  arrived  in  the  Galapagos  Archipelago.  It  would  appear  to 
this  writer,  however,  that  there  is  little  justification  for  the  unilateral  assump- 
tion that  once  the  ancestral  geospizines  gained  access  to  the  islands,  they 
entered  into  a  land  of  remarkable  ecological  opportunity  (Simpson,  etal.,  1957, 
p.  445),  of  abundant  foods  and  varied  living  quarters,  unmarred  by  the  presence 
of  competitive  neighbors,  and  with  complete  freedom  from  enemies  (Lack,  1947, 
p.  114).  It  is  just  as  likely,  I  believe,  that  ecological  opportunity  was  very 
limited  when  the  ancestors  of  Darwin's  finches  first  arrived  in  their  newly 
found  environment,  and  that  they  evolved  together  with  the  floral  and  other 
faunal  elements  of  Galapagos,  including  the  predators. 

The  various  islands  appear  to  be  of  different  geological  age  (Chubb, 
1933),  which  means  that  the  number  of  islands,  their  size  and  height  above 
sea  level,  probably  were  different  at  various  times  in  the  past.  Present-day 
differences  in  the  flora  and  fauna  of  the  islands— islands  in  some  cases  sep- 
arated by  only  a  few  miles  of  ocean— are,  indeed,  striking  (see  table  1),  and 
surely  are  a  reflection  of  differences  which  existed  to  a  greater  or  lesser  ex- 
tent in  the  past. 

Constitutional  make-up  of  the  geospizine  ancestors.  Whether  the  or- 
iginal colonization  of  Galapagos  included  many  or  few  individuals,  or  if  there 
was  more  than  one  invasion  by  the  ancestral  type,  we  shall  never  know.  Lack 
of  information  on  these  and  other  matters  makes  it  difficult  to  assess  the  ef- 
fect of  random  genetic  drift  in  the  evolution  of  the  Geospizinae.  To  be  sure, 
the  degree  of  heterozygosity  in  the  genetic  environment  of  the  founding  fore- 
bears was  determined  by  the  number  of  the  invading  colonists  and  their  indi- 
vidual hereditary  constitution.  If  we  assume  that  the  founders  were  few  in 
number  and  derived  entirely  from  a  genetically  depauperate  "peripheral"  main- 
land population,  then  one  may  envision  some  form  of  disharmony  in  the  genetic 
environment  of  the  colonists  (Mayr,  1954).  The  effects  of  a  "genetic  bottle- 
neck" may  have  been  manifest  at  several  times  subsequent  to  the  initial  col- 
onization. For  example,  interisland  invasions,  volcanic  eruptions,  and  period- 
ic droughts  are  some  of  the  possible  causes  of  major  population  reductions. 

The  most  favorable  structure  for  rapid  evolution  is  that  of  a  large  or 
medium  sized  population  divided  into  many  small  sub-units  or  colonies  which 
are  largely  isolated  from  each  other,  but  can  interchange  genes  through  occa- 
sional migration  between  them  (Wright,  1940).  Such  a  population  permits  new 
gene  combinations  to  become  established  in  the  individual  sub-units  both 
through  natural  selection  ("anti-chance"  factor)  and  through  random  genetic 
drift  ("chance  factor"),  without  the  swamping  effect  which  occurs  in  large 
populations.  At  the  same  time,  migration  between  colonies  prevents  their  stag- 
nation, and  allows  the  population  as  a  whole  to  draw  upon  a  large  supply  of 
genes  (Stebbins,  1952,  p.  35). 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  137 

One  might  ask,  is  it  possible  to  distinguish  the  results  of  natural  se- 
lection from  those  of  random  genetic  drift?  What  criteria  are  we  to  use?  In 
order  for  two  small  insular  populations  to  drift  apart  genetically,  there  must 
be  identical,  or  very  similar,  environmental  conditions  on  the  two  islands.  At 
the  present  time  we  know  that  selection  pressures  on  the  finches  differ  in  kind 
and  degree  from  island  to  island  as  a  consequence  of  differences  in  food  sup- 
ply (seeds,  insects)  and  predation  pressure  (hawks,  owls,  snakes),  and  it  is 
reasonable  to  think  that  such  differences  have  existed  to  a  greater  or  lesser 
extent  in  the  past. 

All  the  structural  and  behavioral  features  of  the  Geospizinae  studied  up 
to  now  have  an  adaptive  explanation.  Even  certain  minor  inter-populational 
differences  in  plumage  coloration  and  bill  dimensions  can  reasonably  be  ex- 
plained by  selection;  there  is  no  need  to  invoke  chance  factors.  This  is  not 
to  say  that  random  genetic  drift  did  not  play  some  role  in  the  evolution  of  the 
Geospizinae  through  interaction  with  selection,  but  rather,  that  convincing 
evidence  has  not  yet  been  marshalled  in  support  of  it. 

The  constitutional  limitations  of  the  founders  of  Darwin's  finches  are 
suggested  by  the  apparent  gaps  in  the  picture  of  adaptive  radiation.  For  ex- 
ample, genetic  factors  (other  than  "Sewall  Wright  effect")  might  explain  the 
absence  of  "lark-finches"  and  "shrike-finches"  in  the  geospizines,  since 
alaudids  and  laniids  are  not  closely  related  to  the  "parulid-thraupid-icterid- 
coerebid-fringillid"  complex,  to  which  the  geospizines  seem  to  be  allied.  It 
is  likely  that  the  lark  and  shrike  niches  are  available  on  certain  of  the  larger 
and  higher  islands  of  Galapagos.  It  might  be  suggested  that  the  absence  of  a 
specialized  nectar  feeder  ("honeycreeper-finch")  on  the  Galapagos  is  due  to 
the  genetic  inability  of  the  Geospizinae  to  evolve  in  that  direction.  But  this 
appears  not  to  be  the  case.  Rather,  on  Galapagos  there  is  no  continuous  and 
plentiful  supply  of  nectar  to  support  this  kind  of  feeder,  in  contrast  to  condi- 
tions on  Cocos  Island  where  a  "honeycreeper-finch"  (Pinaroloxias  inornata) 
has  evolved  in  a  lush  tropical  rain  forest. 

We  should  hardly  expect  the  geospizines  to  have  given  rise  to  "mock- 
ingbird-finches", "swallow-finches",  "flycatcher-finches",  and  "cuckoo- 
finches"  since  had  mockingbirds,  swallows,  etc. ,  been  neighbors  of  the  newly 
evolving  geospizines,  these  niches  would  have  been  occupied  and  unavail- 
able for  exploitation  by  the  geospizines.  Also,  it  should  be  noted  that  these 
mainland  types  are,  presumably,  remotely  related  to  the  ancestral  geospizine 
stock,  and  therefore  we  may  suppose  that  even  if  the  mainland  mockingbirds, 
swallows,  etc.  were  absent  from  Galapagos,  geospizine  counterparts  might 
not  have  evolved.  With  unlimited  ecological  opportunity,  time  and  the  consti- 
tutional make-up  of  the  geospizine  ancestors  are  the  over-riding  restrictions 
shaping  the  evolutionary  destiny  of  the  finches. 

The  pre-adaptational  potential  of  the  ancestral  geospizines  was  consid- 
erable,  to  judge  from  the  results  of  adaptive  radiation  that  we  see  today  (fig. 


138  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

1).  This  genetic  potential  was  released  in  the  insular  environment  of  Galapa- 
gos where  rather  sudden  changes  in  the  feeding  mechanism  and  associated  be- 
havior were  necessitated  by  frequent  shifts  in  the  conditions  of  the  environ- 
ment resulting  from  repeated  inter-island  invasions.  One  character,  possibly 
of  a  pre-adaptive  nature,  occurring  in  all  geospizines  and  also  in  several  close- 
ly related  mainland  groups,  is  the  presence  of  partially  pneumatized  window 
areas  in  the  cranial  vault.  These  stress-resistant  regions  may  have  permitted 
more  rapid  readjustments  in  the  head  than  would  otherwise  have  been  possible, 
as  new  feeding  opportunities  became  available  (Bowman,  1961,  p.  261). 

The  origin  of  new  species  of  Galapagos  finches.  When  the  ancestral 
geospizines  arrived  in  Galapagos,  they  were  confronted  with  an  environment 
different  in  most  of  its  ecological  aspects  (food  resources,  competitive  neigh- 
bors, and  the  like)  from  the  one  just  vacated.  Following  the  original  estab- 
lishment of  a  colony  on  one  of  the  islands,  the  birds  soon  moved  about  the  ar- 
chipelago establishing  footholds  on  other  islands.  During  such  periods  of 
population  dispersal,  the  birds  were  confronted  with  somewhat  different  food 
conditions  (among  other  things),  and  being  more  or  less  isolated  by  ocean  from 
other  populations,  island  ecotypes  soon  evolved.  Ultimately,  selection  piled 
up  sufficient  genetic  differences  so  that  when  the  incipient  species  on  island 
"A"  (where  it  had  evolved)  moved  to  island  "B,"  it  remained  reproductive ly 
isolated  from  all  other  closely  related  birds  present,  and  thereafter  behaved 
as  a  full  species.  In  this  manner  the  various  species  of  Geospizinae  were 
probably  evolved. 

Island  races  of  the  same  species  are  a  reflection  of  subtle  inter-island 
differences  in  feeding  niches.  For  example,  the  Geospizamagnirostris  "format" 
might  have  been  evolved  on  an  island  where  large  hard  seeds  were  the  primary 
food  available.  Once  this  basic  grosbeak  bill  appeared,  its  size  could  be 
further  modified  by  selection  to  better  accomodate  the  slightly  different-sized 
hard  seeds  prevailing  on  other  islands,  thus  effecting  the  most  efficient  bill- 
mechanism  commensurate  with  the  available  food  resources. 


Conclusion 

The  patterns  of  evolution  discussed  above  are  largely  concerned  with 
biological  adjustments  in  Darwin's  finches  to  their  food  plants  and  animals 
(such  as  powerful  bills  for  crushing  hard  seeds  and  cutting  into  tough  woody 
tissues)!  to  predators  (such  as  plumage  coloration  for  concealment),  and  to 
the  physical  environment  (such  as  relatively  small  hearts  in  response  to  warm 
and  constant  air  temperatures).  Each  pattern  involved  not  only  the  whole  or- 
ganism, but  the  organism  plus  its  environment.  It  is  the  totality  of  these  func- 
tional systems  that  has  been  subjected  to  selection. 


No.  44)  BOWMAN:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  139 


Literature  Cited 
Alpert,  L. 

1946.  Notes    on  the   weather  and   climate   of  Seymour  Island,    Galapagos   Archi- 

pelago.       Bulletin    of    the    American    Meteorological    Society,    vol.    27, 
pp.   200-209. 

BOWMAN,    R.    I. 

1961.         Morphological    differentiation    and    adaptation    in   the    Galapagos    finches. 
University  of  California   Publications   in   Zoology,   vol.58,   pp.   1-VII, 
1-302. 
Chubb,  L.  J. 

1933.  Geology  of  Galapagos,  Cocos,  and  Easter  islands.  Bernice  P.  Bishop 
Museum  Bulletin,  p.    110. 

DARWIN,    C. 

1845.        Journal   of  researches   into  the  natural  history  and   geology  of  the   coun- 
tries   visited    during  the    voyage   of    H.M.S.   Beagle  round  the   world, 
under   the   command   of   Capt.   FitzRoy,   R.   N.,    2d  rev.   ed.;   London; 
John  Murray. 
GIFFORD,    E.   W. 

1919.  Field  notes  on  the  land  birds  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  and  of  Cocos 
Island,  Costa  Rica.  Proceedings  of  the  California  Academy  of  Sci- 
ences,  ser.  4,   vol.  21,  pp.   189-258. 

Hartman,  F.  a. 

1954.  Cardiac    and  pectoral   muscles   of  trochilids.    Auk,   vol.   72,   pp.   267-469. 

1955.  Heart  weights  in  birds.   Condor,   vol.   57,  pp.   221-238. 

Hooker,  J.  D. 

1847.  On  the  vegetation  of  the  Galapagos  Archipelago,  as  compared  with  that 
of  some  other  tropical  islands  and  of  the  continent  of  America. 
Transactions  of  the  Linnaean  Society,  vol.  20,  pp.   235-262. 

Howell,  J.  T. 

1942.        Up  under  the   equator.  Sierra  Club   Bulletin,   vol.   27,  pp.   79-82. 

Lack,  D. 

1945.  The  Galapagos  finches  (Geo  spizinae ):  A  study  in  variation.  Occasional 
Papers    of   the    California    Academy    of   Sciences,,  no.    21,    pp.    1-159. 

1947.  Darwin's  finches.   Cambridge   University  Press.   208  pp. 

Lowe,  P.  R. 

1930.  Hybridisation  in  birds  in  its  possible  relation  to  the  evolution  of  the 
species.   Bulletin  of  the  British  Ornithological  Club,  vol.  50,  pp.  22-29. 

MAYR,   E. 

1954.  Change  of  genetic  environment  and  evolution.   In,    Evolution   as   a  process, 

pp.    157-180;  Editors:   J.   Huxley,   A.   C.   Hardy,  E.   B.   Ford;  London: 
George  Allen  and  Unwin. 

NORRis,  R.  A.,  AND  F.S.L.  Williamson 

1955.  Variation    and  relative  heart  size   of  certain  passerines   with  increase   in 

altitude.  Wilson   Bulletin,   vol.  67,  pp.   78-83. 

RIDGWAY,   R. 

1896  [T897].  Birds  of  the  Galapagos  Archipelago.  Proceedings  of  the  U.nited 
States  National  Museum,  vol.    19,  pp.   459-670. 


140  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 


Rothschild,  W.,  and  E.  Hartert 

1899.  A  review  of  the  ornithology  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  With  notes  on 
the   Webster-H  arris  expedition.  Novites  Zoologicae,  vol.  6,  pp.  85-205. 

Shumway,  G. 

1954.  Carnegie  Ridge  and  Cocos  Ridge  in  the  east  equatorial  Pacific.  Jour- 
nal of  Geology,  vol.  62,   pp.   573-586. 

Simpson,  G.  G.,  C  S.  Pittendrigh,  and  L.  H.  Tiffany 

1957.  Life:  an  introduction  to  biology.  New  York:  Harcourt,  Brace  and  Co. 
845  pp. 

Snodgrass,  R.  E.,  and  E.  Heller 

1904.        Papers     from    the    Hopkins-Stanford    Galapagos    expedition,     1898-1899. 

XVI.    Birds.      Proceedings   of   the    Washington    Academy    of   Sciences, 

vol.  5,  pp.  231-372. 
Stebbins,  G.  L. 

1952.  Aridity    as    a   stimulus    to    plant   evolution.     American    Naturalist,    vol.    86, 

pp.  33-44. 
Stewart,  A. 

1911.  A  botanical  survey  of  the  Galapagos  Islands,  Proceedings  of  the  Cali- 
fornia Academy  of  Sciences,    ser.   4,   vol.    1,   pp.   7-288. 

1915.  Some  observations  concerning  the  botanical  conditions  on  the  Galapa- 
gos Islands.  Transactions  of  the  Wisconsin  Academy  of  Sciences, 
Arts  and  Letters,  vol.   18,  pp.   272-340. 

Stresemann,  E. 

1936.  Z  ur  Frage  der  Artibildung  in  der  Gattung  Geospiza.  Orgaan  der  Club 
van  Nederlandische    Vogelkundigan,    vol.   9,   pp.    13-21. 

SVENSON,   H.   K. 

1946.  Vegetation  of  the  coast  of  Ecuador  and  Peru  and  its  relation  to  the  Ga- 
lap  a-gos  Archipelago.  American  Journal  of  Botany,  vol.33,  pp.  394- 
426. 

Swarth,  H.  S. 

1931.  The  avifauna  of  the  Galapagos  Islands.  Occasional  Papers  of  the  Cali- 
fornia Academy   of  Sciences,   no.    18,   pp.    1-299. 

1934.  The  bird  fauna  of  the  Galapagos  Islands  in  relation  to  species  forma- 
tion. Biological  Reviews,   vol.  9,   pp.  213-234. 

VAN  Dyke,  E.G. 

1953.  The     Coleoptera    of    the    Galapagos    Islands.      Occasional    Papers    of   the 

California   Academy   of  Sciences,   no.    22,   pp.    1-181. 

Vinton,  K.  W. 

1951.  Origin  of  life  on  the  Galapagos  Islands.  American  Journal  of  Science, 
vol.  249,  pp.   356-376. 

White,  M.  J.  D. 

1948.         Animal   cytology   and   evolution.    Cambridge    University  Press. 

Wright,  S. 

1940.  Breeding  structures  of  populations  in  relation  to  speciation.  American 
Naturalist,   vol.   74,   pp.  232-248. 


PROTECTION  AND 

CONSERVATION  PROBLEMS 

ON  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS* 

Misael  Acosta-Solfs 

Instituto  Ecuatoriano  de  Ciencias  Naturales 
Quito,   Ecuador 


The  Galapagos  Archipelago  is  a  jewel  of  nature  which,  after  Darwin's 
studies  in  1859,  has  attracted  the  attention  of  scientists  the  world  over. 

In  1934  several  sections  of  Galapagos  were  declared  an  official  reserve. 
At  that  time,  the  Government  of  Ecuador  authorized  a  survey  by  the  engineer 
Frederick  Paez.  He  was  encouraged  by  a  group  of  professors  at  the  Ecuador- 
ian Central  University,  and  by  many  other  persons  fond  of  nature,  including 
the  learned  professor  Jonah  Guerrero. 

Unfortunately,  the  executive  decree  of  1934  did  not  have  the  expected 
results  because  there  was  no  means  for  its  enforcement.  The  scientific  inter- 
est of  the  world  bloomed  again  in  1935  because  of  the  centenary  of  Darwin's 
visit  to  Galapagos. 

In  1937  the  Ecuadorian  Government  organized  its  first  National  Scien- 
tific Commission.  The  members  of  this  commission,  which  included  this  au- 
thor, and  helped  by  the  President  in  charge  at  that  time.  General  Albert  Enqi- 
quez,  took  a  trip  to  Galapagos  in  a  warship  of  the  National  Navy,  Cotopaxi 
Cannoneer.  On  its  return,  a  complete  report  was  prepared  which  pointed  to  the 
necessity  of  preserving  all  nature  in  the  Archipelago  and  especially  its  rich 
fisheries  resources.  But  practically  no  real  protection  resulted.  Then  this  au- 
thor suggested  the  need  for  establishing  a  biological  station  so  that  scientif- 
ic investigations  on  the  Galapagos  biota  could  be  carried  out  and  at  the  same 
time  some  protection  afforded  the  native  biota.  Only  after  23  years,  because 
of  interest  demonstrated  by  the  Government  of  Ecuador,  UNESCO,  and  the  In- 
ternational Union  for  the  Conservation  of  Nature,  has  the  establishment  of  a 
biological  station  on  Galapagos  become  a  reality.  This  research  center  has 
been  named  in  honor  of  Charles  Darwin,  the  great  British  naturalist,  and  au- 
thor of  the  "Origin  of  Species." 


*  Presented   at  the  TENTH   PACIFIC  SCIENCE   CONGRESS   of  the   Pacific   Science 

Association,     held   at   the   University  of  Hawaii,   Honolulu,   Hawaii,  U.S.A.,    21    August 
to   6   September  1961,    and   sponsored    by    the  NATIONAL   ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,     BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,  and  the  University  of  Hawaii. 

-141- 


142  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

Galapagos  is  one  of  the  most  interesting  scientific  reserves  in  Ecua- 
dor, and,  indeed,  in  the  world. 

To  preserve  Galapagos  as  a  National  reserve  means  the  protection  and 
conservation  of  its  resources.  Its  protection  is  indispensable  not  only  for  my 
country,  but  also  for  the  world.  For  many  years  scientists  and  scientific  in- 
stitutions have  been  unsuccessful  in  coordinating  their  plans,  but  since  1957, 
as  a  result  of  the  studies  and  reports  of  two  biologists,  Dr.  Robert  I.  Bowman 
of  the  United  States  of  America,  and  Dr.  I.  Eibl-Eibesfeldt  of  Austria,  plans 
moved  quickly  ahead  for  the  establishment  of  a  biological  station  at  Academy 
Bay  on  the  south  side  of  Indefatigable  (Santa  Cruz)  Island.  Sponsors  of  the 
1957  reconnaissance  were  the  International  Union  for  the  Conservation  of  Na- 
ture, UNESCO,  the  International  Committee  for  Bird  Protection,  the  New  York 
Zoological  Society,  the  Conservation  Foundation,  and  Life  Magazine.  In  1959, 
and  coincident  with  the  "Darwin  Centennial,"  the  Charles  Darwin  Foundation 
for  the  Galapagos  Isles  was  founded  by  Professor  Victor  VanStraelen,  in  Bel- 
gium. The  principal  purpose  of  this  international  scientific  organization  is  to 
conserve  the  indigenous  biota  of  Galapagos  and  to  promote  scientific  research 
of  a  fundamental  nature  in  the  Galapagos  region. 

Now  we  must  ask,  does  the  Galapagos  Archipelago  need  only  protection 
or  does  it  also  need  better  methods  of  conservation? 

Distinction  Between  "Protection"  and  "Conservation" 

We  need  to  distinguish  between  "protection"  and  "conservation,"  since 
these  terms  are  often  confused. 

"Protection"  is  a  word  generally  used  by  naturalists  who  are  not  prim- 
arily concerned  with  economic  benefit  or  any  other  utilitarian  exploitation. 
Their  point  of  view  is  mainly  scientific  and  esthetic.  They  are  concerned  with 
spiritual  enjoyment  for  themselves  and  future  generations.  "Conservation"  is 
a  practical  and  positive  word  with  economic  connotations,  that  is  used  by 
those  who  look  upon  nature  as  a  resource  for  exploitation,  but  who  use  mod- 
ern principles  of  management  to  preserve  the  resources  of  today  so  that  some 
will  remain  for  the  future.  Thus  the  purposes  and  objectives  of  the  protec- 
tionists and  conservationists  are  rather  different,  technically  speaking.  It  is 
not  possible  to  separate  their  activities  because  the  protectionists  also  tend 
to  preserve  the  fauna,  flora,  and  minerals;  the  conservationists,  in  turn,  sup- 
port the  protection  of  certain  species  of  plants  and  animals  and  kinds  of  min- 
erals. 

The  conservationists  tend  to  preserve  definite  species  of  animals,  for 
example,  because  they  constitute  an  economic  resource,  that  is  to  say,  a  na- 
tural resources  which  must  not  be  exhausted  and  thereby  harm  those  people  who 
make  their  living  by  its  exploitation.  These  people  are  not  interested  in  a 
species  as  such,  but  in  its  quantity.  On  the  other  hand,  the  protectionists  are 
preoccupied,  fundamentally,  with  species  which  are  disappearing  or  which  are 


No.  44)  ACOSTA-SOLIS:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  143 

close  to  extinction.  The  protectionist  is  not  interested  in  the  species  for  its 
economic  utility  or  for  personal  profit,  but  for  science.  He  looks  at  species 
as  objects  for  scientific  study. 

The  main  difference  between  protectionists  and  conservationists  is  in 
the  application  of  their  own  concepts  to  the  native  biota  and  to  the  introduced 
or  exotic  one.  The  protectionists  are  almost  entirely  preoccupied  with  the 
protection  of  the  native  biota  that  forms  the  natural  life  of  a  specific  environ- 
ment, because  invasions  by  exotic  species  always  produce  a  disturbance  of 
the  biological  equilibrium  of  the  environment  where  the  invasion  has  taken 
place.  But  the  latter  does  not  disturb  the  conservationists,  especially  if  they 
are  hunters  or  fishermen.  The  protectionist,  using  scientific  means,  tries  to 
prevent  the  invasion  of  species  which  will  disturb  the  natural  biological  en- 
vironment. He  does  not  oppose  the  introduction  and  acclimatization  of  exotic 
species,  provided  they  are  retained  in  some  special  gardens.  The  introduction 
of  exotic  species  in  large  areas  or  national  parks  can  form  the  basis  of  a  new 
economic  resource  deserving  of  the  conservationist's  attention. 

For  the  protectionist,  any  species  deserves  protection  when  it  is  threat- 
ened with  extinction.  The  conservationist  is  interested  only  in  the  species  of 
economic  value  as  exploitable  resources  of  nature. 

Thus  insofar  as  Galapagos  is  concerned,  it  must  be  borne  in  mind  that 
both  concepts,  protection  and  conservation,  are  applicable  to  the  biology  and 
pedology  of  the  different  islands  of  the  archipelago. 


Some  Protectionist  Suggestions 

The  protectionist  suggestions  given  by  this  author  since  1937  and  sub- 
sequently encouraged  by  UNESCO  and  lUCN  reports  are,  in  short,  as  follows: 

1.  To  determine  those  islands  or  areas  to  be  set  aside  as  reserves  for 
Galapagos  wildlife  where  effective  protection  can  be  enforced.  In  the  areas 
declared  as  "reserves,"  all  hunting,  agriculture,  and  human  settlement  will 
be  prohibited  by  law.  Visits  by  tourists  to  these  reserves  will  have  to  be 
strictly  controlled;  only  the  scientific  excursions  under  competent  leadership 
will  be  permitted;  scientific  collections  should  always  be  allowed  but  only 
under  strict  regulation  in  reserve  areas. 

2.  The  areas  or  islands  declared  as  "reserves"  will  be  those  which 
have  rare  species,  or  species  in  danger  of  extinction,  or  those  that  have  scen- 
eries which  are  worthy  of  protection  as  a  living  museum  of  nature.  Reserves 
must  be  without  settlements.  In  the  areas  where  there  are  villages,  the  "re- 
serves" should  not  be  established  and  that  is  why  we  cannot  speak  about 
"reserves"  in  Chatham  (San  Cristobal)  and  Charles  (Floreana)  islands;  also 
in  the  southern  part  of  Albemarle  (Isabela)  Island.  On  the  contrary,  on  Inde- 
fatigable Island  (Isla  Santa  Cruz)  there  is  a  special  situation.  The  western 
side  still  possesses  a  relatively  undisturbed  habitat  with  good-sized  colonies 


144  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

of  giant  tortoises,  in  need  of  protection.  And  in  the  eastern  end  of  the  same 
island  there  are  agricultural  lands  which  have  not  yet  been  farmed  and  where 
human  population  is  scarce.  In  this  case  the  best  thing  to  do  is  to  delimit  the 
areas:  those  for  protection,  and  those  for  settling  and  agriculture.  In  this  way 
there  would  be  less  interference  between  the  two  functions,  the  natural  biol- 
ogy of  the  giant  tortoises,  and  the  use  of  the  natural  edaphic  resources,  all 
managed  under  conservationist  principles. 

3.  Besides  the  legal  and  technical  provisions  suggested  since  1937  in 
behalf  of  protection  of  the  Galapagos  biota,  it  will  be  necessary  to  instigate 
a  campaign  of  protectionist  publicity  all  over  Ecuador,  in  the  grade  schools, 
high  schools,  etc.,  and  enlist  their  cooperation  in  the  governmental  project, 
so  that  they  will  visit  the  Archipelago  and  be  spokesmen  for  its  protection, 
and  by  their  actions  set  a  good  example.  On  the  other  hand,  the  campaign  of 
conservationist  education  will  have  to  be  taught  to  the  settlers  who  live  in 
Galapagos,  through  lectures,  illustrated  pamphlets,  and  motion  pictures.  In 
this  way,  the  settlers  will  learn  how  to  be  responsible  to  surrounding  nature 
and  to  recognize  the  value  of  the  native  biota. 

Some  Conservationist  Suggestions 

The  conservationist  must  bear  in  mind  the  following  points  when  deal- 
ing with  the  economic  resources  of  Galapagos. 

1.  Recognition  of  the  good  agricultural  lands  in  Galapagos.  According 
to  our  experience,  the  islands  that  have  agricultural  lands  with  areas  or  high 
strips  at  500  meters  above  sea-level  are  the  large  ones,  that  is  to  say,  where 
humidity  and  rains  have  permitted  the  formation  of  a  thicker  soil  stratum,  where 
there  is  a  lush  herbaceous,  shrubby,  and  arboreal  vegetation.  We  have  some 
examples  of  these  on  Chatham  (San  Cristobal)  and  Charles  (Floreana)  islands, 
on  the  eastern  side  of  Indefatigable  (Santa  Cruz)  Island,  and  on  the  south  of 
Albemarle  (Isabela)  Island. 

2.  After  the  pedological  and  agricultural  studies,  we  must  classify  the 
lands  according  to  agricultural  capacities,  that  is  to  say,  to  delimit  them  on 
a  special  map.  It  is  true  that  this  work  would  take  a  long  time,  but  on  the 
other  hand  this  would  show  us  the  best  use  of  the  lands  for  grazing,  planta- 
tions, forests,  horticulture,  etc.  Good  land  use  is  essential  for  maintenance 
of  continuous  productivity  of  agricultural  crops  as  well  as  for  wildlife. 

3.  Careful  planning  of  colonization  and  agriculture  is  absolutely  neces- 
sary for  wise  land  use  on  Galapagos.  The  productivity  of  Galapagos  is  strictly 
limited  and  therefore  Galapagos  colonization  must  be  meticulously  controlled. 

Galapagos  Fauna  that  Must  be  Protected  Immediately 

According  to  our  personal  observations  in  1937,  supplemented  by  the 
findings  of  later  investigators,  the  following  groups  of  animals  must  be  pro- 


No.  44)  ACOSTA-SOLIS:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  145 

tected  by  legal  decrees  and  also  by  actual  enforcement. 

1.  The  gigantic  tortoises  on  Hood  (Espanola),  Duncan  (Pinzon),  and 
Abingdon  (Pinta)  islands,  and,  if  not  too  late,  the  ones  in  the  interior  of  Cha- 
tham (San  Cristobal)  Island.  There  are  numerous  torotises  on  Indefatigable 
(Santa  Cruz)  and  Albemarle  (Isabela)  islands,  which  are  also  in  great  danger 
of  extinction  because  of  the  relentless  and  uncontrolled  hunting. 

2.  The  land  iguana  needs  protection,  especially  the  small  colony  that 
exists  on  Indefatigable  Island.  If  the  western  portion  of  the  island  is  set  aside 
as  a  biological  reservation,  and  if  we  enforce  the  protective  laws,  then  the 
little  colony  can  be  saved  and  even  increased  in  its  own  habitat. 

3.  The  fur  seals  of  Galapagos  must  be  protected  from  hunters. 

4.  Birds  of  all  species  deserve  protection  and  care  from  the  commercial 
hunters.  Penguins  and  flightless  cormorants  are  not  abundant  and  need  full 
protection.  The  flamingos  are  not  very  common  according  to  several  reports, 
and  every  effort  should  be  made  to  fully  protect  this  beautiful  species  in  Ga- 
lapagos. 

Special  Areas 

In  Galapagos  we  can  distinguish  several  islands  or  special  habitats  for 
certain  groups  and  species  of  fauna  and  flora.  In  a  protectionist  sense  the 
following  islands  or  areas  may  be  mentioned  as  being  of  great  biological  im- 
portance: 

A.    Special  areas  for  bird  protection: 

1.  Hood  (Espanola)  Island  is  the  nesting  site  of  the  Galapagos  al- 
batross and  where  blue-footed  boobies,  frigate-birds,  red-billed  tropic-birds, 
and  Ion-billed  mockingbirds  are  concentrated.  The  gigantic  tortoise  is  very 
rare  or  possibly  extinct  on  this  island.  One  of  the  longest  coral-sand  beaches 
in  all  of  Galapagos  is  situated  on  the  north  shore  of  the  island,  adjacent  to 
Gardner- near-Hood  Island. 

2.  Tower  (Espaiiola)  Island  has  a  large  number  of  nesting  red-footed 
and  masked  boobies,  frigate-birds,  and  one  of  the  largest  examples  of  Darwin's 
finches,  Geospiza  magnirostris.  Besides,  in  this  island  there  is  much  beauti- 
ful scenery,  such  as  the  central  crater  lake  with  its  mangrove  swamps  and  the 
picturesque  Darwin  Bay. 

3.  Narbo rough  (Fernandina)  Island  constitutes  the  largest  home  of 
the  Galapagos  penguin  and  flightless  cormorant.  Here  there  are  large  colonies 
of  land  and  sea  iguanas,  and  the  native  rat  (Nesoryzomys  narboroughi).  The 
scenery  of  the  central  crater  of  this  island  is  magnificent.  There  are  hot  sul- 
phur springs  and  very  fresh  lava  flows,  all  of  which  are  of  much  interest  to 
geologists  and  volcanologists.  In  the  fresh  water  that  formerly  occurred  in 
the  central  crater,  a  fish  has  been  collected,  hitherto  unknown  for  the  Galapa- 
gos region.  The  gigantic  tortoises  still  occur  on  the  south  side  of  the  island. 


146  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

Narborough  Island  is  very  important  to  scientists  because  of  its  primitive  na- 
ture and  the  fact  that  the  biota  has  not  been  spoiled  with  the  exotic  plants  and 
animals  that  have  found  their  way  to  all  the  islands  with  permanent  human  hab- 
itations such  as  Chatham  (San  Cristobal),  Charles  (Floreana),  south  Albemarle 
(Isabela),  and  Indefatigable  (Santa  Cruz)  islands. 

4.  Culpepper  rocks,  forming  the  most  northerly  point  in  the  Gala- 
pagos Archipelago,  is  the  appropriate  site  for  the  large  concentration  of  sea- 
birds,  including  boobies,  frigate-birds,  terns,  and  petrels. 

B.  Special  areas  for  the  protection  of  the  gigantic  tortoises: 

1.  Indefatigable  (Santa  Cruz)  Island  is  by  far  the  most  interesting 
of  the  reserves  for  the  gigantic  tortoises.  These  large  reptiles  have  been  dis- 
appearing because  of  abuse  from  colonists,  hunters,  and  collectors.  The  west- 
ern half  of  Indefatigable  Island  must  be  set  aside  as  a  reserve  in  which  no 
agriculture  will  be  permitted. 

2.  Duncan  (Pinzon)  Island  has  some  giant  tortoises  still  remain- 
ing on  its  south  side.  If  we  keep  out  the  hunters  and  collectors  we  should  be 
able  to  restore  this  small  colony  to  its  former  level  of  abundance. 

3.  Abingdon  (Pinta)  Island  still  likely  has  a  few  tortoises.  Full 
protection  should  be  afforded  those  few  remaining  animals. 

4.  Albemarle  (Isabela)  Island  has  many  tortoises  and  is  second 
only  to  Indefatigable  Island  as  an  important  reservoir  of  these  animals.  From 
Perry  Isthmus  to  the  north  end  of  the  island  should  be  kept  as  a  reserve.  Much 
could  be  done  to  teach  the  colonists  on  the  southern  part  of  Isabela  Island 
about  the  necessity  of  protecting  these  chelonians. 


C.  Special  areas  for  the  protection  of  land  iguanas: 

1.  Harrington  (Santa  Fe)  Island  is  the  home  of  thousands  of  land 
iguanas  and  feral  goats.  Land  iguanas  have  survived  the  inroads  on  their  num- 
bers made  by  commercial  hunters.  From  now  on  hunting  must  be  curtailed  and 
the  civil  authorities  must  assist  in  the  patrol  work. 

2.  Plaza  Island,  located  at  the  east  end  of  Indefatigable  (Santa 
Cruz)  Island,  constitutes  the  typical  habitat  of  a  pink-colored  iguana.  Be- 
cause of  their  small  numbers  there  is  great  danger  of  extermination  by  hunt- 
ers. This  island  also  harbors  sea  lions,  petrels,  tropic-birds,  and  because  of 
certain  unusual  geological  aspects,  it  constitutes  a  very  important  area  in  need 
of  reserve  status. 

3.  Narborough  (Fernandina)  Island,  in  addition  to  being  a  reserve 
for  birds,  must  be  considered  as  a  reserve  for  the  marine  and  land  iguanas;  at 
present,  the  colony  of  land  iguanas  is  very  large  and  great  herds  of  marine 
iguanas  may  be  found  along  the  outer  shores.  But  I  repeat,  they  need  official 
and  scientific  control. 


FUTURE  SCIENTIFIC  STUDIES 
IN  THE  GALAPAGOS  ISLANDS* 

Jean  Dorst 

Museum  National  D'Histoire  Naturelle, 
Paris,   France 


The  Galapagos  Islands  rank  among  the  most  celebrated  places  in  the 
world,  since  they  provide  one  of  the  most  clearcut  natural  experiments  in  or- 
ganic evolution.  Every  biologist,  once  in  his  life,  should  go  on  a  pilgrimage 
to  the  spot  where  one  of  the  greatest  achievements  of  science  was  born. 

It  was  in  the  Galapagos  that  young  Charles  Darwin  found  his  inspira- 
tion. In  July,  1837,  not  later  than  two  years  after  his  visit  to  Galapagos,  Dar- 
win wrote:  "I  opened  my  first  notebook  on  Transmutation  of  Species.  Had 
been  greatly  struck  from  about  month  of  previous  March  on  character  of  South 
American  fossils  and  species  on  Galapagos  archipelago.  These  facts  origin 
(especially  latter)  of  all  my  views." 

These  prospects  are  not  only  of  historical  and  retrospective  value.  The 
islands  are  still  today  "evolution's  workshop  and  showcase,"  and  they  have 
maintained  the  same  importance  up  to  the  present  time,  where  a  great  deal  of 
research  remains  to  be  done  in  various  fields. 

Of  course,  evolution  is  observable  anywhere  in  the  world,  but  the  trends 
and  the  laws  which  govern  the  phenomenon  often  are  hidden  by  complexity  and 
by  the  innumerable  factors  involved.  On  the  contrary  the  simplification  of  the 
Galapagos  ecosystem  makes  it  much  more  apparent  in  these  islands. 

Numerous  studies  in  systematics  have  already  been  done  on  the  Gala- 
pagos. Vertebrates  have  been  the  most  thoroughly  studied,  except  the  smaller 
reptiles  and  the  endemic  rats.  Nevertheless  most  of  the  investigations  on  in- 
vertebrates are  outdated  or  even  completely  missing.  The  inventory  of  all  liv- 
ing creatures,  from  the  smallest  to  the  giant  tortoises,  must  be  undertaken  by 
priority  with  all  the  modern  concepts  in  mind.  This  will  form  a  basis  for  fu- 
ture studies  on  the  Galapagos  fauna  and  especially  those  dealing  with  the 
biological  aspects.  Studies  in  systematics  will  also  shed  new  light  on  the 
problems  of  speciation  and  on  evolution  in  progress.  Owing  to  the  laws  which 
govern  evolution  among  invertebrates,  we  may  assume  that  a  better  knowledge 


*  Presented  at  the  TENTH  PACIFIC  SCIENCE  CONGRESS  of  the  Pacific  Science 
Association,  held  at  the  University  of  Hawaii,  Honolulu,  Hawaii,  U.S.A.,  21  August 
to   6  September  1961,  and  sponsored    by    the    NATIONAL  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES,    BERNICE 

Pauahi  Bishop  Museum,  and  the   University  of  Hawaii. 


-  147 


148  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

of  the  microfauna  could  lead  to  a  better  understanding  of  many  biological  prob- 
lems. In  recent  years,  scientists  have  brought  new  techniques  to  a  high  degree 
of  perfection,  especially  in  the  field  of  genetics,  chromosome  analysis,  bio- 
chemical tests  like  chromatography,  and  even  micromorphology.  Many  Galapa- 
gos animals  could  be  tested  by  such  techniques  and  the  results  may  give  clues 
to  their  interrelationships  and  on  the  modes  of  evolution  in  each  group. 

This  applies  especially  to  genetical  investigations.  The  geneticists 
have  now  achieved  a  great  deal  of  information  on  the  mechanism  of  heredity. 
New  methods  and  large  scale  experiments  have  been  undertaken.  But  we  may 
wonder  why  no  one  has  tried  to  apply  these  techniques  to  the  Galapagos  ani- 
mals or  plants  — a  wonderful  field  for  experimentation  owing  to  the  simplifica- 
tion of  the  problems  involved  as  mentioned  above. 

However,  evolutionary  studies  are  only  one  aspect  of  the  investigations 
to  be  undertaken  in  the  Galapagos,  where  biological  researches  of  all  types 
might  be  successful. 

One  of  the  many  fields  of  investigation  could  deal  with  behavior,  some 
very  peculiar  trends  being  observable  on  these  islands.  The  earlier  natural- 
ists reported  on  strange  behavior  patterns  to  be  observed  among  Galapagos 
birds  and  reptiles.  Development  of  these  patterns  are,  in  large  part,  under  the 
influence  of  the  very  particular  conditions  prevailing  in  the  islands,  where 
the  number  of  species  is  smaller  than  anywhere  else,  and  where  few  enemies 
are  present,  the  mammals  being  almost  completely  absent.  The  splitting  of  spe- 
cies into  local  populations,  owing  to  isolation  on  islands  with  no  communica- 
tion, has  a  role  which  can  not  be  minimized.  A  great  deal  of  observation  con- 
firms that  the  trends  apparent  in  behavior  have  paralleled  those  observed  in 
morphological  diversification. 

One  of  the  best  examples  is  to  be  found  among  the  well  known  Darwin's 
finches  or  Geospizinae,  studied  from  the  morphological  point  of  view  by  David 
Lack  (Darwin's  Finches,  London,  1947)  and  recently  by  Robert  Bowman  (Univ. 
Calif.  Publ.  Zool.  58,  1961).  The  evolution  of  these  fringillids  shows  a  per- 
fect adaptive  radiation  in  morphology  and  anatomy  in  relation  to  diversity  of 
habitats  and  ecological  niches.  They  also  show  a  very  elaborate  evolution  in 
behavior  patterns,  and  especially  in  vocalizations.  In  the  last  few  months  Dr. 
Bowman  has  undertaken  a  thorough  study  of  these  aspects  with  modern  tech- 
niques. But  some  other  aspects  might  be  investigated  with  success  and  such 
researches  have  to  be  extended  to  other  birds  like  the  Galapagos  mockingbirds 
(Nesomimus)  differentiated  into  several  geographical  races.  Such  studies, 
which  in  recent  times  brought  so  many  interesting  facts  to  our  knowledge, 
must  be  extended  to  all  Galapagos  birds  and  also  to  the  reptiles,  especially 
the  marine  iguana  ( Amblyrhynchus  cristatus),  one  of  the  most  interesting  rep- 
tiles in  the  world.  This  lizard,  with  numerous  adaptations  to  conditions  in  the 
sea,  from  which  it  never  straggles  far,  shows  very  strong  tendencies  to  gre- 
gariousness,  especially  along  the  shores  of  Narborough  Island,  where  colonies 


No.  44)  DORST:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  149 

of  many  hundreds  may  be  observed;  but  anywhere  else  this  iguana  is  more  or 
less  gregarious  and  single  individuals  are  met  very  seldom.  This  social  be- 
havior may  be  very  interesting  to  investigate  carefully  in  relation  to  ecologi- 
cal factors.  Of  course,  these  chosen  examples  are  only  a  few  among  the  many 
which  could  be  studied  in  the  Galapagos. 

Furthermore  one  of  the  main  tasks  for  scientists  in  these  islands  is  to 
study  the  Galapagos  ecosystem.  This  aspect  of  investigation  has  a  particular 
importance  in  the  light  of  conservation  of  nature  and  wildlife.  Nature  is  badly 
threatened  in  the  Galapagos  as  a  consequence  of  human  impact.  When  they 
were  discovered  in  1535  by  the  Bishop  of  Panama,  Tomas  de  Berlanga,  they 
were  in  a  virgin  condition.  Since  this  not  so  remote  time,  various  people  set- 
tled, destroyed  the  habitats,  and  killed  the  animals,  sometimes  for  food,  some- 
times for  "fun."  Moreover,  domestic  animals,  and  especially  goats  and  pigs, 
have  been  introduced  and  soon  became  feral.  They  fundamentally  modified  the 
balance  of  nature  and  contributed  in  a  very  large  measure  to  depletion  of  stocks 
of  endemic  species  and  disruption  of  natural  habitats.  Therefore  many  species 
are  on  the  verge  of  extinction  and  some  must  already  be  considered  to  have 
vanished  completely.  To  preserve  what  is  left  we  must  undertake  a  thorough 
ecological  study  of  the  environment  in  the  Galapagos. 

The  pedological  analysis  is  one  of  the  first  tasks  as  it  will  constitute 
the  basis  for  all  further  work.  It  will  also  be  a  wonderful  field  of  investigation 
in  itself,  since  the  Galapagos,  purely  volcanic  in  origin,  offer  various  stages 
of  transformation  and  colonization  of  lava  flows  by  microorganisms  and  plants. 
All  stages  from  pure  mineral  soil  to  top-soil,  where  cultivation  is  possible  (in 
some  very  limited  areas),  are  present  in  these  islands.  A  detailed  study  of 
the  soils,  in  relation  to  the  geologic  history  of  the  islands  and  chronology  of 
the  various  lava  flows  and  volcanic  eruptions,  might  lead  to  discovery  of  some 
very  important  facts  and  to  a  better  understanding  of  the  evolution  of  land  of 
volcanic  origin.  By  the  way,  it  could  also  give  a  basis  for  better  land  use, 
avoiding  utilization  for  agricultural  purposes  of  land  that  is  better  kept  in  its 
natural  state. 

The  second  stage  of  such  a  broad  ecological  survey  is  a  thorough  study 
of  structure  of  vegetation.  Provided  a  complete  systematic  list  of  all  plant 
species  living  in  the  Galapagos  is  available,  it  would  be  a  fascinating  work 
to  describe  the  various  plant  communities  and  to  follow  their  evolution.  These 
communities  range  in  type  from  real  desert  biomes  with  a  highly  characteristic 
spaced  distribution  of  cacti  and  spiny  bushes,  with  large  barren  areas  in  be- 
tween, to  grasslands,  and  dense  moist  forests,  among  which  the  lofty  Scale- 
sia  trees,  an  endemic  genus  of  Compositae,  are  the  most  conspicuous  plants. 
Many  forms  of  plants  could  be  studied  in  relation  to  the  different  life  zones. 
Besides  knowledge  of  their  relationship  —  especially  in  Scalesia,  wild  toma- 
toes and  cacti  —  could  lead  to  very  interesting  conclusions  on  plant  evolution. 
These  studies,  in  relation  to  climate  and  soil  distribution,  must  be  synthesized 


150  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

and  then  summarized  in  a  detailed  vegetation  map  covering  the  whole  Archi- 
pelago, a  great  need  for  all  scientists  working  in  this  part  of  the  world. 

Like  animals,  plants  have  been  modified  to  a  large  extent  by  the  impact 
of  species  introduced  by  man,  voluntarily  or  not,  and  which  compete  with  en- 
demics and  often  compel  them  to  modify  their  response.  We  have  at  our  dis- 
posal numerous  data  collected  by  earlier  botanists.  Comparison  with  the  con- 
temporary situation  could  be  of  the  greatest  interest  for  a  historical  approach 
to  an  understandingof  any  fluctuations  in  the  make-up  of  the  flora,  and  of  course 
to  preserve  some  of  the  most  typical,  and  still  untouched,  habitats. 

With  this  pedological  and  botanical  background  zoologists  could  then 
undertake  their  various  investigations  on  terrestrial  communities.  Soil  com- 
munities are  of  primary  interest  and,  as  their  elements  probably  show  marked 
differences  from  what  is  known  in  other  places,  the  complete  study  of  the  sys- 
tem could  be  of  the  greatest  interest.  Soil  ecology  yet  remains  so  little  under- 
stood over  the  world  that  this  particular  aspect  of  investigations  in  the  Gala- 
pagos Islands  could  give  some  clues  to  several  problems  as  yet  unsolved.  If 
we  take  into  consideration  the  upper  levels  of  the  ecosystem,  we  may  imagine 
that  here  also  we  could  bring  new  facts  to  light.  There  are  few  mammals  and 
most  of  the  terrestrial  vertebrates  are  birds  or  reptiles.  Leaving  aside  the 
birds,  the  place  of  tortoises,  land  iguanas,  and  smaller  lizards  in  the  ecosys- 
ten  is  to  be  investigated  thoroughly,  and,  besides  being  of  interest  in  itself, 
this  may  give  a  good  idea  of  what  life  was  like  in  former  times.  In  the  Gala- 
pagos we  are  faced  with  a  "fossil  biocenosis."  Many  adaptations,  some  very 
strict, may  be  found  between  reptiles  and  plants.  Recently  Rick  and  Bowman 
(Evolution,  15,  pp.  407-417,  1961)  emphasized  the  fact  that  the  seeds  of  na- 
tive tomatoes,  subject  to  a  dormancy  of  indefinite  duration,  may  be  activated 
in  the  digestive  tract  of  the  giant  tortoises.  The  passage  through  the  gut,  re- 
quiring from  one  to  three  weeks  and  even  longer,  produces  a  marked  improve- 
ment in  speed  and  percentage  of  germination.  Thus  tortoises  may  be  the  main 
agents  for  breaking  the  dormancy  and  also  for  actually  spreading  the  seeds 
through  their  droppings  —  a  very  important  adaptive  device.  Similar  examples 
of  symbiosis  might  be  found  in  many  other  aspects  of  the  Galapagos  biota, 
which,  from  the  biological  point  of  view,  constitutes  a  distinct  world  in  itself, 
evolved  in  isolation  from  the  rest  of  the  world. 

To  get  information  on  the  evolution  of  the  balance  of  nature  in  the  Ga- 
lapagos, much  routine  work  is  to  be  undertaken  immediately  under  the  direct 
guidance  of  the  Darwin  Research  Station,  beginning  with  censuses  of  all  threat- 
ened species  in  well  defined  areas  or  along  carefully  chosen  linear  transects. 
Periodically,  i.e.,  several  times  a  year,  reptiles  and  birds  must  be  numbered. 
These  figures  will  provide  data  on  their  seasonal  fluctuations,  the  dynamics 
of  their  populations,  very  important  basic  facts  that  must  be  known  if  we  want 
to  succeed  in  protecting  them  efficiently. 


No.  44)  DORST:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM  151 

Evolution  of  plant  communities  and  of  habitats  will  be  watched  within 
quadrates  established  in  different  areas,  surrounded  by  fences  and  even  rat- 
proof  walls;  periodical  surveys  will  be  undertaken  to  see  how  the  vegetation 
cover  is  modified  under  natural  conditions.  Comparison  with  unprotected  areas 
will  measure  the  importance  of  the  impact  of  feral  animals  on  the  plants.  This 
work  is  of  primary  importance  as  a  background  for  all  types  of  researches  in 
the  Galapagos,  and  also  as  a  basis  for  the  recommending  of  practical  mea- 
sures to  safeguard  the  wildlife. 

If  research  on  terrestrial  biomes  is  of  such  great  importance  for  the  fu- 
ture of  this  invaluable  natural  heritage,  we  must  not  however  forget  that  the 
seas  surrounding  the  archipelago  also  constitute  a  unique  field  for  investiga- 
tions by  oceanographers.  This  part  of  the  Pacific  is  probably  one  of  the  most 
complex  of  all  marine  sectors.  Several  currents  of  various  origins  meet  here, 
carrying  waters  of  very  different  characteristics.  The  Humboldt  Current,  flow- 
ing from  the  East,  brings  cool  Antarctic  waters,  producing  oceanographic  con- 
ditions seemingly  paradoxical  for  islands  situated  on  the  equator;  it  mingles 
with  warm  eastward  flowing  waters  brought  by  the  Equatorial  counter-current 
and  subsurface  Cromwell  Current,  and  by  a  current  coming  from  the  Gulf  of  Pan- 
ama. From  this  odd  situation  results  a  juxtaposition  of  warm  and  cold  areas, 
often  very  distinct  and  visible  like  a  mosaic  of  different  colors,  and  an  inter- 
mingling of  marine  faunas  of  various  origins.  Fur  seals  and  penguins  are  liv- 
ing side  by  side  with  flying  fishes  and  tropic-birds;  the  same  may  be  observed 
among  marine  invertebrates. 

Distribution  of  marine  plants  and  animals  within  the  whole  archipelago 
must  be  carefully  investigated  in  relation  to  oceanographic  conditions.  This 
aspect  of  the  researches  will  probably  bring  to  light  some  very  interesting 
facts  such  as  a  narrow  range  of  adaptations  of  various  organisms  to  certain 
physical  factors  of  sea  waters. 

These  investigations  could  also  be  of  the  greatest  significance  to  the 
economic  development  of  Galapagos.  Seas  surrounding  the  archipelago  are  nu- 
tritionally very  rich,  and  many  fishes,  the  size  of  which  ranges  from  the  small 
herring  to  the  big  albacore,  swarm  in  these  waters.  A  local  fishing  industry 
has  already  been  established  on  a  very  small  scale,  but  with  encouraging  re- 
sults. We  must  bear  in  mind  that  cropping  of  marine  products  is  the  only  na- 
tural resource  of  direct  economic  importance  in  the  Galapagos  where  agricul- 
ture will  never  be  successful,  except  within  very  limited  areas,  owing  to  water 
shortages  and  untillable  land.  Efforts  to  promote  agriculture  as  a  resource  to 
attract  settlers  or  to  encourage  a  major  expansion  of  cultivation,  would  mean 
poor  land  use  with  concomitant  destruction  of  habitats  suitable  to  wildlife, 
that  could  never  be  restored.  But  if  we  want  to  save  these  islands,  so  famous 
to  scientists,  we  must  give  to  settlers  a  higher  standard  of  living  —  the  best 
way  to  discourage  cropping  of  tortoises  and  destruction  of  habitats,  as  is  true 
everywhere  in  the  world.    We  are  convinced  that  economic  development  of  the 


152 


CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES 


(Occ.  Papers 


Galapagos  Islands  must  consist  of  a  rational  exploitation  of  the  sea,  a  contri- 
bution of  great  value  to  the  many  Ecuadorians  who  suffer  from  an  acute  pro- 
tein shortage.  Such  exploitation  must  be  based  on  scientific  facts  if  we  are  to 
manage  properly  the  fishery  so  as  to  avoid  over  utilization  and  consequent 
depletion  of  the  resource.  Our  research  station  may  assume  this  tesponsibility 
in  cooperation  with  several  other  organizations  interested  in  oceanographic 
researches  in  this  part  of  the  Pacific  Ocean,  such  as  the  Inter-American  Tro- 
pical Tuna  Commission  and  FAO  Laboratories.  Thus  we  should  integrate  into 
the  plan  of  economic  development  of  Ecuador,  which  is  a  point  of  very  great 
importance  both  on  technical  and  psychological  grounds. 

The  program  of  investigation  is  therefore  unlimited.  For  all  these  rea- 
sons it  was  urgent  to  establish  a  research  station  in  these  islands.  This  has 
now  been  done  thanks  to  the  action  of  the  Charles  Darwin  Foundation  for  the 
Galapagos  Isles,  which  organization  was  founded  in  1959  and  is  governed  by 
an  Executive  Council  including  representatives  from  all  nations  interested  in 
these  researches.  With  funds  raised  in  several  countries,  the  construction  of 
a  field  station  has  been  achieved  at  Academy  Bay  on  Indefatigable  Island 
(figs.  1  and  2).  The  station  is  already  in  operation  and  material  improvements 
continue  to  be  made.  The  main  purpose  of  the  Darwin  Foundation  is  to  offer 
scientists  of  all  disciplines  and  nationalities  living  accomodations  and  work- 


Figure   1.     General  maintenance  building  of  the  Charles  Darwin   Research  Station,   Academy 
Bay,    Indefatigable  Island,  Galapagos.     Photo,  courtesy  R.  Leveque,  December,   1961. 


No.  44) 


DORST:  GALAPAGOS  SYMPOSIUM 


153 


«^ 


t9>fM^^' 


Figure    2.      Main   laboratory  building    of  the   Charles   Darwin   Research   Station,  Academy 
Bay,  Indefatigable  Island,  Galapagos.     Photo,  courtesy  R.  Leveque,  December,   1961. 


ing  facilities  in  a  well  equipped  field  laboratory.     Basic  equipment  for  scien- 
tific research,  especially  in  the  field  of  biology,  will  be  available  to  all  visit- 
ing scientists  approved  by  the  Foundation.   A  small  research  vessel  for  trans- 
portation and  oceanographic  studies  will  soon  be  available  for  use  within  the 
limits  of  the  archipelago. 

The  Darwin  Research  Station  is  run  by  its  own  scientific  and  technical 
staff  which  cooperates  fully  with  investigators  working  under  Foundation  au- 
spices. Routine  scientific  work  is  done  by  the  staff,  including  meteorological 
and  oceanographic  measurements,  censuses  of  animals,  studies  on  changes  in 
habitats,  etc.  Of  course,  particular  scientific  investigations  will  be  undertaken 
by  visiting  specialists. 

But  our  main  objective  is  to  make  the  station  open  to  visiting  scientists 
working  on  special  projects  from  many  branches  of  science,  from  geology  to 
oceanography  to  terrestrial  ecology.  It  is  the  intention  of  the  Foundation  to  co- 
operate with  all  scientific  organizations  throughout  the  world  that  are  inter- 
ested in  Galapagos  research. 

It  must  be  remembered,  of  course,  that  we  are  the  guests  of  the  people 
of  Ecuador,  its  government  and  institutions,  which  have  given  enthusiastic 
support  to  our  efforts,  and  with  which  we  are  cooperating  in  all  our  activities. 


154  CALIFORNIA  ACADEMY  OF  SCIENCES  (Occ.  Papers 

Collaboration  with  the  scientific  authorities  is  especially  important  and  it 
will  be  a  great  accomplishment  indeed  when  young  Ecuadorian  scientists  study 
together  with  foreign  specialists  in  our  Station,  a  real  international  crossroad. 

Moreover,  we  hope  that  the  Ecuadorian  government  will  consult  with  the 
Foundation  in  matters  concerning  the  conservation  of  nature  in  Galapagos. 
All  legal  measures  must  be  taken  by  Ecuador,  for  it  is  not  our  intention  to  in- 
terfere in  any  manner  whatsoever  with  its  sovereignty.  We  are  willing,  however, 
to  answer  official  requests  for  advice,  on  the  basis  of  scientific  investiga- 
tions made  under  Foundation  auspices. 

Our  Foundation  is  probably  unique  in  its  class.  It  is  an  international 
institution  whose  aim  is  to  advance  our  scientific  knowledge  specifically  in 
the  Galapagos  region  and  to  conserve  the  remarkable  biota  inhabiting  it.  The 
evolutionary  theories  of  Charles  Darwin,  which  belong  to  mankind  as  a  whole, 
completely  justify  such  an  organization.  On  the  other  hand,  the  invaluable 
natural  inheritance  of  Galapagos  wildlife  was  threatened  by  men  of  all  nation- 
alities; it  is  logical,  therefore,  that  scientists  and  conservationists  from  all 
nations  collaborate  with  the  Ecuadorians  to  study  and  save  what  is  left  of 
these  islands  for  the  benefit  of  generations  to  come. 


MBl.  WHOI    LIBRARY 


UH    ITFV    J 


L